A Local Plan for the future of Staffordshire Moorlands

Core Strategy Development Plan Document Adopted Version 26th March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Foreword

CORE STRATEGY

DEVELOPMENT PLAN DOCUMENT

ADOPTED VERSION

For further information relating to this document, or for a large copy print, audio cassette, braille or other language version, please contact:

Forward Plans,

Staffordshire Moorlands District Council,

Regeneration Services,

Moorlands House,

Stockwell Street,

Leek

ST13 6HQ

Tel.: 01538 395570 Fax: 01538 483753

Email: [email protected]

Adopted by Council 26th March 2014

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

1 Introduction and Background 6 2 A Portrait of Staffordshire Moorlands 22 3 The Challenges 32 4 The Vision 40 5 Aims and Objectives 44 6 The Development Approach 48 7 The Spatial Strategy for Staffordshire Moorlands 52 8 Core Policies 66 8.1 Spatial Strategy Policies 67 8.2 Sustainable Development Policies 104 8.3 Economy and Employment Policies 110 8.4 Housing Policies 116 8.5 Town Centre and Retailing Policies 122 8.6 Design and Conservation Policies 127 8.7 Sustainable Communities Policies 133 8.8 Rural Policies 139 8.9 Natural Environment Policies 143 8.10 Transport Policies 146 9 Delivering the Core Strategy 152

Appendices

A Implementation and Monitoring Plan 156 B Strategic Development Areas Plan 171 C Risk Analysis 177 D Relationship of Key Policies 187 E Core Strategy Links 191 F Development Requirements Summary 195 G Housing Trajectory 197 H List of Saved policies in Adopted Local Plan to be Replaced 201 I Glossary 205 J Village Assessment 213 Key Diagram and Inset Maps 218

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Introduction and Background

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 5 Adopted Core Strategy

1 Introduction and Background

The Local Development Framework

1.1 The Staffordshire Moorlands Local Development Framework (LDF) is a District wide development plan which replaces the Staffordshire Moorlands Local Plan to provide a framework for delivering development to 2026. An LDF differs from a Local Plan as it is made up of several documents, (rather than a single document) which all undergo a separate production process and public examination. The aim is to make the review process quicker and easier to carry out as each document can be reviewed at separate times as appropriate.

1.2 The Core Strategy is the District Council’s third LDF document. The Statement of Community Involvement and the Biddulph Town Centre Area Action Plan are the other LDF documents that have been produced and adopted to date.

1.3 The LDF covers only that part of the District for which the Council has responsibility as a local planning authority. It therefore excludes the Peak District National Park which is covered by a separate LDF prepared by the Peak District National Park Authority.

The Core Strategy

1.4 The Core Strategy is the key LDF document. It is a strategic District wide plan which influences how and where the Staffordshire Moorlands will develop in the future. It sets out what the District Council would like to achieve in each of the main towns Fig. 1 The LDF Process and Relationship of Key Documents and the rural areas outside the Peak District National Park. The Core Strategy provides the framework for future LDF documents which will then identify specific sites for development in the District (Site Allocations DPD) and provide detailed guidance to supplement the policies (Supplementary Planning Documents). It should be noted that the Core Strategy contains all of the policies required to control development and that there will be no separate Development Control Policies document. Fig 1 illustrates the LDF process and the relationship of the Core Strategy to the other LDF documents. The Core Strategy is informed by information, aspirations and actions from many other documents and surveys and also from consultations and engagement with stakeholders, whilst its policies and proposals will be delivered and measured through various implementation and monitoring mechanisms and procedures. The preparation of the Core Strategy has been undertaken in close conjunction with the Sustainable Community Strategy which has also been revised. This has ensured that their aims and objectives are consistent and compatible.

6 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

The Core Strategy comprises of the following:

A Spatial Vision – detailing what the Staffordshire Moorlands will be like in 2026. Strategic Aims and Objectives – stating what it is proposing to achieve.

A Development Approach – setting out the overall approach to development across the District.

A Spatial Strategy – setting out how the vision will be achieved.

Core Policies – setting out specific measures to control development. These are sub-divided into ‘Spatial Strategy’ policies and ‘Development Control’ policies.

A Delivery Plan – setting out how the Strategy will be delivered through implementation and monitoring.

The Development Plan

1.5 Some of the Local Development Documents in the LDF, including the Core Strategy, are known as “Development Plan Documents” because they are part of the statutory Development Plan setting out the local planning authority’s policies and proposals for the development and use of land and buildings in the authority’s area. Decisions on planning applications are required to be made in accordance with particular policies in the Development Plan unless material considerations indicate otherwise. The material considerations could include national planning policy or significant local issues that have arisen since the Development Plan was prepared.

The statutory Development Plan for the Staffordshire Moorlands consists of:

this Core Strategy which was adopted in February 2014; the Biddulph Town Centre Area Action Plan which was adopted in February 2007; the saved policies of Staffordshire County Council’s Minerals and Waste Local Plans, adopted in December 1999 and February 2003 respectively.

1.6 The adopted Core Strategy has replaced the saved policies of the former Staffordshire Moorlands Local Plan. Appendix H illustrates how these policies have been replaced.

1.7 The Localism Bill 2011 provides for the abolition of regional planning and revocation of regional strategies. The West Midlands Regional Spatial Strategy was formally revoked on 20th May 2013 and therefore no longer forms part of the Development Plan for Staffordshire Moorlands. The Localism Act also provides for the preparation of Neighbourhood Plans by Parish Councils and Neighbourhood Forums which would become part of the Development Plan once adopted.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 7 Adopted Core Strategy

Policy Context

Integration of Strategies and Conformity

1.8 The LDF has a key role in providing a spatial dimension for many other strategies and helping in their co-ordination and delivery throughout the Local Planning Authority area. This section summarises the main strategies and policy influences, which have both directed the approach taken in the LDF, and which in turn the LDF will help to deliver and potentially shape. Two strategies were particularly critical in the preparation of the Core Strategy: the Regional Spatial Strategy (RSS) and the Staffordshire Moorlands Sustainable Community Strategy.

1.9 Although the LDF no longer needs to be in general conformity with the RSS, it has influenced the preparation of the Core Strategy at various stages. The last version of the RSS, the Phase 2 Revision RSS was submitted to the Government in December 2007 and was subject to an Examination in Public in 2009, but was not taken further following the abolition of the West Midlands Regional Assembly in 2010. Whilst account has been taken of the policies in the submitted Phase 2 Revision RSS, the Council has also considered more recent evidence to establish any changes in circumstances or a different, more locally specific, interpretation of the evidence which may justify different policies to those in the Phase 2 Revision RSS.

1.10 The LDF also provides the main means of giving spatial expression to the Staffordshire Moorlands Sustainable Community Strategy. The vision, objectives and priorities for Staffordshire Moorlands expressed in the LDF have been developed alongside those of the Sustainable Community Strategy. In addition, there are many other strategies at regional, District and local level that need to be taken into account and which are described later in this section.

Details of all relevant current strategies and plans are set out in the ‘Issues and Evidence Base’ Background Report.

National Policy

1.11 National legislation is set out in the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004, and the planning documents District Councils need to prepare is governed by this Act and set out in a document known as the Town and Country Planning (Local Development) (England) Regulations.

1.12 Guidance on specific subjects such as employment, transport, housing, retail and leisure were contained within national guidance documents known as either Planning Policy Statements (PPS) or Planning Policy Guidance (PPG). In March 2012, the bulk of these were replaced by the National Planning Policy Framework (NPPF). This guidance sets out issues such as building a strong, competitive economy, delivering adequate and suitable housing, protecting green belts, providing supporting infrastructure, and ensuring the vitality of town centres.

1.13 National planning policy promotes the principles of ‘sustainable development’ which has been treated in an integrated way within the Core Strategy, in particular the interrelationship between social inclusion, protecting and enhancing the environment, prudent use of natural resources and economic development.

8 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Regional Policy

1.14 On 20th May 2013 the Regional Strategy for the West Midlands (Revocation) Order 2013 came into force revoking the Regional Spatial Strategy for the West Midlands (RPG11) and the West Midlands Regional Economic Strategy. Despite the abolition of the West Midlands Regional Spatial Strategy, the principles upon which it is based of rural/urban regeneration and sustainability remain valid and, unless superseded by more recent evidence, the evidence base which underpinned the WMRSS will still support the local planning strategy for Staffordshire Moorlands.

West Midlands Regional Spatial Strategy (RPG11)

1.15 Regional policy was set out in the Regional Spatial Strategy (RSS), which was RPG11 (Regional Planning Guidance for the West Midlands). This was published in June 2004. At that time, the Secretary of State supported the principles of the strategy but suggested several issues that needed to be developed further. A revision process was therefore to be undertaken in three phases. The Phase 1 revision relating to the Black Country was completed and incorporated into the RSS in January 2008.

1.16 RSS policy sought to enable all parts of the Region to sustainably meet their own needs in a mutually supportive way. Whilst it sought to focus major development and investment into the Major Urban Areas, such as North Staffordshire, it also recognised the need for other parts of the Region, particularly the main towns and villages, to build on their locational strengths, environmental qualities, regeneration opportunities and the linkages with their local hinterlands to develop their own distinctive roles and character. The key policies in the RSS that have been relevant to Staffordshire Moorlands and their relationship to the Core Strategy policies are set out in Appendix D.

West Midlands Regional Spatial Strategy (Phase 2 Revision)

1.17 The Phase 2 Revision did not change the vision, principles and objectives. The aims of achieving urban and rural renaissance therefore continued to underpin the revision. However, it did include some key differences in the balance of development across the region, specifying housing and employment land requirements for the District as well as establishing a revised regional policy framework for issues relating to housing, employment, sustainability, the environment, retailing and town centres, transport and waste.

1.18 The Preferred Option for the Phase 2 Revision was submitted to the Secretary of State in December 2007. One of the principal aims of the RSS revision was to set out housing figures for each Local Planning Authority up to 2026 which will in turn determine the scale of dwelling provision LDFs will need to meet. For Staffordshire Moorlands the proposed housing requirement was 6,000 dwellings between 2006 and 2026. This is equivalent to an annual development rate of 300 dwellings per annum.

1.19 The revision to WMRSS also sought to make stronger links between housing distribution and employment land provision. In order to address future employment land requirements, the Preferred Option document put forward a five-year “reservoir” approach aimed at quantifying future employment land requirements. For Staffordshire Moorlands the five-year reservoir of employment land was 6 hectares which equates to 18 hectares between 2006 and 2021.

1.20 During April-June 2009 an Examination in Public (EiP) was held into the draft Phase 2 Revision to the Regional Spatial Strategy for the West Midlands (RSS). On 28th September 2009 the Panel published its report on the findings of the EiP including the Panel’s recommendations for changes which went forward to be considered by the Secretary of State. For Staffordshire Moorlands the Panel recommended no changes to the housing

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 9 Adopted Core Strategy

requirement (i.e. maintaining a requirement of 6,000 dwellings for 2006 – 2026). Following the revocation of the Regional Spatial Strategy on 20th May 2013, these changes will not be published.

Other Regional Strategies

1.21 A variety of other regional policy documents have also been prepared which have informed the preparation of the Core Strategy. Of particular note is the Regional Economic Strategy and the Regional Housing Strategy. The West Midlands Economic Strategy (WMES) ‘Connecting to Success’ provided the framework for sustainable economic growth and had connections with the RSS Revision. It focused on the 3 main economic components of business, place and people and the need to provide a powerful voice for the region. The key goal was to close the output gap between the national and regional average. The WMES Delivery Framework was published in May 2008 and provided the framework for all partners involved in delivering the WMES.

1.22 In March 2012, Advantage West Midlands - the Regional Development Agency for the West Midlands – closed. Economic development and social and physical regeneration is now led by Local Enterprise Partnerships (LEPs) and other successor bodies. Staffordshire Moorlands is covered by the Stoke-on-Trent and Staffordshire LEP.

1.23 The West Midlands Regional Housing Strategy 2005 sought to apply the principles of urban and rural renaissance, as set out in the RSS, to the Region’s housing markets and to guide central Government on its housing investment in the Region in order to tackle the immediate dual issues of Decent Homes and Affordable Homes. The ultimate purpose of the Strategy was to secure mixed and balanced communities in the West Midlands.

1.24 The revision to the East Midlands Regional Spatial Strategy (RSS8) was published in March 2009. Whilst not directly affecting Staffordshire Moorlands, it is also of relevance in that it requires that Local Authorities and other relevant public bodies in areas adjacent to the National Park should consider whether there is potential for further tourism development that could ease pressures on the Park itself. On 12th April 2013 the Regional Strategy for the East Midlands (Revocation) Order 2013 came into force revoking the Regional Spatial Strategy for the East Midlands (RSS8) and the East Midlands Regional Economic Strategy.

10 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Sub-regional Policy

Staffordshire and Stoke-on-Trent Structure Plan

1.25 The Structure Plan set out the broad planning framework for Staffordshire for the period 1996 – 2011. On 20th May 2013 the Regional Strategy for the West Midlands (Revocation) Order 2013 came into force. As well as revoking the Regional Strategy for the West Midlands, this Order also revoked the previously ‘saved’ policies of the Structure Plan.

RENEW North Staffordshire Housing Market Pathfinder

1.26 The North Staffordshire Housing Market Pathfinder was established in 2002 to address housing market failure, obsolescent housing stock and mismatch between housing supply and demand. The Pathfinder area included a small part of Staffordshire Moorlands at Biddulph East.

1.27 In terms of Renew funding, the risk of housing market failure in Biddulph East was seen as a medium to long-term issue rather than one of immediacy and this had been recognised in the Renew Board’s decision making. A joint initiative for Biddulph East and Galleys Bank in Kidsgrove was proposed attracting a private sector developer by offering them the opportunity to build more homes to finance the renewal work.

1.28 The government has now abolished regeneration agencies which have co-ordinated work locally over the last decade, including RENEW North Staffordshire, and replaced them by Local Enterprise Partnerships (LEPs) which have taken over responsibility instead. Staffordshire Moorlands is covered by the Stoke-on-Trent and Staffordshire LEP

Local Transport Plan

1.29 Local transport authorities are required by the Transport Act 2000 to prepare Local Transport Plans (LTPs) for 5 year periods. Staffordshire County Council has prepared its third County-wide LTP for the period from 2011 to 2026. This Staffordshire-wide LTP does not include the Stoke-on-Trent conurbation, which has its own LTP (called the “Stoke-on-Trent LTP 2011/12 - 2025/26”). The Staffordshire LTP sets out the following objectives and priorities for transport:

supporting growth and regeneration maintaining the highway network promoting equality of access and opportunity maintaining safety and security reducing road transport emissions and its effects on the highway network improving health and quality of life respecting the environment

1.30 The Staffordshire Moorlands Integrated Transport Strategy sets out the transport challenges and projects for the District for the period 2011 – 2026 and will be reviewed annually. It identifies the following challenges:

Maintain current condition of the highway network Improve accessibility to services and quality of life in local communities Minimise impact of traffic generated by Alton Towers Support vitality and viability of Biddulph, Leek and Cheadle town centres Accommodate sustainable development on brownfield and greenfield sites in Biddulph, Leek and Cheadle Support growth in tourism, particularly within the Churnet Valley

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 11 Adopted Core Strategy

Improve public transport links to key destinations including the North Staffordshire conurbation Raise awareness of environmental issues and encourage people to lead more sustainable lifestyles

Local Policy

BiddulphTown Centre Area Action Plan

1.31 The Area Action Plan (AAP) was adopted in February 2007 and focuses upon the delivery of regeneration in Biddulph Town Centre setting out the policy framework against which planning applications are assessed and how the regeneration of the town centre should be achieved. It makes proposals for the provision of a major supermarket and edge of town retail park as well as other town centre improvements.

1.32 The Core Strategy takes into account the proposals and policies in the AAP. The key policies and their relationship to the Core Strategy are set out in Appendix D.

Staffordshire Moorlands Local Plan

1.33 The Staffordshire Moorlands Local Plan previously formed part of the Development Plan for the District although not all of its policies were saved beyond 2007. The Core Strategy and other Development Plan Documents now supersede these policies. Those which were saved are listed in Appendix H together with an indication of which of the LDF policies now replace them.

1.34 The general strategy of the previous Local Plan had been to locate new development proposals in settlements which are excluded from the Green Belt, which occupies much of the western half of the District, or in settlements beyond the outer limits of the Green Belt. Most of the housing development was focused in the 3 towns using sites within built-up areas wherever possible but also designating some sites on the edges of settlements. Throughout most of the rural areas development had been limited to small infill sites or to meet local need with some modest housing and industrial development in rural service centres. New shopping development had generally been located within existing town centres to help strengthen their viability.

1.35 In 2001 the Council began a review of the Local Plan to extend its plan period to 2011. However work on the review was suspended in 2003 in the light of the introduction of the new LDF legislation. As the revised Local Plan was never adopted it did not form part of the Development Plan and carries little weight as a material consideration in the determination of planning applications.

Sustainable Community Strategy

1.36 The Sustainable Community Strategy sets a long-term vision and plan for bringing about a sustainable improvement in the social, economic and environmental conditions of Staffordshire Moorlands. It brings together the needs, interests and aspirations of the community of Staffordshire Moorlands. The latest Sustainable Community Strategy (2007 – 2020) sets out the following key outcomes:

Children and young people Stronger, safer communities Older people and adults at risk of exclusion Economic regeneration Environment and climate change

12 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

1.37 The Council has developed the Local Development Framework in tandem with the development of the Sustainable Community Strategy through the Moorlands Together Local Strategic Partnership. In order to ensure that the LDF is completely aligned with the Sustainable Community Strategy early public consultation on the LDF and Sustainable Community Strategy was undertaken as a single exercise – such that both draw on the same information about community priorities and the same set of local data. The Statement of Community Involvement was also produced through the LSP and has been linked to the involvement structures supported by the LSP. Through joint working, planners and community strategy officers have worked together to determine shared local priorities, to analyse information and to integrate the outcomes of both strategies. The Core Strategy will be a key means of delivering many of the key actions of the Sustainable Community Strategy. Appendix E sets out the relationship of these key actions with the Core Strategy policies.

1.38 ‘Shaping the Future of Staffordshire 2005 – 2020’ – The Sustainable Strategy for the County focuses on six key priorities: enhancing the voice and profile of Staffordshire; developing strong and rural communities; integrating and sustaining transport; improving health and social care; supporting the growth of the local economy and encouraging prosperity; and sharing data and information. A delivery plan (Staffordshire Local Area Agreement) has been produced by the LSP to guide partners’ efforts to deliver the outcomes in the community strategy. The targets and outcomes of the LAA have been incorporated into the Implementation and Monitoring Plan (appendix A) and the Infrastructure Plan.

Corporate Plan

1.39 The Council’s Corporate Plan sets out the key aspirations of the Council for improving services for Staffordshire Moorlands and is reviewed on an annual basis. In order to ensure that the objectives in the Corporate Plan are aligned with those in the new Sustainable Community Strategy and the Local Development Framework, the Council reviewed its Corporate objectives during 2007. The 2011/12 – 2014/15 Corporate Plan identifies the following priority outcomes that are required from the Council’s activities which are relevant to the Core Strategy:

Sustainable towns and rural communities Improve the supply of quality affordable housing through partnership Work with partners to improve health and community safety

1.40 Appendix E sets out the relationship of these priority outcomes with the Core Strategy policies.

1.41 In 2008 the Council entered into a Strategic Alliance with the neighbouring authority of High Peak Borough Council. The aims of the alliance are to achieve:

Significantly improved quality of life for residents Value for money Excellent customer service High levels of public recognition and satisfaction

1.42 As the two Authorities are within different strategic planning areas, the scope for the joint production of LDF documents is limited. Nonetheless, there are many similarities between the two areas and this presents opportunities for much closer joint working across many service areas which may impact on the delivery of the Core Strategy

Other Plans, Strategies and Programmes

1.43 The LDF is also informed by a number of other local planning documents and strategies as well as the plans, strategies and programmes of other bodies and organisations.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 13 Adopted Core Strategy

Further details of the interactions and how individual recommendations of these documents and strategies impact on the Core Strategy are set out in the ‘Issues and Evidence Base’ Background Report.

Evidence Base

1.44 One of the main requirements and tests of soundness for the Local Development Framework is that all Development Plan Documents are based upon a robust and credible evidence base. This evidence base is critical to ensuring that the Council has a thorough understanding of the needs and issues of its area and that the delivery of housing, employment, retailing and other requirements is not compromised by a lack of sites, infrastructure constraints or other inadequacies.

1.45 The evidence base has informed the various components of the LDF and the choice of options and will be used to test the soundness of the Development Plan Document at examination. The evidence base will be kept up-to-date through periodic reviews of key studies which will inform the Annual Monitoring Report and its assessment of the delivery of the Core Strategy (see para. 9.9).

1.46 The evidence base for the Core Strategy comprises of the following main studies:

Employment Land Study (2006, updated 2008) – provides a review of commercial property and existing employment land across the District and identifies future business needs and employment forecasts over the next 15 years, with a view to identifying a portfolio of future sites suitable for employment use. An Employer Skills Needs Survey was also undertaken in 2007. Retail Study (2006, updated 2008) – focuses on future qualitative and quantitative capacity for convenience and comparison retailing across the District over the next 10-15 years, with particular regard to Leek, Cheadle and Biddulph. It was informed by the results of in-centre and household telephone surveys. This was updated in 2008 with an assessment of the impact of the proposed convenience and comparison floorspace increases. Strategic Flood Risk Assessment (2008) – provides an assessment of the extent and nature of the risk of flooding across the District. Gypsy & Traveller Needs Assessment (2008) – identifies need for future provision for gypsies and travellers Strategic Housing Market Assessment (2008) – provides a detailed analysis of housing need and demand for the North sub-regional housing market area. StrategicHousingLand Availability Assessment – detailed assessment of potential sites for housing development and their deliverability. Local Area Profiles – provide comprehensive data on individual towns and the rural areas. PPG17 Audit (2009)- assessment of open space, sport and recreation facilities across the District in accordance with PPG17. Development Capacity Study (2008/9, updated 2010/11) – Stage 1 examines the level and capacity of existing infrastructure services and facilities (including social and physical infrastructure) and accessibility. Stage 2 assesses the viability of development sites. Stage 3 appraises the potential impact of changes to the affordable housing targets. Landscape & Settlement Character Appraisal (2008) - assessment of the character of the landscape and key settlements. Subsequent detailed assessment undertaken in 2010 of the Churnet Valley.

14 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Housing Requirements Paper (2010) – assesses future housing requirements for the District based on latest evidence of need and demand for housing, affordability, availability of land, capacity and environmental, social and economic impacts. Renewable Energy/Low Carbon Energy Study (2010) - considers the technical potential, viability and the deliverability of various renewable and low carbon options. Tourism Study (2011) - provides an appraisal of the role and impact of the visitor economy, and the opportunities for its economic growth across the District and in particular in the ChurnetValley corridor. Ecological Surveys (2010/11) - ecological assessment of potential development areas for Leek, Biddulph and Cheadle Historic Environment Character Assessment: Staffordshire Moorlands (2010) - establishes the potential for the historic environment of the historic towns and villages to absorb new development and housing in particular.

Details of the current evidence base and work underway are set out in the ‘Issues and Evidence Base’ Background Report.

Community Involvement

1.47 In addition to work on the evidence base, the Core Strategy has been prepared with the help of the local community as well as various stakeholders through consultation, public participation and joint working. The process of consultation has been undertaken in compliance with the Council’s Statement of Community Involvement which was adopted in 2006. Where appropriate, this was undertaken jointly in conjunction with the preparation of the Sustainable Community Strategy and the results have informed both strategies to ensure a consistent and complimentary approach to identifying and addressing issues. This has consisted of:

The Big Debate – a series of consultation events held across the three towns of Leek, Cheadle and Biddulph in December 2006 aimed at establishing common priorities and setting a common vision for both the Core Strategy and the Sustainable Community Strategy. People were asked to rate 19 issues on whether they were a high, medium or low priority to them. Respondents were also given the opportunity to highlight other issues that are important to them. Questionnaires were available at the Council’s One Stop Shops and on Staffordshire Moorlands District Council’s website. 272 responses were received to the questionnaire. In addition MRUK undertook telephone based interviews on a number of important issues to the Council and its partners based on a sample of 500 residents across the District and a further 500 within deprived areas and 30 BME targeted interviews.

Issues and Options – extensive consultation was undertaken during September/October 2007 on specific issues and options for the Core Strategy. The purpose of this consultation was to obtain as many views as possible on a draft vision for the Core Strategy, draft spatial objectives including prioritisation of them, 4 possible development options and key areas for policy development such as affordable housing and amounts of new retail development in the towns. The questions asked in the consultation material were intended to provoke discussion, encourage the generation of other potential options and gather views on specific policy areas to give a strong steer in developing Preferred Options. The Council involved as many interested parties as possible in order to identify as many issues and options at this early stage. In total 235 questionnaires / letters

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 15 Adopted Core Strategy

were received by the District Council in response to the consultation and in addition to this comments from 14 stakeholder meetings were received as well as feedback from Neighbourhood Forums and public consultation events across the District.

Draft Preferred Options – extensive consultation was undertaken during September/October 2008 on draft preferred options for the Core Strategy in order to obtain views on all aspects of the preferred options for the Core Strategy including the development approach, the amount and type of development proposed in each area and the broad locations for development in the towns. Views were also sought on the policies being proposed and whether alternative approaches should be considered. A range of measures were used to engage with stakeholders and the general public, in response to which a total of 997 responses were received as well as additional feedback from consultation events.

Submission – the first submission document was published in May 2009 to invite representations on the soundness of the document. A total of 425 valid representations were received from 268 respondents together with a further 8 late representations which were also accepted by the Council. Following consideration of these representations the Council agreed a number of modifications to the Submission document, including a number of significant focused changes. These were subsequently published as an Addendum for comments in December 2009. A further 785 representations from 411 respondents were received to the published Addendum. The Council subsequently agreed in June 2010 to make further changes to the Submission document but theses were never published as an Addendum.

Revisions – in Autumn 2010 new evidence on future housing requirements and government proposals to abolish Regional Strategies highlighted a need to consider a review of the emerging Core Strategy. A ‘Revisions Consultation’ document was subsequently published in February 2011 which was supported by a Housing Requirements Paper. Views were sought on options for alternative housing requirements and also on possible policy changes to bring any of the RSS policies or more local variations on them into the Core Strategy. A total of 118 responses were received from 42 respondents.

Revised Submission – the second submission document was published in December 2011 to invite representations on the soundness of the document. A total of 1615 valid representations were received from 1298 respondents together with a further 102 late representations which were also accepted by the Council. Additional consultation on consistency with the NPPF was also undertaken in June/July 2012 following publication of the NPPF in March. A total of 429 responses were received to this consultation. Following consideration of all of these representations the Council agreed a number of minor modifications to the Revised Submission document for subsequent submission.

The responses to the consultations are detailed fully in the ‘Issues and Options Consultation’, ‘Draft Preferred Options Consultation’, 'Submission Consultation', 'Addendum Consultation', 'Revisions Consultation' and 'Revised Submission Consultation' documents.

16 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Sustainability Appraisal

1.48 All local authorities are required to undertake a Sustainability Appraisal of their Development Plan Documents. The Sustainability Appraisal (SA) of the Core Strategy has been fully integrated into the plan making process to date and has informed the preparation of the submission document.

1.49 A generic Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report for the LDF was produced following consultation in 2006 which set the context of all subsequent DPDs and SPDs, defining their objectives, establishing the baseline, and deciding on the scope and level of detail required of the subsequent SA to ensure that sustainability concerns will be taken into account throughout the production of the document.

1.50 The second stage of the SA was published in September 2007. This involved developing and refining options and assessed 7 spatial options which have been generated in response to issues identified during the evidence gathering stage of the Plan.

1.51 The third stage of the SA was undertaken during December 2007 to inform the preparation of the Preferred Option. This assessed the preferred option including all emerging core policies and also all broad locations for development.

1.52 The fourth stage of the SA was undertaken during January/February 2009 to inform the preparation of the Submission version of the Core Strategy. This reviewed and further refined the assessment of the core policies and the broad locations for development.

1.53 Further SA work was undertaken in 2009 to inform the preparation of the Addendum in respect of new broad locations and also in 2010 to inform the Revisions Consultation in respect of alternative housing requirements. An updated Sustainability Appraisal was carried out in July 2011 to assess the Revised Submission document and in August 2012 to accompany the submission document.

Details of the appraisals are set out in the ‘Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy Sustainability Appraisal' for each stage.

Appropriate Assessment

1.54 In addition to the Sustainability Appraisal there is now a need to undertake “Appropriate Assessment” of all Local Development Documents. This relates to Articles 6(3) and (4) of the Habitats Directive (Directive 92/43/EEC) and is concerned with assessing the likely significant effects of land use plans on European nature conservation sites. The Council has used environmental consultants to undertake the scoping and screening exercise and subsequent appropriate assessment of emerging policies for the Core Strategy to identify those which were likely to have an uncertain or potentially negative effect on one or more of the European sites identified in the screening process. Arising from this, the Core Strategy incorporates several overarching policies (SS1 and NE1) designed to provide the necessary mitigation and ensure that the integrity and conservation objectives of such sites are not compromised.

1.55 This assessment has subsequently been reviewed in the light of changes made to those policies following consultation on preferred options and the revisions to the Core Strategy.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 17 Adopted Core Strategy

Details of the Appropriate Assessment are set out in the ‘Staffordshire Moorlands District Council Core Strategy Appropriate Assessment’ for each stage.

Soundness

1.56 The preparation and contents of the Core Strategy must pass four tests of ‘soundness’ as set out in the NPPF. These tests ensure that the document can be trusted as the best way forward for development and conservation of the District, having taken into account other plans, other relevant alternatives, local characteristics and relevant and robust evidence. The tests of soundness are that the Core Strategy should be :

POSITIVELY PREPARED - it must be based on a strategy which seeks to meet objectively assessed development and infrastructure requirements; JUSTIFIED – it must be the most appropriate strategy when considered against the reasonable alternatives; EFFECTIVE – it must be deliverable over its period and based on effective joint working; and CONSISTENT WITH NATIONAL POLICY – it should enable the delivery of sustainable development in accordance with policies in the NPPF.

1.57 Following an examination of the Revised Submission Core Strategy during 2013, the Inspector published his final report in January 2014 which concluded that the Core Strategy provides an appropriate basis for the planning of the District over the next 15 years providing a number of modifications are made to the Plan.

Timetable

1.58 It is critical that Core Strategies are produced in a timely and efficient manner and the Council’s Local Development Scheme has been reviewed to reflect the most appropriate deliverable timetable for the Core Strategy and other related local development Documents. The full timetable for the completion of the Core Strategy is set out below.

Fig. 2 Timetable of Key Stages for the Core Strategy

Plan Preparation Commenced December 2006

Issues and Options Consultation September 2007

Preferred options Consultation September 2008

Publication of Submission Document May 2009

Addendum Consultation December 2009

Revisions Consultation February 2011

Publication of Revised Submission Document December 2011

Submitted for Examination September 2012

Examination/Hearing February 2013

Publication of Main Modifications June 2013

18 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Fig. 2 Timetable of Key Stages for the Core Strategy

Adoption February 2014

1.59 In order to ensure that the Core Strategy takes account of the longer term requirements of the District, the Council will undertake an early and comprehensive review. This will incorporate work currently underway on the Site Allocations DPD in the form of a single comprehensive Local Plan for the plan period 2016 to 2031.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 19 Adopted Core Strategy

20 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

A Portrait of Staffordshire Moorlands

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 21 Adopted Core Strategy

2 A Portrait of Staffordshire Moorlands

2.1 This part of the Core Strategy aims to give a general picture about the District and our community. Further, more detailed information on the District is contained in the accompanying Issues and Evidence Base Reports and Area Profiles.

2.2 Staffordshire Moorlands is in north east Staffordshire, bordered by Cheshire to the north-west, Derbyshire to the east and Stoke-on-Trent to the south-west (see figure 3). The district covers an area of 57,624 hectares and has a population of 97,106 (2011 Census). Around 54% of the population is based in the three towns of Leek, Biddulph and Cheadle; around 22% of the population lives in the larger settlements of Cheddleton, Endon, Werrington & Cellarhead and Blythe Bridge, located in the west of the district. The remainder are divided among 34 rural parishes.

2.3 A third of the district lies inside the Peak Park - the Peak District National Park Authority represents the special interests of this Park. Of the remainder of the Moorlands, around 30 per cent is designated as Green Belt. The district has close links to parts of Cheshire, as well as to the city of Stoke-on-Trent, which exerts a strong influence on the west of the district in particular, and Fig. 3 provides significant employment opportunities and services for many people in the district.

2.4 Between 1991 and 2001 Staffordshire Moorlands recorded a decline in population, although this was primarily driven by natural change as a result of falling birth rates. Since 2001 the District has continued to experience negative natural change, but has made up for this with positive net migration resulting in a steady increase in population.

2.5 The Strategic Housing Market Assessment identifies the District as part of the North Housing Market Area (HMA). In terms of migration flows, it is closely tied to Stoke-on-Trent and of the five North Housing Market Area districts is most influenced by its HMA partners. Staffordshire Moorlands splits between the non-National Park west whose towns are part of a market that draws in population from Stoke-on-Trent, Newcastle-under-Lyme and the

22 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

towns of Congleton and Macclesfield, and the National Park which is a non-centred rural area operating independently of the rest of the District. Demand from migration constituted 70.4% of the total demand for housing in 2007.

2.6 There are currently 43,585 houses in the District (2011 Census). According to the 2011 Census approx 80% of households owned their own dwelling. The 2001 Census recorded approximately 0.7% of the housing stock as being second/holiday homes and another 3.7% were vacant. In October 2010 the number of empty homes was 856, which represents 2% of the total housing stock. The average household size is currently estimated to be 2.38 persons per household. The predominant type of housing in Staffordshire Moorlands is detached - the level of terraced stock is particularly low at 16.7%, against a regional level of 23.9%. The proportion of social rented households (9%) and private-rented households (5.6%) in Staffordshire Moorlands is also the lowest in the North HMA. The largest RSL landlord is Moorlands Housing, following the transfer of Local Authority stock in 2001, with a stock base of around 3,700 properties principally located in the Leek, Cheadle and Biddulph areas.

2.7 The District has experienced rapid house price growth since 2001, well in excess of both the regional and national average growth, but a significant levelling off of price rises since 2005 and an underlying downward trend more recently. In 2001, the mean overall price for a home in Staffordshire Moorlands was £83,149; by June 2008 this had risen by 120% to £182,700 but by July 2011 had fallen to £176,036. The price of terrace homes, which represent the main supply of first entry level homes, rose from £45,532 to £119,100 between 2001 and 2008 but by July 2011 had fallen to £106,880. The ratio of lower quartile house prices to incomes more than doubled in Staffordshire Moorlands from 3:1 in 1997 to 7:1 in 2006 but fell to 6:1 in 2011. Affordability ratios across the District range significantly from 5:1 in Biddulph East, Leek South and Cheadle North East Wards to 11:1 in Horton Ward and 14:1 in Manifold Ward - eight of the fifteen rural wards have affordability ratios of 7:1 of more. The parts of Staffordshire Moorlands (e.g. Biddulph) that border Stoke-on-Trent and Newcastle-under-Lyme (Kidsgrove) all reflect Stoke-on-Trent’s low price housing market. Generally, property prices in Staffordshire Moorlands are significantly higher than in neighbouring Staffordshire authorities, particularly Stoke, but lower than in neighbouring Cheshire and Derbyshire authorities (see fig 4).

Fig. 4 Comparison of Average Property Prices (July 2011)

Terraced Semi-detached Detached Flats/Apartments

Staffordshire Moorlands £106,880 £138,336 £257,047 £98,477

Stoke-on-Trent £72,723 £101,299 £169,291 £67,781

Newcastle-under-Lyme £96,095 £126,166 £240,985 £73,671

High Peak £133,686 £179,953 £309,352 £123,495

Cheshire East £154,306 £178,515 £359,616 £131,386

Source: Hometrack

2.8 The District’s economic prospects are finely balanced. From one perspective the District has a successful economy. There is virtually full employment with unemployment rates below the national and Staffordshire average at a low of 1.1% in June 2008, although this had risen to 2.3% by June 2010. Employment sites are almost at full capacity and there are a number of nationally significant businesses, including Britannia Building Society, JCB and Alton Towers. In recent years the Staffordshire Moorlands has benefited from a number

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 23 Adopted Core Strategy

of regeneration programmes and initiatives to the value of approximately £10m to help develop its business and tourism economy. Whilst there is the continued presence of large nationally recognised employers, the business structure of Staffordshire Moorlands is dominated by micro and small businesses of between 1 and 10 employees which collectively accounted for over 92 per cent of all businesses in 2006 and this position is unlikely to have changed.

2.9 On the other hand the District’s economy is under-performing compared to its competitors. It provides low pay to a large proportion of its workforce when compared to the national and regional average and struggles to encourage the growth of new businesses and to attract new firms. The District has one of the lowest formation rate of new businesses in the area. However, whilst start-up rates might be relatively weak, data for the District indicates that businesses are resilient once established. The District also has a workforce characterised by low and medium skill levels and lower graduate level workers. Potential employees have the necessary qualifications but not the skills that employers need, however, the District presents many opportunities for new industries and enterprise which, with the right level of support and intervention, will allow the District to play a positive role in the Region’s economic growth and prosperity.

2.10 Jobs within the district are amongst the lowest paid in Staffordshire with an average weekly workplace earning of £424 per person in 2010, compared to a regional average of £467. However, the average weekly earnings of residents in the District in 2010 was £492, which was higher than the regional average of £469. This is indicative of the high out-commuting levels to better paid jobs outside the District – nearly 50% of the working population of Staffordshire Moorlands works outside the district, particularly in Cheadle and Biddulph were levels of out-commuting exceed 60% and 70% respectively

2.11 The structure of the economy is highest in the public administration, education & health sector, which represents a larger proportion than regionally and nationally. The other key sectors of employment are distribution, hotels & restaurants and manufacturing. Manufacturing in particular is overrepresented in comparison with regional and national levels and has experienced a much slower rate of decline than regionally. However, in terms of manufacturing productivity, Staffordshire Moorlands has a relatively low productivity economy when examining Gross Value Added (GVA) per head. The Local Futures audit showed the District as being one of the lowest ranked areas in the comparator group for GVA with only Tamworth, Derbyshire Dales and Newcastle-under-Lyme scoring lower. Tourism also plays an important role in supporting the local economy through both its job creation (providing diverse employment opportunities that support about 3000 jobs in the District) and direct/indirect visitor spend. The value of tourism within the Staffordshire Moorlands is estimated to generate over £122 million.

2.12 In terms of quality of life, the District is ranked 185 out of 326 Districts in England in the 2010 Index of Multiple Deprivation based on the average of Super Output Area scores (with 1 being the most deprived). Four Super Output Area (SOA) fall within the 20% most deprived SOAs nationally. These are in the Biddulph East area, a former coal board housing estate that suffers from a range of socio-economic and environmental deprivation problems and within Leek North and Cheadle North East areas.

2.13 There are strong ‘cross-border’ workforce links with the Stoke conurbation (about 15.4% of daily work-journeys into the Moorlands are from the conurbation and about 26.8% of the Moorlands resident workforce work in the conurbation). The District also has high car use and low public transport use. There is only one railway station in the District, at Blythe Bridge in the south-west of the District on the Crewe-Stoke-Derby line. The overall rate for all walk-to work journeys is only 0.56% (into/within/out of the Moorlands). However the equivalent figure for those who work in the Moorlands (which includes those who already live in the Moorlands) is significantly higher, at 13.08%.

24 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

2.14 The landscape and historic environment of the District is highly valued by both residents and visitors and contains a large and particularly rich stock of protected assets, reflected in the number of formal designations. There are extensive protected environments (SSSIs, Special Conservation Areas) distributed across the District and particularly within the Peak District National Park boundary. The District (outside the Peak District) also includes 967 Listed buildings and structures, 117 Scheduled Monuments and 14 Conservation Areas. The landscape is characterised by attractive countryside comprising of farmland, extensive woodland areas, natural grassland and moors interspersed by distinctive settlements. The rural heritage of the District (historic farm buildings, archaeological sites, parkland, historic landscape character) is also highly significant. There are currently 2 parklands included within the English Heritage Register of Parks and Gardens and numerous other notable parklands.

2.15 Community life is a strong and distinctive feature of Staffordshire Moorlands. People identify closely with their towns, neighbourhoods and villages. Pride in local communities is high, leading to a rich pattern of community activities and organisations. Local parish councils, voluntary and community groups play a vital part in maintaining this special characteristic of the district.

2.16 Leek (pop. 20,768) is the principal town in District with large range of facilities. It stands below the open moorland of the Peak District and serves a wide rural area, yet it lies only 10 miles east of the North Staffordshire conurbation. It is a traditional market town with a large number of listed buildings and a strong sense of identity and has become a recognised national centre for antiques and fine arts. The town has an industrial heritage with a large number of former textile mills and streets of pre-1919 terraced housing.

2.17 Biddulph (pop. 19,892 including Biddulph Moor) is a former mining town that lies in the north west corner of the Staffordshire Moorlands District and it is near to the boundary with Cheshire and abuts the North Staffordshire conurbation to the South. It serves a much more constrained area to the west of the District with strong cross-boundary linkages, particularly with the conurbation. The building of a new by-pass has opened up opportunities for new development and regeneration. The area has issues relating to former National Coal Board housing and low demand in the east of the town. Biddulph is home to the celebrated Biddulph Grange Gardens, the best surviving example of an ornamental Victorian garden.

2.18 Cheadle (pop. 12,165) is the smallest town, located 10 miles south east of Leek and 10 miles west of the north Staffordshire conurbation and serving a more limited catchment area. Cheadle has suffered from under-investment and a poor infrastructure and its town centre has declined in recent years but a successful Heritage Economic Regeneration Scheme has led to some improvements. Whilst the town has some notable buildings, including the precious asset of St. Giles’ RC Church, one of the finest works of the celebrated Victorian architect A W Pugin, the majority of its houses have been built since the First World War. Cheadle is only 4 miles from the recently upgraded A50 [T] Stoke to Derby road that links the M1 and M6 motorways.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 25 Adopted Core Strategy

2.19 The Rural Areas comprise of a range of large and small villages and hamlets dispersed across the District. The main concentrations of settlements are in the south western fringes near to the Stoke conurbation and along the Churnet Valley. The size and role of these settlements varies significantly with the largest village (Werrington & Cellarhead) having a population in excess of 6,000. Many function as service centres for the surrounding rural areas whilst many are also recognised for their historic importance. The rural district of Staffordshire Moorlands contains eight Wards that feature in the top 20% most deprived in the UK in terms of access to services.

Future Growth

2.20 Staffordshire Moorlands is a growing and popular area for residents, businesses and visitors. The 2008 Sub-National Household Projections predict that there will be an additional 5,150 households across the District between 2006 and 2026, which is equivalent to a net demand for an additional 5,300 dwelling units (assuming a 3% variance for vacancies). Much of this will be to meet local needs generated by falling household size and demand from hidden households, although continuing in-migration will also contribute to the increase in housing demand.

2.21 Over the next 20 years a slight rise in population is predicted from 95,300 at 2006 to 100,200 in 2026 (Fig 5). The most significant change in population will be in the older age groups (65+), whilst the younger age band (aged 24 or younger) will experience a slight decline. The remaining age band (25-49) will experience a greater fall. This means that by 2026, there will be an ‘ageing population’ in the District, which will affect many areas of the community for example, the economy, housing and health. In terms of household types, there will be a steady decline in married couple households, although this will be cancelled out by growth in cohabiting couple households with the greatest growth being in the single person households.

The latest government 2011-based interim household projections indicate a reduction in the household growth rate for Staffordshire Moorlands over the period 2011 – 2021 to 200 households per annum compared with 250 households in the 2008-based household projections.

Fig. 5 Population Projections 2006 – 2026

2006 2016 2026 Change % Change 2006 – 2026 2006 – 2026

0 – 14 15,300 14,600 14,600 - 700 - 5%

15 -24 10,500 9,000 8,900 - 1,600 - 15%

25 – 34 9,300 9,600 9,000 - 300 - 3%

35 – 49 21,200 18,200 17,000 - 4,200 - 20%

50 – 64 21,100 21,400 21,900 + 800 + 4%

65 – 84 15,900 21,200 24,200 + 8,300 + 52%

85+ 2,000 3,000 4,600 + 2,600 + 130%

TOTAL 95,300 97,100 100,200 + 4,900 + 5%

26 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Source: Office for National Statistics, 2008-based sub-national population projections

2.22 A 2007 study by the Cambridge Centre for Housing and Planning Research has estimated unconstrained figures for housing demand and newly arising need in the West Midlands. For Staffordshire Moorlands this indicates a demand from newly arising need for 285 dwellings per annum comprising of 190 market sector, 30 intermediate sector and 65 social rented dwelling units. The 2007 Strategic Housing Market Assessment indicates that taking account of current and backlog need there will be a requirement for 429 affordable housing units per annum. The Staffordshire Flexicare Strategy identifies a need for 867 flexicare housing places by 2020 and 1,185 places by 2030, principally for older persons.

2.23 In terms of jobs growth, it is predicted that between 2006 and 2026 there will be a net increase in the number of B-use jobs of 2,700 after allowing for job losses. As with every part of the country, Staffordshire Moorlands has been experiencing rapid economic change moving away form the traditional industries of agriculture, textiles/manufacturing, and coal mining to service sector businesses such as finance, retailing, tourism, leisure and the knowledge economy. The District’s workforce is tending towards growth amongst managers and senior officials and increases in the professional class.

2.24 Changes in the future economy will have significant implications for the need and type of employment land provided as well as the infrastructure to support growth. Most of the Staffordshire Moorlands is unlikely to be a target for significant large-scale inward investment due to its poor transport links and the absence of major centres of further education. However, the quality of the environment, community life and the workforce the District offers will attract new businesses and the District will continue to play a major role in the economy of the North Staffordshire area.

Inter-district Links and Relationships

2.25 Staffordshire Moorlands adjoins a number of other local and regional authorities as well as including within its local authority boundary the Peak District National Park (fig 6). The Core Strategy needs to have regard to and be complimentary to spatial strategies of neighbouring areas. This section identifies key linkages with neighbouring areas and influences on the District.

2.26 In planning terms the District lies within the North Fig. 6 Relationship of Neighbouring Authorities Staffordshire sub-region which is dominated by the North Staffordshire Major Urban Area (MUA) comprising of the conurbation of Stoke-on-Trent and Newcastle-under-Lyme. North Staffordshire is a relatively self contained geographic area lying between the Birmingham and Manchester zones of influence although it’s influence extends across the regional boundary into Cheshire and visa versa. Stoke-on-Trent City Council and Newcastle-under-Lyme Borough Council have produced a Joint Core Strategy aimed at transforming the quality of life and economic prospects of the North Staffordshire MUA, the objectives of which have influenced the

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 27 Adopted Core Strategy

approach in the Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy. The Council has worked jointly with the other North Staffordshire authorities in developing its evidence base and through the North Staffordshire Partnership in developing joint strategies.

2.27 The Council also has a strong working relationship with the Peak District National Park Authority which has planning responsibility for that part of the Peak District National Park which lies within the District. There has been close working in relation to development of both LDFs in order to ensure close alignment of planning policies. Both the National Park Authority and Staffordshire Moorlands District Council LDFs have also been developed in tandem with the development of the Council’s Sustainable Community Strategy by the Moorlands Together Local Strategic Partnership and with the Peak District National Park Management Plan via the National Park Authority.

2.28 The District also has cross-boundary links with adjoining Districts in the North West region. A South Cheshire Sub-regional Study was undertaken on behalf of the former North West Regional Assembly, in collaboration with the former Cheshire County Council. The study provided an evidence base for potential future policy development in the former North West RSS and, where appropriate, additional evidence for emerging LDFs in South Cheshire. It also provided evidence to input into strategies being developed in the West Midlands as part of the former West Midlands RSS and for LDFs in North Staffordshire and North Shropshire. The study concluded that whilst it is evident that relationships within the Study Area exist, there is currently insufficient evidence to support the existence of an extended sub-region beyond the core South Cheshire authorities. However, the presence of links between authorities suggests that key indicators should continue to be monitored to assess whether an integrated strategy is required. Joint working can help to conduct this monitoring to ensure policies in neighbouring authorities complement one another.

2.29 The following specific cross-boundary influences and issues have been identified from the evidence base and stakeholder consultations:

North Staffordshire Conurbation (Stoke-on-Trent & Newcastle-under-Lyme)

Important road and public transport links along A53 and A52 Economic/labour market links – high levels of commuting into conurbation, impact of development of RIS at Chatterley Valley, links with creative industries Pressure for housing development – net in-migration from N. Staffs conurbation - need to constrain housing development nearest to conurbation North Staffordshire green belt requires consistent policy approach Impact of growth in retail, leisure and cultural attractions in conurbation on District

Peak District National Park

Impact of tourism and recreation needs from Peak District on District – need for complementary policy approach Pressure for housing development near to Peak District – need to meet local needs Impact of development on key landscape and nature conservation sites – need for assessment and mitigation measures if appropriate Overlap of rural housing market areas

28 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Stafford Borough Council

Economic linkages – Creda factory closure, Blythe Bridge RIS Transport links – A50, Stoke-Stafford rail line Growth aspirations for Stafford – impact on local housing market to S of District

East Staffordshire Borough Council

Rural economy – need for complementary approach Tourism links – Alton Towers, Churnet Valley, Uttoxeter Growth of Uttoxeter – impact on Cheadle town centre

Cheshire East Council

Cross-boundary development pressures – common understanding and complementary policy approaches needed Net in-migration from Congleton and Macclesfield - pressure for housing development in north of District North Staffordshire/South Cheshire green belt requires consistent policy approach Proposals for Congleton and Macclesfield town centres – impact on Biddulph and Leek town centres Rural economy – need for complementary approach

High Peak Borough Council

Rural economy – need for complementary approach Tourism links – Peak District Growth of Buxton – impact on Leek Impact of development on key landscape and nature conservation sites – need for assessment and mitigation measures if appropriate Strategic alliance – scope for joint working on common planning issues and shared priorities

Derbyshire Dales District Council

Rural economy – need for complementary approach Tourism links – Peak District Growth of Ashbourne – impact on Leek/Cheadle Impact of development on key landscape and nature conservation sites – need for assessment and mitigation measures if appropriate

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 29 Adopted Core Strategy

30 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

The Challenges

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 31 Adopted Core Strategy

3 The Challenges

3.1 Staffordshire Moorlands is an area of great diversity and opportunity which faces a number of significant challenges, both from external influences and pressures at a global, national and regional level and from changes occurring at a more local level. These will drive the changes that are going to be necessary to bring about a sustainable improvement in the social, economic and environmental conditions of the District. The following summary of the challenges and the related issues are those which have been identified from work undertaken on the policy context, the evidence base, the consultations we have undertaken, the various information and monitoring sources and the requirements of various key bodies and organisations [A more detailed examination of these challenges was set out in the Preferred Options Core Strategy document]. Fig 7 also sets out a summary of local issues in the District. Appendix E demonstrates how these challenges have influenced the vision and objectives of the Core Strategy.

Accommodating and delivering growth

Need to meet the requirements for housing and employment provision as assessed by the Council and to manage the rate of development and its distribution so as to meet local needs and aspirations and to avoid undermining the regeneration of the MUAs Need to ensure land identified for development makes the best use of resources and does not compromise future needs and is deliverable. Importance of working in partnership with other organisations and groups to deliver this growth and the necessary infrastructure improvements.

Strengthening the District’s sub-regional role

Current role of the District in the North Staffordshire sub-region is limited with negative aspects of high levels of commuting, poor public transport links, migration into the District. Major strengths of Staffordshire Moorlands are the quality of its rural landscape with its proximity to the Peak District National Park and the quality of its market towns and villages which offer a highly regarded quality of life. Tourism is identified as one of the key areas where the District can have a major role in the sub-region to help bring more people in and diversify its economy. Need to strengthen connections with North Staffordshire service providers and ensure better accessibility by road and public transport to major attractors and strategic infrastructure. Role with the Peak District is particularly important – relieving the pressure of tourism, limiting impact on landscape and protecting sites of value. Potential threats from the growth of other centres, undermining the role of local centres and placing pressure on transport links. Wider economic changes and the dissipation of population from N Staffs area make it important that the different parts of the sub-region pull together to make the most of their assets and transform the sub-region.

32 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Creating healthy, sustainable communities

Need to maintain and improve the quality and diversity of the District’s communities by ensuring accessibility to services and determining the best pattern of provision and distribution of development across the District, which is sustainable, reflects the role of the different settlements and is not compromised by inadequate availability of infrastructure. Need to support the quality of community life through partnership working – improving community safety, tackling health inequalities, reducing the fear of crime, encouraging community cohesion, and tackling deprivation and inequalities. Need to improve provision and accessibility to health and education services and facilities and address under-provision or poor quality provision of recreational facilities and open space. There is also evidence of high levels of obesity in the District.

Adapting to changes in population structure

Significant rise in older persons requires a better understanding of the aspirations and needs of people aged 60 and over, providing opportunities for people to work beyond the traditional retirement age, meeting changing housing needs, and developing services which maintain people’s social contact and independence and provide choice. Decline in numbers of younger people and families is a major concern, particularly the rural areas where communities are ageing. Requires more investment in children and young people in terms of raising aspirations and educational attainment, improving access to services and recreational opportunities, providing affordable housing for future generations and providing appropriate local employment opportunities.

Improving the housing market

Provision of affordable housing is a priority need. An ageing population in under-occupied housing, high house prices, below average wage levels, continued in-migration, and a small rental sector points to continued difficulties in accessing affordable housing (to buy or rent) in the future. There is an identified under supply of mid-sized units such as semi-detached and terraced dwellings and also a need for more smaller apartments, and an oversupply of detached properties and a need to address the mismatch in supply between the high levels of owner occupation and low levels of social housing and private rented housing as well as a need to provide greater choice in terms of both tenure and price. There are areas in Biddulph East at risk of housing market failure where stock fails to meet the Government's decency standard, and does not meet people's aspirations. Need to be flexible to be able to respond to changes in the housing market. In particular the recent downturn in the housing market will impact on the delivery of housing in the short to medium term.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 33 Adopted Core Strategy

Fostering business growth and economic sustainability

Local economy suffers from relatively low levels of productivity and new firm creation and a fall in the growth of manufacturing sector has not been fully compensated for by a rise in the services and distribution sectors. Too much of the District’s economy is based in relatively low productivity activities. There are pockets of socio-economic deprivation with lower than average economic activity rates, low income and high unemployment, a declining workforce and a high degree of out-commuting which is both highly unsustainable and undermines the local economy. Threats to the economy from competition from surrounding areas and the loss of existing employment sites due to closures, restructuring and pressure for redevelopment for other uses, especially housing. Need to support existing major employers whilst developing policies to diversify the economic base by making sites available for modern employment facilities. There is an identified lack of good quality modern premises and smaller sized units available for immediate take up and a significant under-representation of high quality office locations. Service sector is seen as the main driver for economic growth with an opportunity to capitalise on the growth of the ‘experience economy’ – tourism, leisure and retail - in particular developing the District’s tourism role. To support economic growth there is a continuing need to ensure the provision of relevant employment skills, training and support to retain and develop local workforce. Recent downturn in the national economy is a threat to growth and continuation of existing businesses and ability to attract new firms.

Creating thriving, distinctive market towns

Vitality and viability of town centres under threat from increasing mobility, competition from larger centres outside the District and new technology (internet shopping). Evidence that a significant number of people living within the Leek, Biddulph and Cheadle catchment areas are not using the town for their main shopping and instead are choosing to shop outside the District, particularly for comparison shopping. There are local issues - lack cohesion and poor areas on the margins of Leek town centre, local traffic issues in Cheadle town centre, need to strengthen and consolidate the retail centre of Biddulph. Identified scope for Leek to support a medium to large high order foodstore and additional comparison goods retailing and for a new medium sized high order foodstore in Cheadle as well as additional comparison goods retailing Need to address qualitative deficiencies, improving accessibility and regenerating underused or poor quality areas and buildings where this will help to achieve improvements to the local economy, environment and community needs and maintain local distinctiveness. Recent economic recession threatens viability of town centres.

34 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Tackling social exclusion and economic decline in the rural areas

Services and facilities in many villages have declined resulting in the loss of community facilities such as Post Offices, shops and public houses due to national economic trends, but also the changing population structure of many villages, with higher proportions of elderly people and an out-migration of younger persons and families, disadvantaged by their rural location and a lack of affordable homes, local jobs and poor access to services and facilities. Problems of the rural areas has been compounded by a decline in the farming economy and increasing pressure for residential conversions of redundant farm buildings which are not meeting a local need and are not contributing to the rural economy. Economic development needs to recognise the contribution which the rural areas can make to the District’s economy with a major role for tourism in terms of providing opportunities for jobs, attracting investment and bringing in wealth. The dispersed rural settlement pattern in the District means that ensuring accessibility to services and determining the best pattern of provision are inevitably amongst the most challenging spatial issues which the Council and the other service providers need to address. In the smaller villages there is limited scope to accommodate significant new development - nonetheless there is a justifiable need for meeting essential local needs to ensure that they can continue to support local communities. The need for affordable housing is particularly critical to encourage young and/or smaller households to remain in the rural settlements but smaller sites and higher land values make their delivery difficult. There is a need to exploit opportunities arising from the closure of major developed areas in the countryside.

Protecting and enhancing the distinctive quality of the environment

Whilst continuing to protect, manage and enhance the quality of the District’s physical, natural and historic environment including its biodiversity is crucial, there is also opportunity to capitalise on the built and natural assets of the District and its heritage to maximise the quality of life for local residents, attract new investment and achieve economic benefits through tourism. There is potential to raise the quality of new development still further, and to ensure that it contributes more significantly to meeting local distinctiveness and sustainability objectives. There is also a need to make better use of existing buildings which are of value and add to the character of settlements such as the mill buildings in Leek. The setting of the District’s settlements is important – the landscape provides an important edge to the urban area and defines their character. There are also important areas of visual open space within settlements which need to be retained. The close physical relationship of the District with the Peak District requires special attention to development which may impact on its landscape and areas of value.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 35 Adopted Core Strategy

Tackling climate change

Planning has a key role to play in mitigating the causes and effects of climate change through the location and nature of development and by helping to shape places which have lower carbon emissions and are resilient to climate change. The ecological and carbon footprints for the District should not increase and where possible efforts should be made towards footprint reduction. Energy efficiency in the design, construction and use of buildings will be vital to reducing the impact of development on climate change. Flooding is also an issue which has become significant in recent years due to increased incidences across the country. The Strategic Flood Risk Assessment will inform future decisions on the Core Strategy and the identification of sites for development. Partnership working is required to reduce the effects of development beyond the district boundary.

Making travel more sustainable

High levels of car ownership and car usage and an over-dependence on use of the car for both work and non-work related journeys, partly as a consequence of poor public transport, have resulted in unsustainable travel patterns in the District. The main source of non-car access in the District is by bus. However, whilst many settlements are located close to main bus corridors and consequently have regular links to Leek and Hanley, with many settlements having daily bus links and a call-on-demand Moorlands Connect service, gaps in transport provision is still an issue in certain areas. There are problems of poor public transport connectivity between towns and with the national road network which limits movement across the District and places a heavy burden on the local road network. Areas such as Leek, Cheadle and Alton are all experiencing traffic issues arising from increased local road usage. Addressing these transport issues will require a range of measures aimed at ensuring maximum accessibility to development sites and allowing for alternative modes of travel as well as looking at management measures such as the provision of car parking and reducing congestion. There is a need for services to be able to respond to changes in demand arising from proposals in LDF whilst improved pedestrian access, more cycling facilities and access to countryside will also need to be addressed.

36 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Fig. 7 Summary of Local Issues in the District

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 37 Adopted Core Strategy

38 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

The Vision

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 39 Adopted Core Strategy

4 The Vision

4.1 The Vision sets out the direction in which the Council would like to take the District in the long term and sets the context for deriving more detailed objectives and policies within the Local Development Framework. It is a vision which seeks to drive forward change and address the key challenges the District faces and shares a similar vision to the Sustainable Community Strategy as well as reflecting the Council’s Priority Outcomes in its Corporate Plan and the community’s aspirations. It is also a shared vision which will require the co-ordinated effort of many agencies and partners working together to achieve, including those working outside of the Staffordshire Moorlands.

4.2 The central theme of the vision will be to see Staffordshire Moorlands become an exceptional place to live, work and visit. This means balancing the need to foster sustainable growth where it is needed and beneficial, with the need to protect and enhance the District’s heritage and its significant built and natural assets.

4.3 It is recognised that some parts of the proposed vision for the District may be aspirational and are unlikely to be achieved in the short term or even medium term, but it is important that we gain a clear understanding about what sort of District we are aiming for in the future. This is just a broad vision and the measures to achieve it are set out in more detail in the subsequent spatial strategy.

The vision for Staffordshire Moorlands is that it will be recognised as a vital part of a regenerated North Staffordshire in terms of its functional relationship, its social and economic contribution, its rich historic and natural heritage and its distinctive character.

We will have sustainable and balanced urban and rural communities which have an excellent quality of life with access to appropriate, affordable and desirable housing, suitable local jobs, a range of recreational, cultural and leisure opportunities and high quality public services and facilities.

The economy of the Moorlands will have undergone a significant change with more diversified and higher quality employment provision better meeting the skills and needs of its local workforce and more opportunities for business start ups across the whole of the District. There will be a more flexible and proactive approach to employment development, raising the District’s economic fortunes by exploiting its assets, raising local skill levels and opportunities and addressing deficiencies and disadvantages.

Tourism will be a key element in the diversification of the District’s economy and will also contribute significantly to raising the environmental quality and the regeneration of the District. Its market towns will each have their own unique selling point for attracting visitors. The diversity and quality of the District’s natural and historic assets will have improved and greater use will be made of the opportunities they provide for recreation and tourism, particularly around the Churnet Valley which together with AltonTowers will be a significant tourist attraction.

The needs of all sectors of the community, in particular younger and older people, will be better met through more provision of recreational and community facilities, local employment opportunities and appropriate housing. Assisted by the LDF process, all the key partners, especially the District Council and health and

40 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

education authorities, will have agreed to combine efforts in the location and operation of services to ensure that all residents have access to good quality facilities and services.

All development will be of a high standard of design and more sustainable with a higher degree of local self-sufficiency, reducing our impact on the environment, adapting to climate change and making more efficient use of resources. Settlements will develop in a way that acknowledges their historic and natural heritage, their unique setting and their green infrastructure

Our market towns of Leek, Cheadle and Biddulph will remain the focus of the Moorlands. They will be distinctive and unique in terms of their character and the quality and range of shops, services and facilities they provide for both residents and visitors. Their town centres will be welcoming, safe and appealing and will retain their significant historic heritage and distinctiveness which makes them special places, as well as being prosperous and vibrant, catering for the needs of both the town and its hinterland. Access will be improved between market towns and with their surrounding settlements with greater opportunities to travel by means other than the car.

4.4 This vision is further detailed below to cover the specific challenges which need to be addressed in our towns and the rural areas:

Leek will be an increasingly important civic and service centre for its population and the District and will further strengthen its role as the principal town in the District. The quantity and quality of the retail offer in the town centre will have improved further, and the diversity of employment opportunities, facilities and services it offers increased. It will have enhanced its role as a tourist attraction, building on its special character, heritage and built environment assets. Britannia Building Society and other major employers in the town will grow, but will be balanced by new businesses on improved existing and new employment sites. Underused and poorer quality areas, such as Cornhill and the Churnet Works, will have been regenerated providing new development opportunities and its mill buildings will have been conserved with new uses. The bus station will be served by a reliable public transport system whilst access and car parking in the town centre will be improved with the provision of a new multi storey facility.

Biddulph will continue to maintain its role as a significant service centre for its residents and those in outlying rural areas but with a focus on improving its image and prosperity and on reducing levels of deprivation in Biddulph East. Significant growth and change will have taken place within the town centre through implementation of proposals in the Area Action Plan, including a new town centre supermarket and non-food retail centre in order to make the town more self-sufficient. It will benefit from environmental improvements and improved community and health facilities with more sustainable, thriving and balanced local communities with an expanded local economy. Poor housing market areas will have been successfully renewed and there will be a greater variety of housing types and tenures which better meets the needs of the community. It will have improved connections with the rest of the District.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 41 Adopted Core Strategy

Cheadle will become a more sustainable settlement, better able to meet its own needs, enhancing and enlarging its role as a significant service centre for the local population and those in its rural hinterland. This will have been achieved through a focus on growth in housing and employment provision with significant complementary investment in the town's social and physical infrastructure. Its town centre will have been enlarged and become more vibrant and attractive supported by a major new supermarket. JCB and other major employers will grow, but the local economy will have been diversified and expanded with new employment areas. It will benefit from improved local public and sustainable transport links focused on the town centre and improved access to other urban areas. With a greater range of housing and employment opportunities Cheadle will have become a more successful and dynamic place where people choose to live and work.

The Rural Areas will have viable, attractive villages and smaller settlements which will continue to foster appropriate, sensitive growth and vitality to support rural living and work. The larger villages will be the rural centres for services, facilities and jobs acting to sustain the rural areas. Smaller village communities will also continue to thrive with a range of affordable housing opportunities to meet local needs and improved access to community services. There will be a more vibrant and diverse rural economy which will provide a range of local job opportunities and support a thriving agricultural sector. Well managed, sustainable tourism will be a major driver in regenerating the rural areas and enhancing their character and quality. Major redundant sites in the countryside will have been redeveloped for new uses, improving the environment and diversifying the rural economy. In the countryside, the richness of the District’s landscape, heritage and its biodiversity will continue to be valued, maintained and protected in a way which sensitively accommodates the needs of farmers, rural businesses, visitors and residents. Landscape character and quality will be conserved and enhanced and biodiversity fostered with appropriate new landscaping encouraged. Public access to the countryside will be extended with new walking, cycling and horse riding routes developed.

42 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Aims and Objectives

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 43 Adopted Core Strategy

5 Aims and Objectives

5.1 Whilst the vision sets out how we would like to see the District by 2026, the main challenge will be how we can achieve this in a sustainable manner which delivers the necessary housing, employment, shopping and community facilities whilst ensuring that the District’s valuable natural and built heritage assets and its character are not compromised.

5.2 Getting the objectives right is important because they indicate the broad direction that the more detailed strategy and policy measures should take and provide the basis for subsequent targets and indicators. They are closely linked to the key aims/themes of the Sustainable Community Strategy and the key priorities of the Council’s Corporate Strategy and have been derived from the challenges and the vision (see Appendix E).

5.3 The aims and objectives have been the subject of consultation and sustainability appraisal and have been subsequently amended to reflect responses and new evidence. The Sustainability Appraisal has identified that there are no instances where these spatial objectives are incompatible with the LDF’s sustainability appraisal objectives.

Spatial Aims

To see Staffordshire Moorlands become an exceptional place to live, work and visit by:

SA1. Creating distinctive, sustainable, self-supporting settlements

SA2. Meeting the needs of our communities

SA3. Encouraging a strong, prosperous and diverse economy

SA4. Maintaining a quality environment and special places

Spatial Objectives

SO1. To make provision for the overall land-use requirements for the District, consistent with national and regional policy, local evidence, the role of Staffordshire Moorlands within North Staffordshire and the role of each settlement.

SO2. To create a District where development minimises its impact on the environment, helps to mitigate and adapt to the adverse effects of climate change and makes efficient use of resources.

SO3. To develop and diversify in a sustainable manner the District’s economy and meet local employment needs in the towns and villages.

SO4. To provide new housing that is affordable, desirable, well-designed and meets the needs of residents of the Moorlands.

SO5. To ensure the long-term vitality and viability of the three market towns of Leek, Biddulph and Cheadle.

SO6. To maintain and promote sustainable regenerated rural areas and communities with access to employment opportunities, housing and services for all.

SO7. To support and enhance the tourism, cultural, recreation and leisure opportunities for the District’s residents and visitors.

44 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

SO8. To promote local distinctiveness by means of good design and the conservation, protection and enhancement of historic, environmental and cultural assets throughout the District.

SO9. To conserve and improve the character and distinctiveness of the countryside and its landscape, heritage, biodiversity and geological resources.

SO10. To deliver sustainable, inclusive, healthy and safe communities.

SO11. To reduce the need to travel or make it safer and easier to travel by more sustainable forms of transport.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 45 Adopted Core Strategy

46 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

The Development Approach

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 47 Adopted Core Strategy

6 The Development Approach

6.1 In order to meet the challenges facing the District and ensure that future development properly meets the needs of residents, businesses and visitors, we need to make sure that new development is directed to areas which will support our plans.

Alternative Development Approaches

6.2 During the preparation of the Core Strategy alternative spatial strategy options were considered, consulted upon and evaluated in order to ensure that the most appropriate strategy is chosen.

6.3 A range of 7 options were originally generated and subject to Sustainability Appraisal. This was reduced to 4 deliverable draft development approaches which were assessed and consulted on at the Issues and Options stage each representing different options for a spatial strategy. Each option had a different impact on the 3 towns and rural areas and different implications for delivering housing, employment, services and facilities and meeting local needs. For each alternative strategy, indicative development levels were also given based on a suggested apportionment of the District’s housing requirements from 2001 to 2026 between a range of 5,500 (lower growth level as proposed in the former RSS Review Spatial Options document) and 7,500 dwellings (higher growth level as requested by the Council in its response to the former RSS Review consultation). The potential strengths and weaknesses of each approach were set out in the document. Respondents were also asked to give their views on each of the alternative development approaches and to put forward any other options.

6.4 The 4 alternative development approaches were considered:

1. Town based development - Growth of Leek, Cheadle and Biddulph to accommodate bulk of District’s housing and employment development needs. Limited development in villages for affordable housing only. Priority to brownfield sites but allowing for peripheral expansion on radial routes. Town centres grow as main service providers for District

2. Town and larger village based development - Growth of Leek, Cheadle and Biddulph and larger villages to accommodate bulk of District’s housing and employment development needs. Limited development in other settlements for affordable housing only. Priority to brownfield sites but allowing for peripheral expansion of towns and larger villages. Town centres and larger village centres grow as main service providers for District.

3. Distributed development - Housing and employment development in all settlements sufficient to meet local needs. All parts of the District could experience change but on a limited scale. Limited development in town centres, greater focus on local and village centres. Enhanced transport links between settlements.

4. Focused development- Growth to meet demand. Bulk of housing and employment development targeted to areas in need of regeneration or where opportunities exist. Limited development in other areas for affordable housing only.

48 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

6.5 The responses to the consultation indicated the main preference being for option 1 (town based growth) with marginally less support for options 2 (towns and larger villages) and 4 (focused development) and lastly option 3 (distributed development). No alternative approach to accommodating future development was suggested which was different to those already previously examined.

6.6 The Sustainability Appraisal also identified options 1 and 2 as having the most positive impact on the SA objectives as both promote development in more sustainable locations enabling transport links between the rural areas and towns to be strengthened. Both options would be likely to improve the quality of the local housing stock and provision of affordable housing/ social housing. The Development Capacity Study identified options 4 (focused development) and 1 as being the most sustainable in terms of infrastructure capacity and accessibility with option 3 (distributed development) being the least sustainable.

The Proposed Development Approach

6.7 In the light of the responses and the evidence of development capacity and need, the proposed development approach is one which focuses development on the 3 market towns of Leek, Cheadle and Biddulph and the larger villages but allows for limited development of other settlements to meet local needs and targets areas in need of regeneration. The proposed development approach could be described as combining the positive impacts of all of the options put forward – facilitating growth of towns and larger villages where it can be accommodated or is needed, meeting local needs in other rural areas and bringing forward regeneration opportunities. This approach also best articulates national and regional planning policy in the local context. Figure 8 illustrates the key elements and influences on the proposed development approach.

6.8 This development approach is also considered to be a sustainable option which would enable development to be focused on regeneration and targeted opportunities in areas of highest accessibility and where it could be supported by existing infrastructure or could best facilitate infrastructure improvements, and where it could achieve high levels of affordable housing. It is a realistic and balanced approach which recognises the needs of both urban and rural areas, increases opportunities to utilise brownfield sites and minimises the need for major green belt/countryside changes. As well as supporting the regeneration of towns, this approach also helps rural settlements maintain services and facilities and would ensure that the local needs of rural areas are continued to be met. It accords well with the former RSS spatial strategy and performs best in the sustainability appraisal. It is also considered to be a deliverable approach in that evidence from the SHLAA and Development Capacity Study indicates that there are sufficient deliverable sites within these settlements. Whilst the Development Capacity Study ranks the proposed development approach as being marginally less sustainable in terms of infrastructure capacity and accessibility then options 1 and 4 due to the increased emphasis on development in the rural areas, it acknowledges that this would not be a problem provided the choice of locations for allocations in the rural areas reflects the infrastructure capacity and accessibility of individual settlements.

6.9 In order to ensure that settlements develop in accordance with the proposed development approach and their capacity to support growth, it is necessary to define a settlement hierarchy and appropriate levels of development. To inform this process the Development Capacity Study assessed the infrastructure and accessibility of all settlements with a population of 1,000 or more. This indicated that in Leek and Cheadle infrastructure and accessibility are not expected to act as a constraint on future expansion. Biddulph has adequate provision at present but could be constrained if development is not restrained, whilst many of the larger villages have good accessibility but infrastructure is already or

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 49 Adopted Core Strategy

could be constrained. However, in view of number of the larger villages levels of development in each of these settlements is likely to be low and can be apportioned to reflect an individual settlements capacity

6.10 In the light of the evidence of the Development Capacity Study and also the former RSS requirement to restrain development in those areas nearest to the North Staffordshire conurbation and to reflect the vision and aims to create more self-sufficient settlements, the proposed development approach also limits growth in Biddulph and parts of the rural areas nearest to the conurbation and increases growth in Cheadle in order to address the past under-investment in the town. In Biddulph, the development approach only limits housing growth outside the urban area to avoid excessive encroachment into the green belt and excessive migration from the neighbouring conurbation to 2016, but does not prevent local regeneration proposals and programmes being brought forward in accordance with policy UR2 of the former RSS. This also accords with the approach of restricting housing development in the adopted Biddulph Town Centre Area Action Plan

Fig. 8 Diagrammatic Illustration of Proposed Development Approach

50 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

The Spatial Strategy for Staffordshire Moorlands

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 51 Adopted Core Strategy

7 The Spatial Strategy for Staffordshire Moorlands

7.1 The Spatial Strategy provides the framework for managed, sustainable housing and job growth in accordance with national and regional policy and local evidence, which is integrated with the necessary infrastructure for delivering development whilst safeguarding and enhancing key existing environmental, social and economic assets and resources. As well as providing certainty, it seeks to be flexible and resilient enough to enable the District to endure and respond to changes in the economy and housing markets during the lifespan of the Plan. Delivering the vision and objectives will also require the support of other partners and organisations.

7.2 The driving force behind the proposed spatial strategy is the need to make the District an exceptional place in which to live and work and to visit. The proposed spatial strategy seeks to achieve this by outlining the measures and policies needed to deliver the 4 strategic aims of creating distinctive, sustainable and self-supporting settlements; meeting the needs of our communities; encouraging a strong, prosperous and diverse economy; and maintaining a quality environment and special places. It also seeks to strengthen the role of Staffordshire Moorlands as a vital part of North Staffordshire, particularly in terms of its tourism contribution. This will mean ensuring that new development and regeneration is targeted to locations and sites which support the overall strategy and that the necessary infrastructure is in place and that initiatives and actions are delivered in a complementary and integrated way. This will need to be balanced against the need to protect and enhance the District’s considerable natural and heritage assets which are so important to the character and attraction of the District and ensuring that all development is sustainable in the interests of future generations, particularly embracing the challenges of climate change. The strategy also recognises the strategic need to support the regeneration and urban renaissance of the North Staffordshire conurbation through controlled development.

SA1: Creating distinctive, sustainable, self-supporting settlements

7.3 The creation of settlements which are distinctive, sustainable and self-supporting is a key theme of the Strategy. This means ensuring that development and investment is directed to those settlements which have the capacity and scope for growth as well as supporting, in a sustainable way, those other settlements whose needs must continue to be met.

7.4 In accordance with the proposed development approach, the strategy is based on focusing development in the market towns of Leek, Cheadle and Biddulph which will accommodate the bulk of District’s housing and employment needs in scale with their individual infrastructure capacity and needs, economies, constraints and their future roles and relationships. Development and investment will be targeted in these towns to provide a sustainable mix of homes, businesses, shops, leisure, health, education and many other uses, creating a balance that increases self-sufficiency, resolves existing problems where this is feasible and helps to meet local needs. Increasing the self-sufficiency of the market towns will also help in sustaining the long-term viability of the Staffordshire Moorlands and contributing positively to the quality of life offer of North Staffordshire which is recognised as a key objective by the North Staffordshire Regeneration Partnership. However, the District’s 3 market towns are very different in terms of their character, needs and aspirations. The strategy reflects this by taking a unique approach to how each town will develop.

52 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Leek

7.5 Leek, as the largest town in the District serving a wide area, will be promoted as the principal service centre and market town. It is the administrative centre for the District, already has a wide range of services and facilities and provides a high proportion of the District’s jobs and has good transport links with the rest of the District. The Council’s Development Capacity Study and Housing Land Availability Assessment both demonstrate scope for further growth. It is also a key market town in North Staffordshire and has a major role to play in the development of the tourist offer and as a service and employment base to support the rural economy of the sub-region.

7.6 Whilst Leek is already a highly sustainable settlement which has the capacity to take further growth, this needs to be of an appropriate scale and nature and in locations which do not undermine its distinctive character. Its role will therefore be reinforced by focusing development on expanding the range of housing and community facilities the town can offer; by creating further employment growth and increasing the diversity of employment opportunities to meet existing and future needs; by strengthening the role of Leek as a principal service and retailing centre for the District; and by promoting and investing in Leek’s special character and heritage and strengthening its role as a visitor destination.

7.7 The mixed-use regeneration of key opportunity sites at the Churnet Works and Cornhill will be major drivers for urban renaissance and change. Development in these opportunity areas will be mixed use, but they will contain major commercial elements including employment, retail, tourism and leisure developments that will serve the needs of the area, as appropriate. Development of both sites will depend upon the provision of critical transport infrastructure works and other public transport improvements. It is anticipated that the regeneration of the Cornhill site will need significant public sector intervention in order to succeed.

7.8 Both Biddulph and Cheadle also have important roles in the District as market towns supporting surrounding rural areas, but their needs and capacity for further growth are very different.

Biddulph

7.9 Biddulph’s role in the District as a significant service centre and market town will continue to be supported but development will be more targeted with the priority being to improve the local housing market and range of local community facilities; expand the employment offer in the town; regenerate and enhance the town centre; and improve its image and visitor attraction. Green belt and environmental constraints and the close proximity of the town to the N. Staffs conurbation together with identified capacity constraints justify the restraint of housing development in the town relative to its current population. Whilst there will still be a need to identify new sites for housing and employment growth, there will also be an emphasis on regeneration and enabling development to tackle disadvantage and poor housing provision, notably in the Biddulph East area. This will require a strong partnership approach with housing providers.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 53 Adopted Core Strategy

Cheadle

7.10 Cheadle’s role in the District as a significant service centre and market town on the other hand has scope to be enhanced and strengthened with the priority being to expand its housing market area and range of community provision; creating further employment growth and increasing the diversity of employment opportunities; expanding its retailing centre; and improving environmental quality and accessibility. The Council’s Development Capacity Study indicates scope to accommodate further growth which will also address issues of under-investment and under-performance in terms of achieving a more sustainable settlement and contributing more towards meeting the needs of the District.

7.11 The strategy is based on taking a comprehensive view of the expansion of the town and programming ahead for the phased release of land and related infrastructure improvements. This will take the form of urban extensions involving housing and employment development with related leisure and community facilities as part of an overall regeneration and growth strategy.

7.12 In order to support the role of the town centres of Leek, Biddulph and Cheadle as main service providers for the District the Strategy promotes additional retail development in each centre. The amount of new retail development is based on advice in the Retail Study, which shows capacity for additional convenience and comparison goods floorspace in the towns of Leek, Cheadle and Biddulph up to 2016. This was based on available expenditure arising from current and projected population within their respective catchment areas and market share adjustments to address current retail under-performance. It does not take account of population increases as a result of additional building that has or may take place which would be over and above the trend line projections. Appendix F sets out the implications in terms of the total required retail provision for each area. Needs beyond 2016 will be based on a review of capacity nearer that time.

Town Centre Masterplanning

7.13 Preference will be given to accommodating the bulk of the increases in retail provision within the town centres. Masterplans will be produced for the town centres of Leek and Cheadle. Both towns face development pressures and the preparation of Masterplans will ensure future developments are accommodated in a planned and more sustainable manner. This follows the recommendation in the Transforming North Staffordshire report, prepared by the Work Foundation, which proposes that Masterplans be prepared for Leek and Cheadle to help secure the ongoing vitality and viability of the towns within a North Staffordshire sub-regional context. The Masterplans will identify the scope for retail growth and other related changes to enhance the function of the town centres and will help identify suitable town centre sites for enhanced retail provision both through the intensification of existing sites and the conversion of sites in public ownership. However, it is recognised that it may not be possible to accommodate all of the required growth within the town centres, whilst some retailing such as bulky goods, would benefit from a location with good road access. Therefore where retail growth cannot be accommodated within the town centre then a site or sites will be identified on the edge of the town centres. The Masterplanning process will be timed to feed into the statutory planning process, with key opportunities taken forward in the Site Allocations DPD.

54 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

7.14 The role of Leek and Cheadle town centres will also be enhanced through measures to increase their appeal through a locally distinctive retail offer with more major retailers, including a major new supermarket anchor store, support for independent shops and a flourishing market and through improved access into and around the town centre. In Leek the Strategy will also focus on improving commercial activity and vitality on the edges of the town centre and reusing vacant or underused floorspace. Within Biddulph town centre significant growth and change is already taking place through implementation of proposals in the Area Action Plan supported by the Market Towns Initiative, including a new town centre supermarket and non-food retailing next to the bypass in order to make the town more self-sufficient.

Rural Areas

7.15 The strategy for the rural areas is based on ensuring that villages continue to be vibrant and sustainable communities, providing opportunities for people of all ages. The rural areas will maintain an important role within the District in terms of providing homes and jobs to meet local needs with better links with services and facilities in the larger villages and towns in order to address the decline in the rural economy and tackle social exclusion. The focus for development will therefore be on the larger villages which have the existing range of services and facilities and good accessibility to be capable of acting as rural service centres catering for the bulk of the rural area’s needs. Development will be targeted to provide for local need, with affordable housing, shops, local services, community facilities and low impact businesses of a scale and nature appropriate to those settlements and which would not act to undermine support for the 3 main towns. The levels of development in the larger villages will however need to be related to their individual capacity to accommodate further growth as identified in the Development Capacity Study.

7.16 In the smaller villages there will be limited development only, principally for local housing needs and rural diversification, whilst the countryside areas outside market towns and villages, including hamlets and other small settlements, will be subject to strict control over development with an emphasis on meeting essential rural needs,promoting environmental enhancement including landscape and biodiversity, and on encouraging appropriate economic diversification and tourism. In order to facilitate development ‘Infill Boundaries’ will be defined for the smaller villages within which appropriate development would be allowed. Major developed areas in the countryside will also be identified where an appropriate range of uses would be permitted to support rural needs.

7.17 Due to the restrictions on growth opportunities outside of the built-up areas of the District and in accordance with the principles of sustainability, development will be concentrated in the urban areas where there is the greatest potential for the re-use of previously developed land and to minimise the need to travel by being located close to existing services, jobs and public transport. However, whilst the priority will be on using brownfield and underused sites, the strategy recognises the need to allow for development of some greenfield sites and also peripheral expansion in order to enable the housing and employment requirements to be met, particularly in areas such as Cheadle where the growth aspirations cannot be met within the existing urban area. It is expected that peripheral expansion will only come forward where it will bring infrastructure benefits and can be properly assimilated into the landscape and well related to existing urban areas. The Council will work closely with its partners and other support services to ensure this can be achieved.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 55 Adopted Core Strategy

7.18 In order to give adequate guidance and certainty in the Core Strategy on where strategic growth on the periphery of the towns will take place, broad locations for major housing and employment development will be identified. In the rural areas it is not considered appropriate to identify broad locations, other than the major developed areas in the countryside, because the limited scale of development required for any particular settlement would not require large allocations to be made.

SA2: Meeting the needs of our communities

7.19 Our communities are central to the special characteristics of Staffordshire Moorlands. It is important that their needs are adequately met to ensure that they continue to thrive and have a high quality of life.

7.20 One of the prime requirements in meeting the needs of our communities is ensuring there is sufficient provision of the right type of housing in the right places and that this is delivered at the right time. This is necessary both to retain existing households within the District and to provide opportunities for meeting the needs of future households to support local services and sustain economic growth. The need for homes will be defined by the requirements as assessed by the Council, the Sustainable Community Strategy and the Council’s Housing Strategy as well as supporting documents such as the Housing Needs Study and the Strategic Housing Market Assessment.

Affordable Housing

7.21 The strategy recognises that many people in the District will require support to enable them to access housing appropriate to their needs through opportunities for alternative, more affordable and appropriate forms of housing. This will require a package of measures and initiatives through the Council’s housing enabling role and partnership working with private developers, RSLs and Parish Councils including increasing the requirement for affordable housing provision and facilitating more supported housing.

7.22 One of the principal means of delivering more affordable housing will be through the provision of more housing generally and requiring appropriate levels of on-site provision or financial contributions from developers. The Council and partner RSLs will also continue to work to maximise Homes and Communities Agency funded development across the district, but in order to create a significant increase in the future supply of affordable housing the Council will also need to directly intervene itself in providing sites and, in the longer term, funding to develop affordable homes throughout the District.

7.23 The strategy also seeks to address the needs of a changing population by increasing the provision of suitable accommodation and services for older people and catering for smaller households in the towns and by providing for the needs of younger people and families in the rural areas. As well as ensuring there is a suitable range of housing provided to meet these needs, specific housing needs will be addressed through support for the development of extra care housing and by addressing the needs of other groups such as gypsies and travellers based on the recommendations of the North Staffordshire Gypsy and Traveller Needs Assessment.

7.24 Housing development levels are based on the District’s requirement as assessed in the Housing Requirements Paper (Oct 2010). The apportionment of housing development between the sub-areas of the District is based on a number of factors including the proposed

56 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

development approach, the availability of deliverable sites, infrastructure constraints and opportunities, environmental constraints on development (e.g. green belt, flood risk areas), the aspirations and strategies of other agencies and service providers and the strategic need to restrain development near to the MUAs. Appendix F sets out the implications in terms of annualised development rates and the minimum net requirement for each area necessary to achieve the required provision after deducting completions and current commitments. Meeting these needs will require a mixture of large sites to provide the infrastructure and facilities needed to address the needs of some settlements, and the limited release of smaller sites to meet identified local needs in smaller communities and enable their continued evolution.

Housing Development

7.25 In Leek the rate of housing development will be increased from a past average of 57 dwellings/annum to 82.5 dwellings/annum. In the short to medium term the emphasis will be on making the most of opportunities for brownfield development within the existing urban area through appropriate reuse of surplus mill buildings as well as regenerating underused and surplus areas. Whilst much of the housing need could potentially be accommodated on brownfield sites within the current built-up area, some greenfield development for housing within the settlement boundary and on the edge of the town will also be necessary. Major greenfield sites will only come forward in the longer term.

7.26 Suggested levels of new housing development in Biddulph will decrease from a past average of 71 dwellings/annum to 55 dwellings/annum in order to limit impact on the adjacent N. Staffordshire MUA and reflecting the policy and environmental constraints on expansion of the town’s development boundaries. Evidence from the SHLAA shows that the majority of this development could potentially be accommodated within the present settlement boundary, but much of this would have to be on greenfield sites due to the limited availability of brownfield sites. Where development on greenfield sites outside of the settlement boundary is needed, this should only be in the longer term and in areas which can be assimilated into the landscape. This may in some cases necessitate green belt boundary changes.

7.27 The rate of housing development in Cheadle will be increased from a past average of 42 dwellings/annum to 60.5 dwellings/annum reflecting the need to strengthen Cheadle’s role in the District, bring forward infrastructure improvements through development and create a more self-sufficient town. Opportunities for development on brownfield sites are limited in Cheadle and therefore in the medium to longer term greenfield site development on the edges of the town will be required. It is considered that the most sustainable way of expanding the housing market area is through urban extensions in appropriate areas which can deliver suitable infrastructure improvements.

7.28 The rate of housing development in the Rural Areas will be decreased from a past average of 85 dwellings/annum to 77 dwellings/annum reflecting the emphasis of the strategy to focus the bulk of new development in the towns and the need for strategic restraint in those areas nearest to the North Staffordshire conurbation but maintaining sufficient growth to support existing communities in the rural areas. New development will be on a range of brownfield and greenfield sites targeted to support existing services and facilities primarily in and on the edge of the larger villages and varying in scale depending on the size and capacity of each settlement.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 57 Adopted Core Strategy

7.29 The need to manage housing supply will be crucial to the successful delivery of the strategy. The development rate will be varied over the plan period to ensure that it is realistic and appropriate to the prevailing housing market and does not undermine the needs of the adjoining North Staffordshire conurbation. Additionally housing will be controlled through various measures to ensure that it is distributed appropriately across the District and that preference is given to urban, brownfield sites or sites delivering essential infrastructure needs.

7.30 Although the spatial strategy focuses on the location of major development and the role of different areas, much of the development that occurs in the District is relatively small-scale and piecemeal and this is particularly true for housing development. The strategy expects this type of development to continue throughout the built-up area, although the nature, scale and density of the development will vary according to its location, character and relative accessibility. An additional allowance will therefore be made on top of the requirements to accommodate development on such sites which cannot be identified, for example because sites are too small or their availability is unknown (known as ‘windfall’ sites). Any such development will be managed to ensure that development rates are not excessively exceeded.

Infrastructure Provision

7.31 A major factor in achieving the strategy is the delivery of the necessary social, physical and green infrastructure to support future development requirements, both within existing urban areas as well as in new areas of development. The Strategy seeks policy measures to protect services and facilities as well as development proposals to support them. With limited resources available to the Council, the implementation of infrastructure improvements is dependent on the successful delivery of physical development and regeneration schemes through developer funding and the plans and programmes of other service providers. Developers promoting development and regeneration schemes will be expected to contribute towards strategic and local infrastructure requirements, through both on-site facilities and financial contributions for off-site works and facilities. The government has reviewed the role of such planning contributions and introduced a Community Infrastructure Levy (CIL) as a means of funding additional infrastructure arising from growth. The Council is currently considering and assessing the appropriateness and viability of introducing CIL for Staffordshire Moorlands to meet future infrastructure needs on a locality basis. Much of the information set out in the Infrastructure Plan would inform CIL calculations and if developer contributions are sought through this method, then the appropriate methodology would be set out in a separate local development document. For the foreseeable future, however, developer contributions will be sought, including those strategic or pooled contributions in accordance with Government Circular 05/2005. The District Council has published Supplementary Planning Guidance (2004) which deals with such contributions.

7.32 The Development Capacity Study and the strategies, plans and programmes of key service providers will inform decisions on future provision. To address the identified need for health and education provision, redevelopment or development of services and facilities will therefore be considered appropriate in principle, where this meets an established need or shortfall. Future sites will be considered if the demand or need is identified. Proposals involving the development of other community facilities will be considered in relation to the needs of the local resident population. New and improved community facilities should be comprehensively planned for and suitable land should be provided in accessible locations - the Development Capacity Study will be used to determine this. In order to maximise both the provision of community services and the

58 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

best use of developed sites and existing facilities, the Strategy proposes to promote the co-location or sharing of community uses where this is relevant thus reducing the need to find additional sites. Of particular relevance would be school facilities and grounds where the buildings and facilities can be utilised for other uses at appropriate times.

7.33 The Strategy also recognises that the needs of residents will continue to be met from opportunities, experiences and services provided outside the District. It does not seek to compete with the larger health, educational, retail, leisure and recreational opportunities available elsewhere in the North Staffordshire sub-region, but to complement them and facilitate better access to them. Whilst the focus is therefore on meeting local needs, it will also seek to improve the infrastructure links to the sub-region and invest in improved public transport. In this respect buses are the only realistic public transport option for linking up the area and it is vital that there is investment in this service both to connect settlements and provide access to the rail network. The Strategy also seeks to minimise the need to have to travel by car by limiting development in unsustainable locations and enabling facilities which promote walking, cycling and the use of public transport, in accordance with the priorities of the Staffordshire and North Staffordshire Local Transport Plans. The Council will continue to work closely with the Highway Authority to ensure the coordination of any such proposals within the LDF and the Local Transport Plans.

SA3: Encouraging a strong, prosperous and diverse economy

7.34 A strong focus of the strategy is developing and diversifying in a sustainable manner the economy of Staffordshire Moorlands and meeting local employment needs in the towns and villages by distributing employment growth and change across the District. This will be particularly important in strengthening the District’s role within the sub-region and is central to achieving self-sufficient communities.

7.35 Achieving a strong economy is also a key component of the Council’s Sustainable Community Strategy and it’s Corporate Plan. Productivity is the key to a strong economy and well-being and in a knowledge-based economy skills are key to raising productivity. The Council’s Economic Strategy will identify opportunities to build greater local capacity with an educated, skilled and flexible workforce, particularly supporting the needs of young people and the economically inactive. The Spatial Strategy seeks to support this by facilitating the growth of local educational and training establishments and maximising access to higher order facilities outside the District and by working with developers to provide training programmes and employment support. It also seeks to ensure that there is appropriate housing and complementary social and leisure facilities to retain the local workforce.

7.36 The Strategy provides strong support for the growth of existing businesses, in particular Britannia Building Society, JCB and Alton Towers as major employers, and providing opportunities for their expansion are central to the delivery of a thriving economy. Allied to this is the importance of growing Small and Medium Enterprises in the District, particularly the growth of knowledge-based industries and high value manufacturing which can match the skills of the District’s workforce. There is also a need for the continued development of start-up/ incubator and grow-on space in the District, and opportunities to provide this will be sought. This will be supported by the Economic Strategy through promotion and initiatives. The Strategy also recognises the strategic importance of the Blythe Bridge Regional Investment Site in delivering the economic objectives at both a regional and local level.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 59 Adopted Core Strategy

7.37 Employment development levels are based on the former Preferred Option RSS Phase 2 Revision supplemented by evidence in the latest Employment Land Study to give a requirement of 24 hectares between 2006 and 2026. Appendix F sets out the implications in terms of the total required employment provision for each area. The distribution of employment provision takes account of the role and function of each settlement, the proposed housing development levels and the existing workforce distribution. New employment provision is to be primarily focused in the market towns, close to the local populations and sustainable transport networks to allow for easy access and to support the principle of self-containment. The higher proportion of employment development in the rural areas reflects the higher workforce levels and need for growth in the rural areas.

7.38 The Council is committed to ensuring that there is a portfolio of sustainably located employment sites attractive to developers, operators and appropriate to market needs. In general, the strategy promotes the consolidation and environmental enhancement of existing employment areas where these are in sustainable locations so they can continue to meet the needs of those firms that support the local economy. However that does not mean retaining sites unnecessarily that could be more appropriate for other land uses. Some of the existing industrial and commercial areas in the District may require significant investment to maintain or refurbish stock and these areas will be identified within the LDF as having the potential to be recycled for alternative uses in the future, particularly where these lie close to the town centre. Where firms and businesses are displaced these will be supported to find alternative sites within the District and compensatory measures introduced to support provision elsewhere.

Identifying New Employment Areas

7.39 New areas will need to be identified for strategic employment allocations to provide flexible floorspace opportunities within accessible locations. Major new employment areas will be focused near to the towns in order to support sustainable patterns of development. Whilst the priority will be to use existing previously developed land, there will be a need to identify greenfield sites because of the lack of suitable available brownfield sites. Priority will be to make further provision at established employment locations through intensification and expansion where these are in sustainable locations in order to minimise impact on other areas.

7.40 In Leek the priority will be to intensify employment development to the south of the town where the potential for expansion and good road communications and accessibility are greatest. As well as improving existing employment areas, there will be new employment areas created to reflect the significant role Leek will play in encouraging a strong, prosperous economy and meeting the District’s needs. This strategy will require the provision of a new road link between the A53 and A520 to serve existing and future employment areas and measures to secure better public transport access.

7.41 In Biddulph the focus for employment development will continue to be at the new Victoria Business Park off the A527. This development is already committed and will meet anticipated demand as identified in the Employment Land Study.

7.42 In Cheadle new employment provision will need to be planned comprehensively and phased with the proposed increase in housing in order to secure the necessary infrastructure improvements and benefits needed to support growth. The expansion of existing employment areas to the south will be the priority where these can be adequately served by road and public transport.

60 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

7.43 In the Rural Areas economic activities and uses complementary to the countryside will continue to be allowed in a carefully controlled manner. New employment development should be of a small scale and related to the larger settlements, where possible expanding existing employment areas. There are also a number of well established employment areas in the open countryside which will be supported, where they are sustainable, to enable them to continue to provide opportunities for existing and new businesses. Where they are no longer suitable for continued employment uses, alternative uses will be considered.

7.44 The strategy places a strong emphasis on sustainable tourism, as a key driver for diversifying the local economy and strengthening the District’s role in the sub-region. The District already has a significant number of tourism assets and given its strategic location near to major centres of population and adjoining the Peak District is well placed to play a major role in the North Staffordshire sub-region as a centre for rural tourism. This will be achieved by providing opportunities to increase the length of visitor stays, promoting more sustainable forms of tourism which are compatible with the character of the area, establishing links between existing tourist facilities and enhancing and managing tourism in a way which balances the needs of visitors, residents and the environment. Delivering this will require a partnership approach with key organisations and neighbouring authorities as well as engaging the private sector in identifying opportunities. The Council has undertaken a Tourism Study which highlights that the District has the potential and capacity to attract more visitors and to create more jobs in this sector. It identifies a number of potentially transformational projects which could provide significant impact on the tourism economy of the District, either in terms of direct impact and job creation or in terms of catalysing wider development.

7.45 The District’s market towns will play a key role in achieving growth in tourism, in particular the town centres by offering a range of experiences and attractions for day and long-stay visitors. This will be achieved by measures and initiatives to help develop and promote the towns and their rural hinterland as visitor destinations focusing on their unique qualities and heritage. Sustainable tourism will be embedded into the heart of the town’s regeneration strategies and Town Centre Masterplans, ensuring tourism is recognised as the major potential driver for economic change.

Churnet Valley

7.46 As well as promoting tourism opportunities in the market towns, the Churnet Valley will be promoted as an area for sustainable tourism to support rural regeneration. The Churnet Valley has many natural and heritage features and qualities which give it its unique sense of place with a number of well established tourist attractions. The aim will be to increase the economic contribution from sustainable tourism by enhancing the attraction of the Churnet Valley, such that visitors will stay longer and throughout the year. This will be achieved by:

development of its heritage, nature based activities and outdoor recreational pursuits which are commensurate with and sympathetic to the natural living landscape, targeting the ‘countrysider’ visitor sector; through the regeneration of key identified brownfield sites to enhance their role and value in the Churnet Valley, particularly for uses which support the ‘countrysider’ visitor sector; encouraging and supporting the Alton Towers long term strategy to develop their longer stay and ‘family fun’ visitor market;

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 61 Adopted Core Strategy

supporting and promoting opportunities for visitors to access, understand and engage with the Churnet Valley's landscape, heritage and nature conservation assets; improving access to these activities and promoting more sustainable modes of travel through the Churnet Valley, namely walking, cycling, horse riding and public transport; supporting and encouraging existing businesses and attractions.

7.47 However, development must not be at the expense of the special qualities of the Staffordshire Moorlands which draw so many people to the District in the first place. A very sensitive approach to the provision and expansion of facilities and accommodation will be required. In order to achieve this a Masterplan is being prepared which will provide detailed guidance on specific areas and activities within the Churnet Valley.

7.48 The tourism offer will also be enhanced through the development of a tourist management organisation (Staffordshire Destination Management Partnership) that links to the work being done for both Staffordshire and the Peak District and through measures within the Council’s Economic Strategy to provide business support for new and existing businesses, improve the quality and distribution of visitor information, develop activities and promotions, and support visitor management schemes.

SA4: Maintaining a quality environment and special places

7.49 Maintaining a quality environment and creating special places is a key theme of the strategy which underpins all of the other aims and is essential to enhancing the District’s tourism role. In particular, local distinctiveness and protection of the District’s unique landscape and settlement character will be a major consideration in all new development.

7.50 A Landscape and Settlement Character Assessment and a Historic Environment Character Assessment have been undertaken which will be used to map the quality of the District’s landscape and identify future management measures. It will also guide future development in order to ensure this is in harmony with prevailing landscape character and identify important countryside areas and visual open spaces to be protected and enhanced as a long-term recreational open space and ecological community resource. A PPG17 Audit of recreational and public open spaces has also been undertaken which will establish local standards of open space provision and help identify areas to complement these major areas of open space which will need to be protected to ensure future needs are met. These areas of open space will also be made more accessible and linked together, where possible, by footpaths and cycle routes. The provision and enhancement of these open spaces will play an important role in improving health and reducing health inequalities and community safety which is a key Council priority. This will be combined with measures to increase and widen access to participation in sport and physical activity through the emerging Sports and Physical Activity Strategy.

7.51 The Strategy also seeks to promote better design and identify and protect buildings, features and areas of value and encourage local communities to highlight those of most value to them through Parish Plans and Village Design Statements. It also encourages the use of Masterplans to identify the design principles for major development sites. It continues to provide a high level of protection to our most valued natural and heritage assets, such as Listed Buildings, Conservation Areas and SSSIs even if this may mean foregoing some

62 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

immediate socio-economic benefit. The strategy also aims to secure the sustainable management of other assets which although not designated make an important contribution to the character, distinctiveness and identity of the area.

7.52 Maintaining a quality environment is also about reducing our wider impact on the environment, adapting to climate change and making best use of resources. All local development has a global impact and therefore requires an integrated approach to new development which promotes a sustainable economy that delivers high levels of employment, and a just society that promotes social inclusion in ways that protect and enhance the physical environment and optimise resource and energy use. In practice this means giving priority to the reuse of previously developed land and existing buildings. Proposals will be assessed against the sequential approach to development.

7.53 It also means linking housing and commercial land needs and directing planned and phased development to locations which avoid the risk of flooding and are supported by transport, leisure, community and essential services whilst minimising damage to the environment. Building materials and methods will be encouraged which help reduce the depletion of natural resources and the production of greenhouse gases, and ensure buildings have a long life, flexiblility and adaptability for other potential alternative future uses.

7.54 The Core Strategy will adopt national and regional targets and requirements for reducing carbon dioxide emissions and raising renewable energy usage as these are supported by research, but this will be complemented where possible by local measures to reduce emissions and ensure new developments are adaptable to changing climatic conditions. The Council’s Sustainability Strategy also sets out a range of actions required at a local level to deliver more sustainable development.

7.55 The environmental as well as social and economic implications of development will be intrinsic to any decisions made in the LDF. Throughout the process of formulating policies and proposals, options have been continuously tested against sustainability objectives through the combined Sustainability Appraisal and Strategic Environmental Assessment in order to deliver sustainable development. To ensure that the policies in the Core Strategy provide a positive framework for conservation and enhancement of the District’s biodiversity and do not impact adversely on significant nature conservation sites in the vicinity an ‘Appropriate Assessment’ has also been undertaken in accordance with the Habitats Regulations.

7.56 The Council also believes that the protection of the Green Belt within the District is of strategic importance, and it is a fundamental part of the Strategy that the Green Belt shall continue to be protected up to 2026 and beyond with continued restraint on development to reflect national planning policy. However, whilst it is proposed that there will be no major releases of land from the Green Belt it is recognised that, in exceptional cases, some changes to boundaries may be necessary to facilitate urban expansion which cannot be accommodated within existing urban areas.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 63 Adopted Core Strategy

64 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Core Policies

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 65 Adopted Core Strategy

8 Core Policies

8.0.1 This section sets out the Core Policies which will be used to deliver and implement the Core Strategy. The primary purpose of the Core Policies is to help articulate the Core Strategy taking forward its spatial vision, objectives and spatial strategy. The Council is not proposing to produce a separate Development Control Policies DPD and therefore the Core Policies include both strategic and cross-cutting development control policies. These detailed policies do not just address the control of development, but also provide a context for a wide range of activities with a spatial dimension.

8.0.2 The policies seek to be proactive and aspirational – it is not intended to be a development control manual setting precise requirements, but aims to set out what the Council wishes to achieve with fewer policies than the Local Plan, but more comprehensive, more locally distinctive and with an emphasis on value judgments. Where appropriate they will be supported by SPDs giving guidance and advice. These will be key policies for determining planning applications both at Planning Committee and under Delegated Powers.

8.0.3 In developing these policies account has been taken of earlier work on issues, the evidence base, responses to consultations and meetings and discussions with key stakeholders and Council officers. When the Core Strategy is finally adopted, following the public examination, these policies will replace the saved policies of the Staffordshire Moorlands Local Plan. Appendix H details how these will be replaced.

8.0.4 A set of 32 policies has been drafted divided into the following sections, each relating to a specific Core Strategy objective which in turn will help deliver the proposed development approach and the vision. For each policy supporting text has been provided to justify and explain the policy itself.

Spatial Strategy Policies (8.1) - The Spatial Strategy policies reflect the proposed vision and development approach and provide the strategic policy context for all other policies, establishing the Council’s overall approach to development, the level of future provision, housing management measures and the distribution of development. In particular they establish the settlement hierarchy and, through Area Strategies, a range of actions and measures for each settlement. They also address other development of strategic significance.

Development Control Policies– These provide detailed policy guidance relating to specific types of development. They cover:

Sustainable Development Policies (8.2) Economy and Employment Policies (8.3) Housing Policies (8.4) Town Centre and Retailing Policies (8.5) Design and Conservation Policies (8.6) Sustainable Communities Policies (8.7) Rural Policies (8.8) Natural Environment Policies (8.9) Transport Policies (8.10)

66 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.1 Spatial Strategy Policies

Spatial Objectives

SO1. To make provision for the overall land-use requirements for the District, consistent with the Regional Spatial Strategy, the role of Staffordshire Moorlands within North Staffordshire and the role of each settlement.

8.1.1 The spatial strategy policies seek to set the overall quantum and nature of development needed to meet the assessed requirements of the District taking into account national and regional policies and up-to-date local evidence and establish how the development proposed for the District is to be achieved in order to deliver the vision and spatial strategy. In order to ensure that there is sufficient to meet longer term needs and be able to respond to changes in the market, it is proposed that housing and employment targets should not be seen as absolute ceilings. This is supported by policy measures to manage housing supply based on annual housing development rates to ensure adequate delivery and measures to restrain development to prevent broader regional regeneration objectives from being undermined.

8.1.2 Area-specific requirements and policies are also proposed, based on a settlement hierarchy which reflects the development approach, to ensure that the type and amount of development in each settlement is appropriate to its role, infrastructure capacity, future needs and constraints. The distribution is based on percentages to give flexibility to incorporate any future changes in assessed requirements for the District. The area-specific policies establish the approach to development in those areas, identifying strategic development needs to be met and how these are to be delivered. Major strategic development opportunities are identified where appropriate, but it is not proposed to identify specific locations for all other development within settlements nor to identify settlement boundaries, as this may prejudice the scope of the subsequent Site Allocations DPD to properly assess and determine appropriate allocations, development boundaries and other designations. Where expansion of the urban areas is required the Core Strategy does however identify broad locations for future housing and employment growth.

8.1.3 The spatial strategy policies also establish the approach to be adopted in relation to development in the countryside, facilitates the review of detailed boundaries and identifies those areas where major improvements to transport provision are required and how it relates to future development.

Identification of Broad Locations

8.1.4 In order to give clear guidance on the scale and location of future development, not just across the District, but particularly for the main settlements, the Core Strategy identifies broad locations for both housing and employment development. It is not the role of the Core Strategy to identify specific sites for development as this would make it too inflexible and restrictive, but merely to identify those development areas which are considered central to the achievement of the strategy where sites would be identified and the anticipated nature and scale of development in those areas. This will in turn influence and inform future decisions on suitable sites for allocations in the Site Allocations DPD, Supplementary Planning Documents and on planning applications. In the rural areas it was not considered appropriate to identify broad locations, other than the strategic development sites which are proposed in policy SS6c, because the limited scale of development required for any particular settlement would not require strategic development areas to be identified.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 67 Adopted Core Strategy

8.1.5 A search of potential areas of development for housing was undertaken for each of the towns. This included all potential development areas of 10 or more dwellings which were initially identified through the Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment. Small sites of less than 10 dwellings have not been included as these would be expected to come forward as additional unidentified sites. Sites were subsequently grouped into broad areas (urban area and urban extensions). Areas which were considered to be too significantly constrained by green belt policy, flooding or other essential uses (e.g. playing fields) were discounted from the initial search unless it was considered that they would provide significant overriding planning or infrastructure benefits. Each of the areas identified was then assessed based on a range of sustainability and environmental considerations having regard to evidence available at that time and then ranked in order of preference accordingly. The ranking of sites based on their initial assessment was intended to provide guidance in making choices. From this ranking, preferred broad locations to meet the requirements for each town were identified. Consultation on the preferred broad locations and also the other broad locations was then undertaken. Suggestions were also invited for broad locations which had not been included. The assessment and ranking of all of the broad locations was subsequently reviewed in the light of further evidence and responses from the Preferred Options consultation and following representations on the Submission document and its subsequent Addendum, in order to identify the final choice of broad locations and their priorities.

8.1.6 Employment areas were not subject to such an extensive search of sites because there was strong evidence from the Employment Land Study that the scale of employment provision required could be accommodated on existing committed and opportunity sites without the need to identify new sites. The Spatial Strategy also directs employment growth to specific areas. Nonetheless in order to ensure that the existing committed and opportunity sites were the most sustainable and appropriate areas, these were also assessed and put forward for consultation. Suggestions were also invited for other broad locations for employment which had not been included.

Details of the assessment and ranking of all broad locations are set out in the ‘Sustainability Appraisal of Revised Submission Core Strategy’ document.

Identification of Strategic Regeneration Sites

8.1.7 Consultation on issues and options and information from the evidence base has highlighted a number of major regeneration opportunity sites, primarily existing or previously developed areas which are underused or derelict and which would benefit from redevelopment for appropriate uses. Many of these were considered of local significance only and their redevelopment was not central to the delivery of the Core Strategy. However, several were considered of strategic significance, either because of their location or their potential role in delivering significant infrastructure and environmental benefits for the area. The Spatial Strategy identifies these areas and they have subsequently been assessed and were put forward for consultation.

68 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

SS1 Development Principles

The Council will expect the development and use of land to contribute positively to the social, economic and environmental improvement of the Staffordshire Moorlands in terms of delivering, in partnership with other agencies and services:

a mix of types and tenures of quality, affordable homes to meet the needs and aspirations of the existing and future communities quality local services, including provision for education, healthcare, leisure, community, cultural and tourist facilities in response to anticipated population change and visitor numbers; easy access to jobs, shops and transport services by all sections of the community; increased economic prosperity and opportunities for employment and greater local capacity with an educated, skilled and flexible workforce; a healthy, safe, attractive and well-maintained environment; development which maintains the distinctive character of the Staffordshire Moorlands, its individual towns and villages and their settings; development that is undertaken in a way that protects and enhances the natural and historic environment of the District and its surrounding areas both now and for future generations. development which secures high quality, sustainable environments, efficient and effective use of resources and contributes effectively to tackling climate change and reduced carbon emissions.

All proposals for development will be considered in the context of the District-wide Spatial Strategy and with regard to both its direct and indirect cumulative impact over the longer term. New development will make the best use of previously developed land and buildings and will follow a sequential approach to the sustainable location of development.

8.1.8 This policy underpins the whole Core Strategy and provides a fundamental set of criteria that will be applied to all development proposals to ensure that all development provides integrated solutions which meet social, economic and environmental objectives at the same time. In particular consideration will be given to the longer term implications of development having regard also to the indirect and cumulative impact.

8.1.9 It is considered that the broad thrust of the policy is in line with the Council’s Sustainable Community Strategy and the aims and objectives of the former RSS, and the former RSS Review. The policy also reflects the guiding aims of meeting the needs of our communities, creating sustainable, self-sufficient settlements; encouraging a strong, prosperous diverse economy; providing quality local services, including schools, health, care, open spaces, leisure and community facilities; and maintaining a quality environment and special places. The policy is therefore one which balances the need to make adequate provision for homes, jobs and services with the need to protect and enhance the District’s considerable natural and heritage assets in the most sustainable way. Detailed requirements concerning the control of development and specific designations will be subject to more detailed policies set out elsewhere either in this document or in future LDF documents and shown on the Proposals Map.

8.1.10 In order to protect the countryside which is important to the character of the Moorlands and maintain sustainable settlements, development boundaries will be defined in the Site Allocations DPD which will limit the extent of development. Outside of the

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 69 Adopted Core Strategy

development boundaries there will be strict control on development to meet defined needs and to facilitate the appropriate redevelopment of existing developed sites. Development boundaries will be subject to review through the Site Allocations DPD in order to ensure that they can endure for the plan period of the Core Strategy.

SS1a - Presumption in Favour of Sustainable Development

When considering development proposals the Council will take a positive approach that reflects the presumption in favour of sustainable development contained in the National Planning Policy Framework. It will always work pro-actively with applicants jointly to find solutions which mean that proposals can be approved wherever possible, and to secure development that improves the economic, social and environmental conditions in the area.

Planning applications that accord with the policies in this Core Strategy (and, where relevant, with polices in neighbourhood plans) will be approved without delay, unless material considerations indicate otherwise. Where there are no policies relevant to the application or relevant policies are out of date at the time of making the decision then the Council will grant permission unless material considerations indicate otherwise – taking into account whether:

Any adverse impacts of granting permission would significantly and demonstrably outweigh the benefits, when assessed against the policies in the National Planning Policy Framework taken as a whole; or Specific policies in that Framework indicate that development should be restricted.

8.1.11 At the heart of the NPPF is a presumption in favour of sustainable development seen as “..a golden thread running through both plan-making and decision-taking.” This policy sets out how the Council will work with applicants to facilitate development that improves the economic, social and environmental conditions of Staffordshire Moorlands. It also provides for the grant of planning permission in circumstances where there are no relevant policies or where relevant policies are out-of-date.

8.1.12 To achieve sustainable development, new development should be located in sustainable locations and contribute positively to the social, economic and environmental improvement of the area, in accordance with policy SS1.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG

SS2 - Future Provision of Development

Provision will be made for 6000 additional dwellings (net of demolitions) to be completed in Staffordshire Moorlands (excluding the Peak District National Park) during the period 2006 to 2026. This will be phased at the average development rates to achieve the net additional dwelling completions set out below. Sufficient deliverable land will be identified to provide at least 5 years of development at all times.

70 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Period Average Annual Net Dwelling Development Rate Completions

2006 – 2011 220 1100

2011 – 2016 220 1100

2016 – 2021 360 1800

2021 – 2026 400 2000

Although the table shows an average annual development rate of 220 for the period 2011 – 2016, only 167 dwellings have been completed in the first 2 years. It follows that the annual development rate for the period 2013 -2016 will have to increase significantly in order to complete 1,100 dwellings over the whole period. This is reflected in row 2: the projected completions on committed sites, in Appendix G – Housing Trajectory. Additionally, as a result of the significant underperformance in dwelling completions in years 2011 – 2012, the Council will ensure a supply of deliverable land for 1,320 dwellings to provide a 20% buffer supply, added to the 5 year requirement to 2016.

The Council will review the overall housing requirement and annual development rate at the beginning of each phase to ensure that future provision will continue to adequately meet identified local needs and reflect development potential.

Provision will be made for at least 24 hectares of additional employment land in Staffordshire Moorlands (excluding the Peak District National Park) during the period 2006 – 2026. Sufficient deliverable land will be identified to provide at least 6 hectares of employment land at all times.

Provision will be made for new retail, transport, recreational, community and tourism facilities and services to meet the identified needs of settlements within Staffordshire Moorlands (excluding the Peak District National Park) up to 2026 as set out in policies SS5 and SS6.

The Council will undertake and complete an early and comprehensive review of the Core Strategy by 2016 to cover the period 2016 – 2031 to ensure that future provision will continue to adequately meet objectively assessed needs and reflect development potential. This will be rolled into a single Local Plan combined with the Site Allocations DPD.

8.1.13 The NPPF requires that authorities meet the full, objectively assessed needs for market and affordable housing. In order to meet the objectively assessed needs of the District the Core Strategy proposes 6,000 dwellings for the period 2006 – 2026 which is expected to meet the projected household increase for the District over this period and make a substantial contribution towards meeting the overall forecast household growth for the West Midlands North Housing Market Area. This level of provision will also enable the Council to address much of the high level of affordable housing need from existing and future households as identified in the Strategic Housing Market Assessment (2007) and facilitate the need for regeneration and increased self-sufficiency in the market towns and larger villages. The requirement for 6,000 dwellings is a target and should not be seen as an absolute ceiling as there needs to be flexibility to ensure there is a continuous 5 year supply

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 71 Adopted Core Strategy

of deliverable land at all times in accordance with the NPPF. The Council will however monitor and manage the amount of development over the plan period to ensure that the North Staffordshire MUA is not undermined.

8.1.14 The requirement will be met from all sources of permanent housing provision including new build market dwellings and flats, conversions or changes of use of existing properties, affordable and local needs housing, rural exceptions housing, residential caravans, gypsy and traveller caravans, and sheltered and extra care/flexicare housing which is self-contained. Losses of housing through demolitions or conversions or changes of use to non-residential uses will be deducted from the provision. The requirement assumes that current levels of vacancies in the existing housing stock remain constant over the plan period. If monitoring indicates any significant variation in the vacancy level, this will be taken into account in determining future requirements

8.1.15 The Policy no longer includes a target for the minimum number of affordable housing units to be provided between 2006 and 2026 because of the uncertainty with the level of affordable housing provision to be sought from market housing in the longer term. The current level of 33% affordable housing on market housing sites will be re-assessed after 2016 as part of the review of the Core Strategy in the light of more up-to-date evidence on the ability of sites to deliver affordable housing.

8.1.16 In order to manage the rate of development the requirement is divided over 4 phases of the plan period - phase 1 (2006-2011) reflects actual completions (rounded up). The policy proposes lower levels of development in the first half of the plan period to 2016 and higher levels post-2016 based on a gradual recovery of the housing market to 2016 increasing up to 2021 to a level which can then be sustained to 2026. The development rate for 2011 – 2016 reflects the latest projected household growth rates as well as reflecting anticipated housing land supply and completions to 2016. The Site Allocations DPD and the review of the Core Strategy will incorporate housing allocations to further boost supply post-2016. The housing trajectory in Appendix G demonstrates how the Council will manage housing development over the plan period to achieve the development rates set out in this policy.

8.1.17 In accordance with paragraph 47 of the NPPF, the Council will ensure that there is a 5 year supply of deliverable housing land at all times based on the appropriate annual development rates for the period with an additional 5% or 20% buffer as appropriate to ensure choice and competition in the market for land. The Council will seek to achieve this through a ‘plan, monitor, manage’ approach to the phased release of allocated sites and the granting of permissions on unidentified (windfall) sites and the identification of sites through the Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment in accordance with policy SS4.

8.1.18 In order to ensure that the Core Strategy takes account of the longer term requirements of the District, the Council will undertake an early and comprehensive review. This will consider long term housing, employment and retail needs in the context of any strategic assessment of development requirements under the Duty to Cooperate and will incorporate work currently underway on site allocations in the form of a single comprehensive Local Plan for the plan period 2016 to 2031. This will also include a review of policies to ensure that they endure for the longer term.

8.1.19 The provision of employment land is based on the latest 2008 Employment Land Study Update which establishes demand for almost 24 hectares of employment land across the District to 2026. This amount of development also reflects a requirement to maintain a 5 year supply of deliverable employment land of 6 hectares in accordance with policy PA6A of the former RSS Revision. This will be achieved through the phased release of allocated sites and the granting of planning permissions on unidentified sites. This forecast is

72 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

aspirational and makes various assumptions not only of the District’s economic development but also continued national economic growth. If growth is slower the forecasts may need to be further revised to reflect a more realistic demand for employment land.

8.1.20 Provision will also be made for new retail, transport, recreational, community and tourism facilities and services to meet the identified needs of settlements. This will be achieved through developer requirements on housing sites, partnership working with service providers and the Council’s Sports and Playing Field Strategies. New retail requirements will be in accordance with the capacity levels identified in the 2006 Retail Study and 2008 Retail Study update to meet identified needs to 2016. A review of the Retail Study will be undertaken prior to 2016 to establish capacity beyond 2016.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Housing Market Assessment; EmploymentLand Study; Retail Capacity Study; Housing Requirements Paper

SS3 - Distribution of Development

Development will be located in accordance with the Spatial Strategy and will be distributed between the towns and rural areas as set out below. In identifying land for new development or in considering planning applications, development shall also be compatible with the settlement hierarchy in terms of the development approaches set out in policies SS5 and SS6 below.

Housing Employment

Leek 30% 30%

Biddulph 20% 20%

Cheadle 22% 20%

Rural Areas 28% 30%

8.1.21 The distribution of development reflects the spatial strategy and will guide the provision of housing and employment for the whole of the plan period. The use of proportional distributions will enable the Council to monitor and manage overall development in each of the towns and the rural areas to ensure that it is realising the spatial strategy and to make adjustments to net requirements in the event of evidence of changes in the housing market or as a result of any changes to the overall requirements for the District arising from any future review of housing requirements or development rates.

8.1.22 The apportionment of housing between areas is based on the proposed development approach and the spatial strategy and on the findings of the Development Capacity Study which support the bulk of provision in the towns but also ensuring there is adequate provision in the rural areas to support local communities. The apportionment of the employment is based on achieving a balanced provision to support future workforce needs.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 73 Adopted Core Strategy

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Housing Market Assessment; EmploymentLand Study; Development Capacity Study

SS4 - Managing the Release of Housing Land

The release of land for housing across the District will be managed in order to deliver the level and distribution of development set out in policies SS2 and SS3. The adequacy of supply will be assessed and monitored through the Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment (SHLAA) and the Annual Monitoring Report. A Housing Implementation Strategy that details the approach to managing delivery of the housing will be set out in a Housing Delivery SPD. Where deemed appropriate, measures will be used to adjust the delivery of housing by bringing forward or holding back development in accordance with the Housing Delivery SPD.

The Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment (SHLAA) and future reviews will identify specific deliverable sites sufficient for 5 years supply of dwellings, and an additional buffer supply of 5% of the 5 year supply. In those time periods when dwelling completions significantly underperform against the 5-year supply, the Council will provide a 20% buffer supply of the five year supply. The SHLAA and future reviews will also identify specific developable sites or broad locations within the 6-10 years and 11-15 years periods that will underpin the Annual Monitoring Report and Housing Trajectory. Housing sites will also be allocated as part of the Site Allocations DPD and the review of the Core Strategy. The Housing Trajectory (Appendix G) shows a significant underperformance in dwelling completions for the years 2011-2012 so that, in accordance with the requirements of the NPPF (para 47) the Council will ensure that a 20% buffer supply will be added to the year 5 requirement to 2016.

Allowance will also be made for an assumed contribution from unidentified (windfall) sites of up to 25% of the annual development rate in urban areas and up to 30% in rural areas. This will be additional to the net housing requirement being sought on allocated sites but will be taken into account in managing the release of land for housing.

There will be a preference for previously developed sites and sites within urban areas before greenfield and edge of urban areas, other than where required to bring forward significant infrastructure needs or as set out in Policy SD1.

In the Green Belt and settlements inset within the Green Belt, levels of new housebuilding will be restricted in the period up to 2016 through the phased release of housing allocations and the limited granting of permissions on unidentified (windfall) sites in order to avoid undermining the renaissance of the North Staffordshire conurbation. Any restraint should be balanced with the need to improve prospects in the Biddulph local regeneration area.

74 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.1.23 The Council has a responsibility to manage the rate of housing development in order to ensure that there is a continuous supply of housing land over the plan period and to ensure that wider strategic objectives are not undermined. This will be achieved by not only managing the overall supply for the District, but also the distribution of development between the towns and the rural areas. Fig 9 below sets out the net housing requirements for the District and its sub-areas based on the distributions set out in policy SS3. The housing requirements will be met from completions since 2006 and current commitments to give a net residual requirement to be met through allocations and small sites.

Fig. 9 Net Housing Requirements

Area Amount Required Completions1 Commitments2 Net Provision Residual

Requirement3

Leek 30% 1800 425 578 797

Biddulph 20% 1200 115 272 813

Cheadle 22% 1320 154 86 1080

Rural 28% 1680 525 227 928

Total 6000 1219 1163 3618

Notes:

1: Comprises of completions between 1/4/06 and 31/3/13

2: Sites with planning permission or under construction as at 31/03/13 net of any losses

2: Net requirement to be found from SHLAA sites and allocations between 1/04/13 and 31/3/26

8.1.24 The allocations in the Site Allocations DPD will be the key to the delivery of the housing requirement but in order to provide flexibility for slippage in allocated sites and shortfalls in provision from allocations, the policy allows for between 25% and 30% of new housing development to also come forward from unidentified (windfall) sites. This accords with the guidance in paragraph 48 of the NPPF that an allowance can be made for additional windfall developments where there is compelling evidence that such sites have consistently become available and will continue to provide a reliable source of supply. This level of windfall development reflects historic levels of development on such sites and expected future trends as evidenced in the SHLAA and is considered important to the delivery of a range and variety of housing sites across the District. The means by which the windfall allowance will be monitored will be set out in the Housing Delivery SPD.

8.1.25 Measures to manage the rate of development will be established within the Housing Delivery SPD and the rate of development will be continually assessed and monitored to advise on the need to take appropriate action to adjust the delivery of housing. This may involve bringing forward sites through the granting of permission for further unidentified sites or it may require holding back development through the refusal of permission on unidentified sites. It may also involve addressing the phasing of allocations.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 75 Adopted Core Strategy

8.1.26 The Council will maintain an up-to-date SHLAA to identify specific deliverable supply of sites to provide 5 years worth of housing against the annualised housing requirements for the relevant period as set out in policy SS2. In addition to deliverable sites with planning permission or under construction and any up-to-date housing allocations, other SHLAA sites which can clearly be shown to be deliverable and which meet current policy considerations will also be included in the 5 year land supply. An additional buffer of either 5% or 20% (moved forward from later in the plan period), as appropriate, will also be provided for in order to provide a realistic prospect of achieving the planned supply and to ensure choice and competition in the market for land.

8.1.27 An Annual Monitoring Report and bi-annual Housing Supply Schedules will be produced which will also contain housing trajectories and assessments of the 5, 10 and 15 year supply of housing against the requirements in Policy SS2. Appendix G sets out the current Housing Trajectory which tracks the provision of housing supply over the lifespan of the LDF (2006-2026). The purpose of the Housing Trajectory is to highlight the robustness and soundness of the overall housing strategy in the Core Strategy and how it is likely to perform in relation to the housing requirements. However, many of the factors influencing the delivery of housing are beyond the control of the local planning authority or the development industry. The role of monitoring will be important in assessing the actual performance in terms of delivery of this and other parts of the development strategy and highlighting ‘trigger points’ for measures to adjust the delivery of housing.

8.1.28 There is a risk that a fragile economy and market conditions could result in the quantities of housing development being below the set targets. In such circumstances, the council will work together with developers and landowners on specific sites, in accordance with the overall strategy, to bring them forward, for example through using the council's own land, using compulsory purchase powers, expediting planning permissions and preparing development briefs. The Site Allocations DPD will be used to ensure that deliverable sites are identified for development. In addition, reviews of the SHLAA will be used to identify additional sites in line with the spatial strategy and to reassess the priority for development of existing sites. In appropriate circumstances public sector funding may be used to facilitate development of sites. The Annual Monitoring Report will assess how serious the implication of this risk is each year and indicate the measures needed to address this.

8.1.29 The need to restrict development in those parts of the District nearest to the North Staffordshire conurbation is important in order to avoid excessive development undermining the renaissance of the conurbation by stimulating further in-migration. This will apply to those areas and settlements washed over by the Green Belt and the following settlements which are inset in the Green Belt: Biddulph, Biddulph Moor, Brown Edge, Endon, Stanley, Bagnall, Cheddleton, Wetley Rocks, Werrington & Cellarhead, Kingsley, Caverswall & Cookshill, Blythe Bridge & Forsbrook. The Council will limit housing development in these areas primarily to that which is required to meet local needs by identifying an appropriate level of allocation and by resisting large scale housing development on unidentified sites. The Housing Delivery SPD will set out how housing development will be controlled in these areas. Biddulph is identified in Policy UR2 of the former RSS as a local regeneration area where local authorities should work with other agencies and partners to develop regeneration strategies to promote urban renaissance. Restraint will therefore be balanced with the need to improve prospects in Biddulph, provided this does not prejudice the need to focus resources within the MUAs. This restriction will be in place only until 2016 to allow progress on urban renaissance in the conurbation to become established and will be reviewed after that time.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

76 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment, Development Capacity Study

Settlement Hierarchy

8.1.30 In order to properly deliver the spatial strategy at a local level it is proposed to establish a hierarchy of settlements reflecting the roles, function and capacity of individual settlements. This hierarchy will ensure that the aims and objectives of the Core Strategy and the proposed development approach are properly met through an appropriate balance of development. It will also provide a spatial context for the co-ordination of the plans, strategies and initiatives of the various service providers and agencies with an interest in the Staffordshire Moorlands. This hierarchy is also broadly in line with the current and former RSS. It should be noted that the designation of a settlement within the hierarchy reflects its planning status only and does not confer any other status as a town or village.

8.1.31 The status of each category of settlement, a list of those settlements included within them and the development principles and levels of development which apply to each category are set out in policies SS5 and SS6. In considering sites for development regard should be had to the hierarchy to ensure that the appropriate scale and type of development is provided in each settlement and other rural areas.

8.1.32 All development will need to be of a scale and nature appropriate to the character and role of each area within its hierarchy. For each town and the rural area categories there is an Area Strategy which sets out the various measures and actions which will be taken to address the needs of those areas. The Area Strategies are key policies which drive forward the LDF and help implement the strategies and plans of other organisations and service providers as well as establishing how settlements are to develop over the plan period.

8.1.33 The hierarchy is as follows (see also figure 10):

Towns – these are the largest settlements comprising of Leek, Biddulph and Cheadle which accommodate half of the Districts population and the majority of the District’s services and facilities. The spatial strategy seeks to focus future growth in these settlements and to strengthen their role as service centres. These settlements will be defined by a Development Boundary within which development of an appropriate scale and nature will be allowed.

Larger Villages – these are the most sustainable settlements in the rural areas which generally have a good local social infrastructure, some local employment opportunities and good accessibility to the towns and larger centres. These villages also have an important role in terms of serving and supporting their immediate surrounding rural areas and smaller villages. The spatial strategy focuses the bulk of the rural development in these settlements and seeks to ensure that they are sustained and promoted as service centres. These settlements will be defined by a Development Boundary within which development of an appropriate scale and nature will be allowed. It is recognised that there is a significant range amongst these villages in terms of their size and facilities and it is proposed therefore that the scale of development in each area should be relative to their current size and infrastructure capacity.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 77 Adopted Core Strategy

Smaller Villages – these villages generally have a poor range of services and facilities and it is often necessary for local residents to travel outside the village for most of their daily needs. Development on a large scale would be unsustainable in these villages, as it is will generate a disproportionate number of additional journeys outside the village and may undermine the spatial strategy. However, it is recognised that there is a need to meet local needs in these settlements for housing and other economic or community purposes. These settlements will be defined by an Infill Boundary within which limited development of an appropriate nature will be allowed.

Other Rural Areas – this comprises of the open countryside and green belt outside of the towns, larger villages and smaller villages where further development is generally inappropriate other than to meet essential local needs and for rural activities. Within these areas there are some groups of houses and hamlets which are not identified as ‘smaller villages’ because their predominantly open character and loose-knit nature makes infilling and the definition of an Infill Development Boundary inappropriate. They also contain major developed areas which may be suitable for appropriate development or redevelopment.

Fig.10 Settlement Hierarchy

78 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

SS5 - Towns

The following are identified as towns:

Leek Biddulph Cheadle

These settlements will accommodate the bulk of the District’s housing, employment and retail needs, distributed as follows:

Town Housing (net Employment Retail (additional convenience completions (additional and comparison goods 2006 - 2026) employment land floorspace). 2006 – 2026)

Leek 1800 7.2 hectares 3,000m2convenience

12,000 m2comparison

(of which 50% is for bulky goods retailing)

Biddulph 1200 4.8 hectares AAP Proposals

Cheadle 1320 4.8 hectares 2,500m2 convenience

6,000 m2 comparison

(of which 50% is for bulky goods retailing)

The Site Allocations DPD will define the urban areas of these settlements by a Development Boundary and will allocate sites for development in accordance with the strategy for those towns sufficient to ensure that the requirements set out above can be met.

To encourage best use of land in the urban area, this development will be managed by phasing through the Site Allocations DPD to ensure that priority is given to bringing forward development on previously developed sites and other sites delivering significant infrastructure provision.

8.1.34 The 3 towns of Leek, Biddulph and Cheadle are the largest settlements in the District accommodating 50% of the Districts population and the majority of the District’s services and facilities. The spatial strategy seeks to focus future growth in these settlements and to strengthen their role as significant service centres.

8.1.35 The housing and employment requirements are based on the distributions set out in policy SS3 which reflect the spatial strategy and local needs. The housing requirements will be met from completions since 2006, current commitments and new allocations. The

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 79 Adopted Core Strategy

employment requirements are capable of being met from existing commitments or extensions to existing employment areas. The retail requirements are based on the capacity figures identified in the Retail Study (updated in 2008) and are indicative only of the amount of floorspace currently required in order to address identified quantitative and qualitative deficiencies in retail floorspace in Leek and Cheadle. They will be met through new allocations informed by Masterplans. The Retail Study also concludes that the proposed allocation of new comparison retail floorspace within Leek is compliant with former RSS policy PA12B and will not materially impact on the delivery of the major redevelopment scheme in Hanley City Centre (Stoke-on-Trent) or any other centre within the sub-regional retail hierarchy. The figures for housing and employment are targets for the whole plan period and will be monitored through the Annual Monitoring Report and monitoring schedules to assess performance and the need for management measures. It will be necessary to reassess the employment and retail requirements prior to the end of their respective plan period through a review of the Employment Land Study and the Retail Study to determine needs beyond their respective plan periods. The affordable housing targets are based on estimates of what could realistically be delivered on allocated sites and from other sources.

8.1.36 The policy allows for development or redevelopment of land to come forward within Development Boundaries which is appropriate to the needs, capacity and character of each settlement in a phased manner. There will necessarily need to be an element of flexibility in the phasing of site releases over the lifetime of the Core Strategy to ensure that a continuous housing supply is available at all times. However, the onus will be on applicants to demonstrate to the Council’s satisfaction that there is a good reason to depart from the phasing approach to be set out in the Site Allocations DPD.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Housing Market Assessment; Employment Land Study; Retail Capacity Study; PPG17 Audit; Development Capacity Study

Area Strategies

8.1.37 The following policies set out the specific area strategies for each town and for the larger villages, smaller villages and other rural areas. They set out what we would like to achieve in each of them. The area strategies do not provide a definitive list of the proposals and projects for each area, rather they set out the actions needed to achieve the vision, deliver the spatial strategy and achieve the objective of creating sustainable, self-supporting communities in each distinct area of the District. The delivery of these proposals will not necessarily be the responsibility of the Council. Other groups and organisations may be responsible for their delivery. Many will also depend on securing sufficient resources and the support of landowners.

SS5a - Leek Area Strategy

The Council and its partners will seek to consolidate the role of Leek as the principal service centre and a market town and support its regeneration. This will be achieved through the following actions:

1. Continue to meet the housing and community needs of Leek and its rural hinterland by:

80 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

increasing the range of available and affordable house types, especially for first time buyers and older people; allocating a range of deliverable housing sites both within the urban area and, on land adjacent to the urban area. Sites within the urban area shall be in locations across the town which have good accessibility to services and facilities with encouragement being given to previously developed (brownfield) sites. Sites on land adjacent to the urban area shall be in locations which relate well to the urban area, can be assimilated into the landscape, and would help secure infrastructure improvements for the benefit of that part of the town. Sites for new housing development will be identified and phased through the Site Allocations DPD within the following broad locations and in the following priority order depending on the need for sites to be brought forward:

Within the urban area Small urban extensions

protecting, increasing and improving the provision and accessibility of open space, sport and recreational facilities, including the provision of a Sports Village. Specific areas will be identified through the PPG17 Audit and the Sports and Physical Activity Strategy; increasing and improving the provision of educational, health and community facilities and enabling further shared use of facilities. Specific facilities and needs will be identified through the Plans and Strategies of relevant service providers; promoting measures to encourage walking and cycling.

2. Create employment growth and increase the diversity of employment opportunities to meet existing and future needs by:

supporting the retention and growth of Britannia Building Society and other existing businesses within the town; providing opportunities for new enterprises and businesses by allocating employment sites with good access to the A520 and A53. Sites for new employment development will be identified and phased through the Site Allocations DPD within the following broad locations and in the following priority order depending on the need for sites to be brought forward:

Within the urban area Churnet Works Cornhill (EM1) Leekbrook Industrial Estate (EM2)

providing facilities and sites for new start-up businesses and expanding the service sector, in particular small B1(a) and B1(b) uses, knowledge-based and creative industries; improving the provision of prime office space and commercial premises in and around the town centre; encouraging mixed use development on larger redevelopment sites, particularly within or near to the more accessible town centre locations, on former employment premises, and in mill buildings within the town centre;

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 81 Adopted Core Strategy

improving and intensifying the use of existing employment areas at Barnfields and Leekbrook; Improving accessibility to employment areas, particularly from areas of local deprivation and need.

3. Strengthen the role of Leek as a principal service and retailing centre for the District by:

the sensitive redevelopment and expansion of the town centre to increase the quantity and quality of the retail offer, improve linkages between areas and establish new development opportunities in accordance with Policy TCR1. This will be identified through a Town Centre Masterplan; consolidating the main retail core and the market area and protecting and enhancing its distinctiveness, vitality and viability; enabling the provision of additional bulky goods retailing in accordance with Policy TCR2; supporting improvements to the range and diversity of educational, health, cultural and community services and facilities in the town, including the provision of a new community arts and cultural facility and campus improvements at Leek College; improving accessibility to the town’s major retail, service and employment areas, particularly by public transport, from the rest of the District; managing car parking to support the role of Leek as a destination for shopping, employment, entertainment and tourism without leading to congestion of the town centre, including consideration of the need to provide a new multi-storey car park.

4. Promote Leek’s special character and heritage and strengthen its role as a visitor destination by:

conserving and enhancing buildings, sites and areas of heritage and cultural importance, complemented by new distinctive, sensitively designed, high quality, sustainable buildings; promoting environmental enhancements in and on the edges of the town centre, establishing the Market as a central feature, creating strong, high quality ‘gateways’ into the centre and improving signposting; increasing tourist opportunities for visitors through additional high quality accommodation, promoting links with the Peak District and the development of new tourist attractions linked to the Churnet Valley (see policy SS7); improving and creating pedestrian and cycle links in the town and in particular between the town centre and Brough Park, Westwood College, Leek High School and Churnet View Middle School; protecting and improving the setting and historic character of the town and increasing access into the countryside by foot, cycling and horse riding.

5. Create major regeneration mixed use opportunities and related infrastructure improvements for the following strategic site:

Cornhill, Leek – uses which may be suitable are employment, tourism and leisure; any development shall make provision for a link between the A520 and A53 to the south of the town and links to the canal and Churnet Valley railway.

82 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

The detailed uses and infrastructure requirements for these sites will be identified through the Site Allocations DPD. Masterplans will also be produced to guide the detailed planning of these areas. High quality design will be expected for these visually sensitive sites in line with the requirements set out in Policy DC1 and the Council’s Design SPD.

8.1.38 Leek is the largest settlement in the District with an already well established range of facilities and services serving the whole of the District. Despite this the town has lacked opportunities for retail and economic growth and has not fully developed its tourism and cultural potential. The proposed strategy for Leek seeks to strengthen the role of Leek as the principal town in the District by addressing a number of specific challenges which have been identified through consultation, the evidence base and the strategies and plans of other agencies and organisations.

8.1.39 The Site Allocations DPD will review and define the precise extent of the town development boundary which will be shown on the Proposals Map to accommodate, where appropriate, peripheral expansion and also to protect the surrounding countryside and green belt from further encroachment.

8.1.40 In order to deliver the housing requirements for Leek set out in Policy SS5 it is estimated that there will need to be a minimum of 797 additional dwellings provided on new allocated sites. Although initial development proposals should be focused on the existing urban area, the Council recognises that it needs to provide a range of opportunities to enable the market to respond to the targets set for the town and to address key infrastructure and regeneration needs. In practical terms, this means providing for different types of housing development in a variety of locations including greenfield development on the edge of the urban areas. The broad locations for such development have been identified through the Sustainability Appraisal report as being the most sustainable location or which will help facilitate the provision of key infrastructure projects and it is in these locations that allocations could be considered. Their locations are shown on the Inset Maps.

8.1.41 Employment provision will be met through the expansion of existing employment areas to the south of the town which have good access to the road network. This is considered to be the most sustainable location for employment development and will minimise the impact of development on the countryside and residential areas. The total capacity of the preferred broad locations for employment provision totals 11.7 hectares which exceeds the requirement for Leek. However, this will provide additional capacity for growth beyond 2026.

8.1.42 The allocation of housing and employment sites will take place in the Site Allocations DPD. Allocations will be phased to take account of the objectives referred to above. These will also take into account the availability of sites and their specific constraints as well as the likely construction rates that may be achieved. The bulk of housing development will take place in the urban area on a mixture of brownfield and greenfield sites distributed around the town including infill development, redevelopment and conversions. In identifying sites preference will be given to brownfield sites particularly sites within or near to the town centre or redevelopment sites. After deducting past completions since 2006 and current commitments, there is an estimated need for 797 dwellings on new sites. The total estimated capacity on sites which could accommodate 10 or more dwellings within the urban area is around 500 dwellings, but this may vary as a result of more detailed assessment of sites as part of the Site Allocations DPD. Additionally, evidence from the SHLAA suggests that a further 100 dwellings could come forward on smaller sites which can accommodate less than 10 dwellings.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 83 Adopted Core Strategy

8.1.43 The need to release land adjacent to the urban area will be assessed against the release and likely release of land within the urban area. With a 10% allowance for slippage on constrained sites (80 dwellings), it is estimated that there would be a need for around an additional 277 dwellings to be identified on other sites. In order to provide flexibility to ensure the requirements for Leek are able to be met and provide a more sustainable mix of housing sites, it is considered that, rather than identifying specific broad locations to accommodate this need, there should be an allowance for small urban extensions to come forward, if required to supplement the provision in the urban areas. These would not be identified in the Core Strategy, but would come forward through the Site Allocations DPD and be capable of providing up to around 300 dwellings in total. The total actual provision from past completions, current commitments, allocations and small sites after deducting an allowance for slippage would be 1823 dwellings for Leek (see figure 11).

Fig. 11 Anticipated Housing Provision for Leek

TOTAL REQUIREMENT 1800

Completions since 2006 425

Current Commitments 578

New allocations – Within the urban area 500

New allocations – Small urban extensions 300

Small sites allowance 100

TOTAL POTENTIAL PROVISION 1903

Slippage Allowance -80

TOTAL ACTUAL PROVISION 1823

Over/under provision +23

8.1.44 The identification of sites and proposals for improved or new recreational and sports facilities and for additional or improved educational and health facilities and services will emerge from the PPG17 Audit and through discussions with service providers. Where new sites or facilities are required they will be identified in the Site Allocations DPD. The identification of new retail and commercial sites in and on the edge of the town centre will be through the Town Centre Masterplan which is currently underway. Where appropriate sites are identified they will be subsequently allocated in the Site Allocations DPD.

8.1.45 The policy also identifies the Cornhill area of Leek as a major regeneration opportunity which is strategically important and has been recognised as a Council objective for a number of years. The site is owned by the District Council and is well related to existing employment uses as well as potential tourism facilities to the south. A significant related requirement is the provision of an east-west link road between the A520 Cheddleton Road and the Barnfield Industrial estate, to allow easier access across the southern side of the town, and to relieve pressure on Junction Road. The County Council has begun investigating the costs and feasibility of a link road.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Housing Market Assessment; Employment Land Study; Retail Capacity Study; PPG17 Audit; Development Capacity Study; Strategic Flood Risk

84 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Assessment; Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment; Landscape and Settlement Character Study; Historic Environment Character Assessment

SS5b - Biddulph Area Strategy

The Council and its partners will seek to enhance the role of Biddulph as a significant service centre and a market town and support its regeneration. This will be achieved through the following actions:

1. Improve the local housing market and range of community facilities by:

increasing the range of available and affordable house types, especially for first time buyers, families and older people, including extra care housing; allocating a range of deliverable housing sites both within the urban area and, on land adjacent to the urban area. Sites within the urban area shall be in locations across the town which have good accessibility to services and facilities with encouragement being given to previously developed (brownfield) sites. Sites on land adjacent to the urban area shall be in locations which relate well to the urban area, can be assimilated into the landscape, and would help secure infrastructure improvements for the benefit of that part of the town. Sites for new housing development will be identified and phased through the Site Allocations DPD within the following broad locations and in the following priority order depending on the need for sites to be brought forward:

Within the urban area Extension to the urban area to the west of the Bypass (Area 4) Small urban extensions in the Green Belt which will be identified as part of a comprehensive review of the green belt boundary around Biddulph through the Site Allocations DPD and the review of the Core Strategy.

improving the housing stock in Biddulph East through selective redevelopment and broader regeneration measures including the need to improve all unimproved Schindler properties; protecting, increasing and improving the provision and accessibility of open space, sport and recreational facilities, including the provision of a Sports Village. Specific areas will be identified through the PPG17 Audit and the Sports and Physical Activity Strategy; increasing the provision of educational, health and community facilities to include the provision of a Primary Care Centre. Specific facilities and needs will be identified through the Plans and Strategies of relevant service providers.

2. Create employment growth and increase the diversity of employment opportunities to meet existing and future needs by:

supporting the retention and growth of existing businesses within the town; providing opportunities for new enterprises and businesses by promoting further development at the Victoria Business Park (EM1) and within the urban area; providing facilities and sites for new start-up businesses;

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 85 Adopted Core Strategy

encouraging mixed use development on former employment premises and in mill buildings within the town centre; Improving accessibility to employment areas, particularly from areas of local deprivation and need.

3. Strengthen the role of Biddulph as a significant service and retailing centre for the District by:

implementation of the BiddulphTown Centre Area Action Plan; improving public transport connections to the town centre

4. Improve the image and identity of Biddulph and strengthen its role as a visitor destination by:

regenerating and improving the streetscape of the town centre through implementation of the Biddulph Town Centre Area Action Plan; upgrading the general environment of the town through landscaping and the improvement and creation of green spaces; strengthening and promoting links between the town and countryside in particular with the Biddulph Valley Way, Biddulph Grange Garden and the Country Parks; improving the main approaches to the town from the south; protecting and enhancing the setting and historic character of the town.

8.1.46 Biddulph is the second largest settlement in the District but has suffered from economic decline and a poor image and has the most deprived areas in Staffordshire Moorlands. The Biddulph East ward was within the former North Staffordshire Housing Market Pathfinder established to address housing market failure, obsolescent housing stock and mismatch between housing supply and demand. More recently the issue of town centre decline has been addressed in the Biddulph Town Centre Area Action Plan. The proposed strategy for Biddulph seeks to further enhance its role as a significant service centre and a market town by addressing a number of specific social, economic and environmental challenges which have been identified through consultation, the evidence base and the strategies and plans of other agencies and organisations.

8.1.47 The Site Allocations DPD will review and define the precise extent of the town development boundary which will be shown on the Proposals Map. Due to the extent of green belt around the town, opportunities for peripheral expansion are limited and the bulk of development will need to be accommodated within the existing established development boundary although this should not be at the expense of essential open space or design quality. In order to meet the longer term needs of the town, some development will however still be required in the green belt. The allocation of small urban extension sites will require a comprehensive review of the green belt boundary around Biddulph to accommodate them. This review will be undertaken as part of the Site Allocations DPD which is to be rolled into a single Local Plan with an early review of the Core Strategy.

8.1.48 The Spatial Strategy seeks to restrict levels of new housing development in order to prevent the regeneration of the North Staffordshire conurbation being undermined, and to improve the housing market within the town. In order to deliver the housing requirements for Biddulph set out in Policy SS5 it is estimated that after deducting past completions since 2006 and current commitments, there will need to be a minimum of 813 additional dwellings provided on new allocated sites. Evidence from the District Council’s Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment (SHLAA) shows that much of this new housing development could be accommodated within the existing development boundary where there are

86 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

opportunities for redevelopment. Much of the capacity in the urban area has already been met on the recently committed Uplands Mill site (200 dwellings). The total capacity on sites which could accommodate 10 or more dwellings within the urban area is estimated at around 300 dwellings, but this may vary as a result of more detailed assessment of sites as part of the Site Allocations DPD. Additionally, evidence from the SHLAA suggests that around a further 100 dwellings on smaller sites could come forward during the plan period.

8.1.49 In order to meet the requirements for Biddulph, land is also proposed for a new community development on the edge of the urban area to the west of the bypass (around 280 houses on greenfield land – excluding the existing playing fields). With a 10% allowance for slippage on constrained sites (81 dwellings), this would leave a need for around an additional 200 dwellings to be identified on other urban extension sites. These would have to be in the green belt given the lack of other non-green belt sites and will require minor changes to the boundaries of the green belt which will be reviewed as part of the Site Allocations DPD and the review of the Core Strategy. As with Leek, in order to provide flexibility to ensure the requirements for Biddulph are able to be met and provide a more sustainable mix of housing sites, it is considered that, rather than identifying any additional broad locations, there should be an allowance for small urban extensions to come forward, if required to supplement the provision in the urban areas and area 4. These would not be identified in the Core Strategy, but would come forward through the Site Allocations DPD and be capable of providing up to around 200 dwellings in total. The total actual provision from past completions, current commitments, allocations and small sites after deducting an allowance for slippage would be 1186 dwellings for Biddulph (see figure 12).

Fig. 12 Anticipated Housing Provision for Biddulph

TOTAL REQUIREMENT 1200

Completions since 2006 115

Current Commitments 272

New allocations – Within the urban area 300

New allocations – West of Bypass (Area 4) 280

New allocations - Small urban Extensions in the Green Belt 200

Small sites allowance 100

TOTAL POTENTIAL PROVISION 1267

Slippage allowance -81

TOTAL ACTUAL PROVISION 1186

Over/under provision -14

8.1.50 Employment provision will be able to be met through the continued development of the VictoriaBusinessPark as this is considered to be the most sustainable location for employment development which is well served by existing infrastructure. The total remaining capacity of this site is approximately 8 hectares which exceeds the requirement for Biddulph. However, this will provide additional capacity for growth beyond 2026.

8.1.51 The allocation of sites within and on the edge of the urban area will take place in the Site Allocations DPD. Allocations will be phased to take account of the objectives referred to above. These will also take into account the availability of sites and their specific constraints as well as the likely construction rates that may be achieved. In Biddulph East, an area of system-built and poor quality housing, there is also scope to explore other private and public partnerships that will have the potential to improve housing quality and choice through

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 87 Adopted Core Strategy

renovation and new build. The identification of sites and proposals for improved or new recreational and sports facilities and for additional or improved educational and health facilities and services will emerge from current studies being undertaken and through discussions with service providers. Where new sites or facilities are required they will be identified in the Site Allocations DPD.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Local policy guidance - Biddulph Town Centre AAP Evidence - Strategic Housing Market Assessment; Employment Land Study; Retail Capacity Study; PPG17 Audit; Development Capacity Study; Strategic Flood Risk Assessment; Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment; Landscape and Settlement Character Assessment; Historic Environment Character Assessment

88 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

SS5c - Cheadle Area Strategy

The Council and its partners will seek to expand the role of Cheadle as a significant service centre and a market town. This will be achieved through the following actions:

1. Expand the housing market area and community provision by:

increasing the range of available and affordable house types and higher market housing, especially for first time buyers and families; allocating a range of deliverable housing sites both within the urban area and, on land adjacent to the urban area. Sites within the urban area shall be in locations across the town which have good accessibility to services and facilities with encouragement being given to previously developed (brownfield) sites. Sites on land adjacent to the urban area shall be in locations which relate well to the urban area, can be assimilated into the landscape, and would help secure infrastructure improvements for the benefit of that part of the town. Sites for new housing development will be identified and phased through the Site Allocations DPD within the following broad locations and in the following priority order depending on the need for sites to be brought forward:

Within the urban area Extension to the urban area to the north (Area 1) Small urban extensions

The Council will assess the need for other broad locations to meet the longer term needs of Cheadle and identify suitable areas, if required, through the review of the Core Strategy.

protecting, increasing and improving the provision and accessibility of open space, sport and recreational facilities, including the provision of a Sports Village. Specific areas will be identified through the PPG17 Audit and the Sports and Physical Activity Strategy; providing additional educational, health and community facilities, including, if required, the provision of a recreation area for younger people to serve Cheadle West and a new primary school to serve east/north Cheadle. Other specific facilities and needs will be identified through the Plans and Strategies of relevant service providers.

2. Create employment growth and increase the diversity of employment opportunities to meet existing and future needs by:

supporting the retention and growth of JCB and other existing businesses within the town; providing improved access to JCB and existing employment sites; providing opportunities for new enterprises and businesses by allocating new employment sites with good access to the A521 and A522. Sites for new employment development will be identified and phased through the Site Allocations DPD within the following broad locations and in the following priority order depending on the need for sites to be brought forward:

Within the urban area

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 89 Adopted Core Strategy

New Haden/Brookhouses Industrial Estate (EM1) Draycott Cross Road (EM2)

providing facilities and sites for new start-up businesses; improving and intensifying the use of existing employment areas at New Haden/Brookhouses.

3. Expand the role of Cheadle as a significant service and retailing centre for the District by:

the sensitive redevelopment and expansion of the town centre to increase the quantity and quality of the retail offer and establish new development opportunities including provision of a major new supermarket. This will be identified through a Town Centre Masterplan; expanding the main retail core and protecting and enhancing its vitality and viability; enabling the provision of additional bulky goods retailing in accordance with Policy SS5; regenerating and improving the streetscape of the town centre and creating more public realm; expanding the range and diversity of educational, health, sport, cultural and community services and facilities in the town;

4. Improve environmental quality and accessibility by:

reducing levels of through traffic in the town centre and along the A521 and A522; promoting the longer term provision of a bypass to the west of the town; improving pedestrian and cycle links across the town and into the countryside; improving public transport links between the town and other main settlements; managing and improving the green corridor to the east of the town; promoting the role and historic character of the town and its links with the Churnet Valley as a visitor destination.

8.1.52 Cheadle is the smallest of the District’s market towns and has suffered from under-investment in its infrastructure and town centre and a lack of housing opportunities. The Spatial Strategy identifies the town as an area for significant growth in order to expand its role as a service centre and market town. The proposed strategy for Cheadle therefore seeks to achieve this through a range of actions and measures as well as addressing a number of specific challenges which have been identified through consultation, the evidence base and the strategies and plans of other agencies and organisations.

8.1.53 One of the most significant challenges is identifying the need and viability of a bypass to relieve through traffic in the town and provide improved access to existing and planned housing and employment areas. Whilst some junction improvements have been implemented, there remains a strong need to investigate and identify other potential solutions to improve traffic flows through the town particularly in the light of the growth aspirations for the town. A Transportation Study will therefore be required to investigate the need and viability of a bypass and/or other traffic management solutions, including a link from the A50 at Blythe Bridge to Cheadle, the implications for surrounding villages and the wider area and the scope for funding from proposed developments. This will be undertaken as part of the review of the Core Strategy.

90 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.1.54 A further significant challenge is the need for more community facilities to serve a growing population. In this respect, a potential need has been identified in the Open Spaces Audit for the provision of a recreational area for younger people to serve Cheadle West and by the County Council for a new primary school to serve the north and east of the town, if demand arises. It is anticipated that developer contributions from planned new development in these areas will support their provision. Sites for these facilities, if required, will be identified in these areas through the Site Allocations DPD.

8.1.55 In order to deliver the housing requirements for Cheadle set out in Policy SS5 it is estimated that after deducting past completions since 2006 and current commitments, there will need to be a minimum of 1080 additional dwellings provided on new sites. Some of this development will take place in the urban area on a mixture of brownfield and greenfield sites distributed around the town including infill development, redevelopment and conversions. In identifying sites encouragement will be given to the use of brownfield sites particularly sites within or near to the town centre or redevelopment sites. The total estimated capacity on sites which could accommodate 10 or more dwellings within the urban area is 400 dwellings, but this may vary as a result of more detailed assessment of sites as part of the Site Allocations DPD. Additionally, evidence from the SHLAA suggests that a further 100 dwellings could come forward on smaller sites which can accommodate less than 10 dwellings. With a 10% allowance for slippage on constrained sites (108 dwellings), this would leave a need for around an additional 688 dwellings to be identified on urban extension sites. It is anticipated that land north of Cheadle could accommodate up to 240 dwellings. The Site Allocations DPD will identify the extent and scale of specific sites within thIs broad location, the release if which will be assessed against the release and likely release of land within the urban area. In order to provide flexibility to ensure the requirements for Cheadle are able to be met and provide a more sustainable mix of housing sites, it is considered that, rather than identifying any further broad locations, there should be an additional allowance for small urban extensions to come forward, if required to supplement the provision in the urban areas and area 1. These would not be identified in the Core Strategy, but would come forward through the Site Allocations DPD and be capable of providing up to around 250 dwellings in total. In order to meet the housing requirements for Cheadle there will also be an additional growth allowance of 160 dwellings - this will come forward through the Site Allocations DPD. The total actual provision from past completions, current commitments, allocations, growth allowance and small sites after deducting an allowance for slippage would be 1282 dwellings for Cheadle (see figure 13).

Fig. 13 Anticipated Housing Provision for Cheadle

TOTAL REQUIREMENT 1320

Completions since 2006 154

Current Commitments 86

New allocations – Within the urban area 400

New allocations – North of Cheadle (Area 1) 240

New allocations – Small urban extensions 250

Small sites allowance 100

Additional growth allowance 160

TOTAL POTENTIAL PROVISION 1390

Slippage allowance -108

TOTAL ACTUAL PROVISION 1282

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 91 Adopted Core Strategy

Over/under provision -38

8.1.56 Employment provision will be met through the expansion of existing employment areas to the south of the town. This is considered to be the most sustainable location for employment development and will minimise the impact of development on the countryside and existing residential areas. The total capacity of the preferred broad locations for employment provision totals 7.6 hectares which exceeds the requirement for Cheadle. However, this will provide additional capacity for growth beyond 2026.

8.1.57 The Site Allocations DPD will review and define the precise extent of the boundary of the urban area which will be shown on the Proposals Map to accommodate, where appropriate, peripheral expansion and also to protect the surrounding countryside and green belt from further encroachment. The allocation of sites will also take place in the Site Allocations DPD. Allocations will be phased to take account of the objectives referred to above. These will also take into account the availability of sites and their specific constraints as well as the likely construction rates that may be achieved.

8.1.58 The identification of sites and proposals for improved or new recreational and sports facilities and for additional or improved educational and health facilities and services will emerge from current studies being undertaken and through discussions with service providers. Where new sites or facilities are required they will be identified in the Site Allocations DPD. The identification of new retail and commercial sites in and on the edge of the town centre will be through the Town Centre Masterplan which has been completed. Where appropriate sites are identified they will be subsequently allocated in the Site Allocations DPD.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Housing Market Assessment; Employment Land Study; Retail Capacity Study; PPG17 Audit; Development Capacity Study; Strategic Flood Risk Assessment; Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment; Landscape and Settlement Character Assessment; Historic Environment Character Assessment

SS6 - Rural Areas

The rural areas comprise of the following development categories:

Larger villages Smaller villages Other rural areas

In total these will provide for around 1680 new dwellings and 7.2 hectares of employment land between 2006 and 2026 in accordance with the Area Strategies set out in policies SS6a – SS6c below.

The Site Allocations DPD will define the urban areas of larger villages by a Development Boundary and will allocate sites for development sufficient to ensure that the requirements set out above can be met. In the smaller villages an Infill Boundary will be defined within which limited infill development will be permitted.

92 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.1.59 The rural areas outside of the Peak District make up over two-thirds of the plan area in terms of land coverage and contain nearly half of the plan area’s population. The majority of this area is undeveloped countryside which is of high landscape quality and has poor accessibility. However, the rural areas also includes a diverse mixture of large and small villages, hamlets and scattered development as well as some major developed areas. In order to ensure that development in the rural areas reflects the spatial strategy this policy establishes the different development categories and the overall level of housing and employment development which will be provided.

8.1.60 The housing and employment requirements are based on the distributions set out in policy SS3. The housing requirements will be met from completions since 2006 and current commitments to give a net residual requirement of 841 dwellings to be met through allocations and small sites (see fig. 9). The affordable housing target is based on estimates of what could realistically be delivered on sites to be allocated. The employment land is necessary to provide sufficient local employment opportunities in the villages and also to enhance and diversify employment provision at existing established employment sites in the rural areas in support of objective SO3.

8.1.61 The categorisation of each village has been based on their population, services, facilities and capacity for development. Appendix J summarises the assessment of each village with regard to their population, services and facilities. When the Core Strategy is reviewed, the District Council will re-assess the categorisation of villages.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Housing Market Assessment; Employment Land Study; Retail Capacity Study; PPG17 Audit; Development Capacity Study

SS6a - Larger Villages Area Strategy

The following are identified as larger villages:

Alton Biddulph Moor Blythe Bridge & Forsbrook Brown Edge Cheddleton Endon Ipstones Kingsley Upper Tean Waterhouses Werrington & Cellarhead Wetley Rocks

These settlements shall retain and enhance their role as rural service centres, providing for the bulk of the local housing needs of the rural areas and also for limited employment needs of a scale and type appropriate to each settlement

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 93 Adopted Core Strategy

having regard to local needs (including those of its local market), infrastructure capacity and character. The Council and its partners will achieve this through the following actions:

1. Retain and enhance their role as rural service centres by:

enabling appropriate development which supports and increases the range and quality of services and facilities available to the rural areas; protecting services and facilities which are essential to sustain rural living; improving connections by public transport to surrounding smaller villages and market towns

2. Meet local housing needs by:

increasing the range of available and affordable house types, especially for first time buyers and families; allocating a range of deliverable housing sites primarily within the built-up area in locations across the village with good accessibility to services and facilities. Where development is required to be met on land outside the built-up area this will be only of a small scale and on sites which relate well to the built-up area, can be assimilated into the landscape and have good access. allowing for rural exceptions housing in appropriate locations on the edge of settlements (in accordance with policy H2). This will be additional to the housing provision for the rural areas.

3. Meet limited employment needs by:

enabling small-scale new employment development; improving and intensifying the use of existing employment areas and, where appropriate, expanding them.

4. Ensure that new development reflects and enhances each village’s special character and heritage by:

giving priority to the reuse and regeneration of existing redundant, underused or surplus sites and premises for new development; restricting the scale of new development; supporting the use of Parish Plans and Village Design Statements to guide future development; protecting and enhancing the setting of individual settlements.

8.1.62 The larger villages have an important role in terms of serving and supporting their immediate surrounding rural areas and smaller villages. It is important therefore that they are sustained and promoted as service centres. A major issue in such settlements is balancing the need to retain local facilities and accommodate housing and other needs with maintaining their character and avoiding over-development. The proposed strategy for the larger villages seeks to sensitively retain and enhance their role as service centres by addressing a number of specific social, economic and environmental challenges which have been identified through consultation, the evidence base and the strategies and plans of other agencies and organisations.

94 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.1.63 The policy allows for development or redevelopment of land to come forward which is appropriate to the needs, capacity and character of each settlement. The amount and nature of development will be dependent on the development capacity of individual settlements and the availability of suitable sites. In some settlements the scale of development may therefore be limited. The Site Allocations DPD will define the extent of development in these settlements by a Development Boundary which will be shown on the Proposals Map. Village Action Plans will play an important role in identifying priorities for projects and initiatives.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Housing Market Assessment; Employment Land Study; PPG17 Audit; Development Capacity Study; Strategic Flood Risk Assessment; Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment; Landscape and Settlement Character Assessment; Historic Environment Character Assessment

SS6b - Smaller Villages Area Strategy

The following are identified as smaller villages:

Bagnall Blackshaw Moor Boundary Bradnop Caverswall Checkley Consall Cookshill Cotton Dilhorne Draycott Foxt Froghall Heaton Hollington Hulme Kingsley Holt Leekbrook Longsdon Lower Tean Meerbrook Oakamoor Rudyard Rushton Spencer Stanley Stockton Brook Swinscoe Whiston Winkhill

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 95 Adopted Core Strategy

These settlements shall provide only for appropriate development which enhances community vitality or meets a local social or economic need of the settlement and its hinterland. The Council and its partners will achieve this through the following actions:

1. Enhance community vitality by:

protecting and enabling services and facilities which are essential to sustain rural living; improving connections by public transport and other transport measures to neighbouring larger villages and market towns; supporting the provision of local, mobile and electronic services which increases the range and quality of services.

2. Meet local community, social or economic need by:

Enabling new housing development which meets a local need, including affordable housing (in accordance with policy H2); Allowing for rural exceptions housing in appropriate locations on the edge of settlements (in accordance with policy H2). This will be additional to the housing provision for the rural areas. Enabling small-scale new employment development including ‘live-work’ developments which are for a rural enterprise or an existing authorised business use; Supporting the diversification of existing farm enterprises (in accordance with policy R1); Supporting the development of appropriate ICT and new means of communications to enable homeworking and small businesses reliant on e-technology.

8.1.64 The smaller villages have a more limited role as service centres, but they are vital to the rural areas particularly in terms of providing for local housing and rural employment needs. A major issue for smaller villages is the loss of local population through lack of housing opportunities. The proposed strategy for the smaller villages therefore seeks to allow an appropriate level of sensitive development which enhances community vitality or meets a local social or economic need of the settlement and its hinterland.

8.1.65 Development on a large scale would be unsustainable in these villages, as it is will generate a disproportionate number of additional journeys outside the village and may undermine the spatial strategy. However, it is recognised that there is a need to meet local needs in these settlements. This will be strictly controlled, both in terms of its scale and type, in order to ensure that the character and life of the settlement is not undermined. Housing in particular will be required to meet a local need in terms of their size, type and tenure. This may include both open market housing and affordable housing.

8.1.66 These settlements will continue to be subject to Green Belt or countryside policies but in addition some limited infilling and redevelopment is considered acceptable. In order to guide development an Infill Development Boundary will be defined around these settlements within which appropriate development will be allowed. These boundaries will be more tightly drawn then Development Boundaries to accommodate infilling or redevelopment but to restrict peripheral expansion.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

96 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Housing Market Assessment; Employment Land Study; Development Capacity Study;Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment; Landscape and Settlement Character Assessment

SS6c - Other Rural Areas Area Strategy

The other rural areas comprise the countryside and the green belt outside of the development and infill boundaries of the towns and villages, as defined in the Site Allocations DPD, including those small settlements and dispersed developments not identified in Policies SS5, SS6a and SS6b.

These areas will provide only for development which meets an essential local need, supports the rural diversification and sustainability of the rural areas, promotes sustainable tourism or enhances the countryside. The Council and its partners will achieve this through the following actions:

1. Meet essential local needs by:

Restricting new build housing development in the countryside to that which is essential to local needs, including affordable housing (in accordance with policies H2, H3 and R2); Allowing the conversion, extension or replacement of an existing rural building in accordance with policies R1 and R2; Allowing suitable development which would secure the future conservation of a heritage asset in accordance with policy DC2; Allowing rural exceptions housing (in accordance with policies H2 and R2) Allowing community facilities which meet a local need, where that need cannot be met in a settlement within the hierarchy. In such cases the development should be in a sustainable location close to an existing serviced settlement.

2. Sustain the rural economy by:

Enabling the limited expansion or redevelopment of an existing authorised business for employment uses; Supporting the diversification of existing farm enterprises (in accordance with policy R1); Supporting the development of appropriate ICT and new means of communications to enable homeworking and small businesses reliant one-technology;

3. Enhance and conserve the quality of the countryside by:

Giving priority to the need to protect the quality and character of the area and requiring all development proposals to respect and respond sensitively to the distinctive qualities of the surrounding landscape; Limiting uses which generate a substantial number of regular trips in areas that are not well served by public transport; Ensuring renewable energy schemes are of an appropriate scale, type and location;

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 97 Adopted Core Strategy

Recognising and conserving the special quality of the landscape in the PeakDistrictNational Park (in accordance with Policy DC3); Encouraging measures which protect and enhance the biodiversity, geological resources and heritage of the District.

4. Regenerate underused major developed areas in the countryside by:

Identifying major developed areas through the Site Allocations DPD at:

Bolton Copperworks, Froghall – uses which may be suitable are employment, residential, tourist-related retail and accommodation, leisure; any development shall make provision for appropriate off-site highway improvements. Anzio Camp, Blackshaw Moor – uses which may be suitable are employment, extra care housing, tourist accommodation;

Development of these areas shall be complementary to and not undermine the role of the towns and larger villages nor shall it undermine wider strategic objectives. It shall also avoid or minimise environmental impacts and congestion and safeguard and enhance natural and cultural assets.

Facilitating the appropriate redevelopment of other major developed areas where the proposed development brings positive benefits to the area and any resultant environmental or highways concerns could be adequately addressed and minimised. Such proposals will be expected to provide supporting information that demonstrates clearly that the redevelopment will complement the overall development strategy for the District.

Any development proposal that might have the potential to affect a European or Ramsar Site must itself be subject to appropriate assessment and also a rigorous environmental impact assessment to determine potential effects on ecology, protected species and site integrity.

5. Enhance tourist opportunities by:

Supporting sustainable tourism developments and measures in the Churnet Valley in accordance with Policy SS7; Allowing for small-scale tourism developments in other areas (in accordance with policies E3 and R1); Establishing strong linkages between recreational and tourist resources; Recognising and developing the close linkages to the Peak District National Park.

6. Maintain the Green Belt within Staffordshire Moorlands but its detailed boundaries will be reviewed to ensure that its purpose in separating the urban areas and maintaining their identity is consistent with the need to promote sustainable patterns of development around settlements in or on the edges of the Green Belt. This review will be undertaken through the Site Allocations DPD to allow for any small scale site allocations required to meet local needs in exceptional circumstances.

Strict control will continue to be exercised over inappropriate development within the Green Belt allowing only for exceptions as defined by Government policy.

98 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.1.67 The concept of sustainability argues in favour of concentrating most development in or adjoining existing built-up areas. However, there can be cases where some development and diversification of use in the countryside can be beneficial and sustainable. For instance, some farm businesses may benefit from diversification and an increased number of visits to the countryside can help the rural economy. However this needs to be appropriate to the character of the countryside which also needs to be sustained.

8.1.68 Where development in the countryside is justified, the preference will be for the re-use or redevelopment of existing buildings. All development in these areas will be strictly controlled, both in terms of its scale and type in order to ensure that the character and role of the countryside and the green belt is not undermined. Housing in particular will be required to be either affordable or meet an identified local need which cannot be met elsewhere in accordance with Policies H2 and R2.

8.1.69 Within these areas there are some smaller settlements and hamlets which are not identified in Policy SS6c as ‘Small Villages’ because their predominantly open character and loose-knit nature makes infilling and the definition of an Infill Development Boundary inappropriate. New housing in these settlements and hamlets will be similarly restricted to meeting the requirements set out in Policies H2 and R2.

8.1.70 The development of renewable energy sources will also often be in rural areas but such development will almost always have an environmental cost. Whilst there is support at a national policy level for developing renewable energy schemes in rural areas (PPG22 ‘Renewable Energy’), it is also recognised that any such proposals must be weighed against the continuing commitment to protect the environment. The scale and design of such schemes will therefore be of paramount importance and should accord with Policy SD2.

8.1.71 Historically development of a large scale has taken place in a number of areas in the countryside of Staffordshire Moorlands, often associated with past industrial activity or specific needs. These are brownfield sites and where these are no longer needed it is necessary to consider whether an alternative use would be appropriate. The complete or partial redevelopment of such major developed areas may offer the opportunity for environmental improvement without adding to their impact as well as helping to meet the needs of the rural areas and improve the rural economy. This is supported by former RSS Rural Renaissance Policy R1 which promotes improvements in housing choice and the rural economy, and environmental quality in rural areas. Two such areas have been identified at:

Bolton Copperworks, Froghall - The historic copper factory of Thomas Bolton and Sons most of which is now closed and derelict apart from a small section that services copper wires. It lies within an area of high landscape and tourism value adjoining the village of Froghall. The whole site occupies an area of approximately 17 hectares comprising of a range of industrial buildings. There are significant potential contamination issues which may be at some depth within the site which must be addressed. Its strategic location at the centre of the Churnet Valley is considered crucial to the area's success. Anzio Camp, Blackshaw Moor – Former army training base located 3 miles to the north of Leek on the southern edge of the Peak District National Park. The site extends to some 15.4 hectares and includes 17 existing buildings.

8.1.72 The extent and nature of future development of both of these sites will be identified through the Site Allocations DPD. This will also specify maximum levels of dwellings permissible on both sites and will also determine type of housing (i.e. whether affordable, local needs, tenure etc). Significant amounts of housing will not be permitted on either site. At the Bolton Copperworks site any housing permitted shall be limited to that required to cross-subsidise other uses. At the Anzio Camp site any extra-care housing shall be of a

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 99 Adopted Core Strategy

scale required only to meet local needs which cannot be otherwise met in a settlement. Any housing which falls within Use Class C3 (Dwellings), including any sheltered or Extra Care/Flexicare accommodation which is self-contained, will count towards the housing requirements of the District and the Rural Areas.

8.1.73 The policy also places considerable emphasis on tourism. This is identified in the spatial strategy and the Sustainable Community Strategy as a major opportunity to sustain the rural economy and strengthen the role of the District within the region and North Staffordshire.

8.1.74 The District has a close link with the Peak District National Park in terms of tourism and the policy seeks to encourage and promote tourism opportunities that could ease pressures on the Park itself, provided this would not increase pressure on areas of biodiversity interest. This is in accordance with Policy 10 in the former East Midlands RSS.

8.1.75 The Green Belt serves a number of purposes which are derived from Government policy in the NPPF and the former Staffordshire Structure Plan. The Green Belt keeps land open and free from development over a long period, which extends beyond the plan period, in order to give assurance that its boundaries will endure. National policy on Green Belts is set out in the NPPF and will apply to the whole of the Green Belt. The broad extent of the Green Belt has been considered through the RSS Phase 2 Review Examination in Public. However, no significant changes to the boundary of the Green Belt in Staffordshire Moorlands were identified as being required in the Panel Report. Minor changes to the boundaries may however be necessary to ensure that the development needs of settlements can be accommodated in the most sustainable way. The Site Allocations DPD and review of the Core Strategy will review its boundary in tandem with the identification of sites for development to ensure that its purpose in separating the urban areas and maintaining their identity is consistent with the need to promote sustainable patterns of development around settlements in or on the edges of the Green Belt.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Housing Market Assessment; Employment Land Study; Development Capacity Study; Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment; Landscape and Settlement Character Assessment

SS7 - Churnet Valley Area Strategy

The Churnet Valley is identified as an area for sustainable tourism and rural regeneration. Within this area particular support will be given to the following forms of development and measures:

short stay and long stay visitor accommodation; the expansion of existing tourist attractions and facilities and the provision of compatible new tourist attractions and facilities; measures to enhance, protect and interpret the landscape character and heritage assets of the Churnet Valley; measures to remediate and restore derelict land, buildings and features including the appropriate redevelopment of sites;

100 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

actions to protect and enhance the biodiversity of the valley, including the maintenance, buffering and connection of designated sites and actions to mitigate climate change. measures that support and integrate the heritage transport infrastructure of the valley, sympathetically with enhancing and developing links to strategic footpaths, cycle and horse riding routes. measures to improve connectivity and accessibility to and within the Churnet Valley by sustainable transport means.

Any development should be of a scale and nature and of a high standard of design which conserves and enhances the heritage, landscape and biodiversity of the area and demonstrate strong sustainable development and environmental management principles. The consideration of landscape character will be paramount in all development proposals in order to protect and conserve locally distinctive qualities and sense of place and to maximize opportunities for restoring, strengthening and enhancing distinctive landscape features.

Complementary and sensitive highway improvements to access routes and/or measures to support other alternative means of access will be required to serve any developments which generate significant additional demand for travel.

A Masterplan will be produced to guide the detailed planning and management of the area. The Site Allocations DPD will allocate specific sites for development or redevelopment.

Further development at Alton Towers shall be considered against guidance set out in the Masterplan. This may include, as appropriate, measures to improve the principal access routes to Alton Towers and the provision of a road link.

8.1.76 The Churnet Valley, running from Rudyard Lake and Tittesworth Water through Leek, Cheddleton, Froghall and Oakamoor to Alton, is an area of significant landscape, wildlife and heritage value with a number of existing well-established tourist and visitor attractions (see figure 14). The Churnet Valley can provide a strong focus for sustainable rural regeneration across the District and a significant sub-regional asset as well as complementing and easing pressures on the neighbouring Peak District National Park. To reflect the aims of the strategy for the Churnet Valley (para. 7.46), the policy seeks to manage opportunities for further appropriate visitor accommodation and tourist facilities with an emphasis on increasing overnight stays with visitors staying for longer and throughout the year and on further developing the visitor experience of the Churnet Valley through the development of its heritage, nature based and outdoor recreation products, improving and developing links between existing facilities and activities so that they are benefiting from each other, and maintaining and establishing links with regional tourism facilities. This will be supported by measures to improve access by public transport, walking and cycling into the countryside.

8.1.77 Sustainable tourism is tourism which takes account of its current and future economic, social and environmental impacts, balancing the needs of visitors, the economy, the environment and host communities. Tourism development must not be at the expense of the special qualities of the Churnet Valley which draw so many people to the area. A very sensitive approach to the provision and expansion of facilities and accommodation will therefore be required to ensure that it is of an appropriate scale and design and compatible with the nature of the local area and enhances the heritage, landscape and ecology of the Churnet Valley. The extent of the area to which this policy applies is defined in figure 14. A Masterplan is being prepared for this area which will provide the framework for achieving

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 101 Adopted Core Strategy

this and will be adopted as Supplementary Planning Guidance. The Masterplan will provide detailed guidance for development in specific areas of the Churnet Valley and will also assess the scope for designating the Churnet Valley as an Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty. Where sites are considered suitable for development or redevelopment, these will be allocated through the Site Allocations DPD. The Masterplan, when adopted, will be a material consideration in the determination of planning applications for proposals within the Churnet Valley. Any expansion of Alton Towers will be determined through the Masterplan, including the long term need for and feasibility of constructing a Relief Road or other highway improvements. The principal purpose and role of the existing green belt should also not be undermined by development which can still take place provided it is of an appropriate use, scale and form in accordance with national green belt policy and policy E3.

A 523 A 53

Meerbrook

Biddulph Grange Tittesworth Country Park Rudyard Lake Water Biddulph Grange & Steam Railway Historic Gardens Rudyard Biddulph Peak District Brindley National Park Mill Leek

Greenway Bank Ladderedge Country Park Country Park Caldon

A 527 Canal Longsdon

Deep Hayes Leekbrook Country Park Coombes Valley RSPB Reserve Cheddleton Flint Mill A 53 Caldon Canal Cheddleton Blackbrook Zoological Park Churnet Valley A 523 Railway

Ipstones

Consall Foxt A 52 Consall Froghall Nature Park Froghall Kingsley Bird & A 52 Wharf Falconry Centre Whiston KEY Kingsley

Cotton Churnet Valley Area A 522 Kingsley A 520 Holt Oakamoor Key Attractions A 521

River Churnet Hawksmoor Nature Reserve Churnet Valley Railway Foxfield Railway Cheadle St Giles’ Main Road RC Church A 521 Peak Park Boundary Alton

© Crown copyright and database rights 2011 Ordnance Survey 100018384. A 522

Fig. 14 Map of Churnet Valley

102 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - West Midlands Visitor Economy Strategy; Staffordshire Moorlands Tourism Study; Churnet Valley Landscape Character Assessment

SS8 - Blythe Bridge Regional Investment Site

The Regional Investment Site at the junction of the A50 with the Blythe Bridge bypass shall be safeguarded for high quality development falling within Classes B1 and, where appropriate, B2 of the Uses Classes Order to meet regional economic needs. Development will be strictly controlled to ensure that it:

1. Provides a high quality site attractive to national and international investors; 2. Supports the diversification and modernisation of the region’s economy; 3. Is in accordance with the adopted or any subsequently revised Development Brief as approved by the Council.

8.1.78 This site was identified in the Staffordshire Structure Plan and the adopted Staffordshire Moorlands Local Plan as a ‘Premium Employment Site’ and has the benefit of an adopted Development Brief. The former RSS Review continued to recognise the site as a major strategic employment site for North Staffordshire proposing its inclusion as a ‘Regional Investment Site’. The Council will therefore ensure that it continues to be safeguarded for this purpose. In view of its strategic role, the site does not count towards the employment requirement for the District.

In the light of more recent government guidance and changing economic and transport needs since the original development brief was adopted in 1997, the brief should be reviewed which will also give an opportunity to address the scope for accommodating other supporting uses as well as re-assessing highways and transport requirements. Any revised Brief should be subject to appropriate consultation and subsequent approval by the Council.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Employment Land Study

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 103 Adopted Core Strategy

8.2 Sustainable Development Policies

Spatial Objectives

SO2. To create a District where development minimises its impact on the environment, helps to mitigate and adapt to the adverse effects of climate change and makes efficient use of resources.

Background

8.2.1 The need to respond pro-actively to the issue of climate change has been identified as a major challenge for the District and planning has a key role to play in ensuring that development minimises its impact on the environment, helps to mitigate and adapt to the adverse effects of climate change and makes efficient use of resources.

8.2.2 In order to address this complex issue four policies are set out which provide a checklist of the basic principles that should underlie all elements of development if sustainability is to be achieved and the impact on climate change is to be tackled. They promote preference for development on previously-developed land and the greater installation of renewable energy in general, in line with national targets and recent local evidence. Additionally, the policies promote the use of the best environmental practice and sustainable construction techniques, including the integration of micro-renewables; and on-site waste recycling to reflect national guidance, the Draft Staffordshire Joint Waste Core Strategy, as well as good practice advice. Policy SD4 also addresses other significant issues of concern in the District relating to pollution control and minimising flood risk.

SD1 - Sustainable Use of Resources

The Council will require all development to make sustainable use of resources, and adapt to climate change. This will be achieved by:

1. Giving encouragement to development on previously developed land in sustainable locations in allocating land for development and determining planning applications, except where:

a previously developed site performs poorly in sustainability terms and could not be made otherwise acceptable; development upon a previously developed site would cause harm to some asset of acknowledged importance or if it would create an unacceptable flood risk.

Development on non-allocated greenfield land will only be considered acceptable where the proposal:

relates to the provision of needed development which cannot be accommodated on a deliverable previously developed site or other allocated site in the locality and is in a sustainable location, or; relates to the conversion or reuse of a rural building in accordance with policy R2, or;

104 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

would secure the future conservation of a heritage asset through appropriate enabling development in accordance with policy DC2, or; is for a rural exceptions affordable housing scheme in accordance with policy H2.

2. Supporting or promoting proposals that remediate brownfield sites affected by contamination, where this is consistent with other policies and also ensuring that any legacy from former land uses (such as coalmining) is appropriately addressed so that no future liability for future maintenance or public safety arises.

3. Requiring that development is located and designed to minimise energy needs and to take advantage of maximised orientation to achieve energy savings in line with Policy SD3.

4. Ensuring all major-scale planning applications (10 or more residential units or 1,000+ square metres floor area) are accompanied by a Sustainability/Energy Statement. This should address the energy efficiency, water conservation, sourcing of construction materials, and site orientation aspects of the scheme, and where possible the feasibility of integrating micro-renewables. The degree of detail expected will depend on the scale/complexity of the proposal.

5. The Council will expect that all developers investigate the potential for re-using construction or construction waste materials, especially those sourced locally (which can include those minerals available on site, as appropriate) and integrates where possible on-site waste management facilities.

6. The Council will promote water conservation standards in approved schemes which exceed those set out in the Buildings Regulations (for example as expressed in the Code for Sustainable Homes and the BREEAM offices scale).

8.2.3 The Government has made it clear that sustainable development is the core principle underpinning land use planning, in the NPPF and other guidance. In particular the Stern Review (October 2006) identified that human activity is changing the world’s climate, with profound and rising costs to the natural environment, concluding that action is needed now to avoid the worst of these costs. This was addressed in the 2008 Planning Act, which requires that LDFs contain policies (when taken as a whole) designed to “..contribute to the mitigation of, and adaptation to, climate change.” The NPPF also addresses climate change mitigation with its support for transition to a low carbon future, support for more renewables; and its direction that Planning should play a key role in helping to secure radical reductions in greenhouse gas emissions.

8.2.4 National policy guidance and Policy SD1 promote the use of previously developed land for development and the efficient use of land. Whilst the Council's Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment indicates that much new housing could be built on previously developed land, there may however still be circumstances where the re-use of a brownfield site over greenfield may not be appropriate, for example on sustainability grounds.

8.2.5 The submission of Sustainability/Energy Statements for major developments (broadly as defined in the Development Management Procedure Order) will enable the Council and applicant to assess how they will contribute towards meeting renewable and low carbon energy targets/imperatives and explore whether there is scope for further improvement to a scheme in relation to climate change/carbon-saving. These may be submitted as part of a Design and Access Statement or separately.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 105 Adopted Core Strategy

8.2.6 The District contains a number of older settlements, many of which contain buildings and sites which could be re-used. Some of these have a history of contamination due to industrial legacy, and remediation measures will be necessary where redevelopment is proposed. In some cases a developer may be required to submit pre-application evidence as to the presence of contamination across the site, under the 2011 Environmental Impact Regulations, before a planning application can be determined. The NPPF requires that any contaminated site proposed for redevelopment should not be capable of being described as contaminated land under Part IIA of the Environmental Protection Act 1990 following remediation measures. Further, the District has a history of mineworkings; the presence of which can adversely affect the stability of future built developments. The presence of minerals underground may also be identified as a resource for future extraction under County Minerals Plans. For these reasons, all future applications and allocations will be assessed against the best available information, such as Coal Authority records.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National Policy Guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Flood Risk Assessment; WMRA Sustainability Checklist

SD2 - Renewable/Low-Carbon Energy

The District will strive to meet part of its future energy demand through renewable or low-carbon energy sources (which could be through a variety of technologies, for example wind power, solar energy, biomass etc), in line with current evidence which identifies the feasibility of these forms of energy across the District. This will be achieved by supporting small- and large- scale stand alone renewable or low-carbon energy schemes, subject to the following considerations:

the degree to which the scale and nature of a proposal impacts on the landscape, particularly having regard to the Landscape Character Assessment and impact on the Peak District National Park (taking into account both individual and cumulative effects of similar proposals); the degree to which the developer has demonstrated any environmental/economic/social benefits of a scheme as well as how any environmental or social impacts have been minimised (e.g. visual, noise or smell); the impact on designated sites of European, national and local biodiversity and geological importance in accordance with policy NE1; the impact on the amenity of residents and other interests of acknowledged importance, including the historic environment; the degree to which individual proposals reflect current local evidence regarding the feasibility of different types of renewable or low-carbon energy at different locations across the District.

8.2.7 In recent years the UK has committed itself to legal obligations stemming from EU Directives, relating to both the reduction of future greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions (including carbon); and meeting a greater proportion of the UK’s future demand for energy through renewables which have been reflected in more recent legislation. The Climate Change Act 2008 requires the UK to reduce GHG emissions by 80% between 1990 and 2050; with a

requirement that UK CO2 emissions reduce by 26% between 1990 and 2020. EU Directive 2009/28/EC requires the UK to source 15% of its energy from renewables sources by 2020

106 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

(the target for 2010 was 10% – however actual uptake by 2009 was only about 6.7%). The Planning and Energy Act 2008 now allows planning authorities to set their own requirements/targets for renewable energy generation, across their Districts. As previously stated the NPPF reflects this with support for transition to a low carbon economy; and its support for greater uptake of renewables. LPAs can also continue to develop an evidence-based understanding of renewables opportunities in their areas. As a response to the above legislation and Policy, in 2009 the Council, along with other Staffordshire planning authorities, commissioned consultants CAMCO to produce a Staffordshire-wide study examining in detail the opportunities for stand-alone renewables in general. The study included energy opportunity mapping, and was published in 2011.

8.2.8 In line with National Policy, Policy SD2 gives support to new renewable energy development (e.g. wind turbines) without differentiating between forms. The District does have natural characteristics (e.g. wind currents, river flows) which could make this viable – either now, or due to future technology. However, Policy SD2 also recognises that the siting and design of stand-alone renewables installations requires careful consideration, to protect the natural and built environment, and other amenities, without precluding the supply of any type of renewable energy. The viability of different forms of renewable energies, within different areas of the District, is examined in the CAMCO work (which may in future be informed by further local evidence).

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National Policy Guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG; Strategy for Sustainable Construction; Code for Sustainable Homes Evidence - WMRA Sustainability Checklist; Staffordshire County-wide Renewable / Low Carbon Energy Study (CAMCO)

SD3 - Carbon-saving Measures in Development

The Council will promote further carbon-saving measures in both new and existing developments (where this is consistent with other Core Strategy Policies), in the following ways:

1. Supporting developers who propose exceeding the thermal efficiency standards required by law for new buildings or extensions, at the time of the application. In the case of larger developments such as housing estates the Council will support measures such as ‘communal’ micro-renewables, or District Heating installations.

2. The Council will support measures by landowners/developers designed to contribute to existing or emerging District Heating networks (for example by connecting ‘exporters’, with receptors, of heat).

3. The Council will support measures designed to improve the sustainability of existing buildings (such as improved thermal insulation, water conservation, or the installation of micro-renewables).

8.2.9 A consequence of recent Governments’ commitment to mitigating climate change has been greater expectation that the (mostly voluntary) standardised rating systems for the sustainability of buildings, namely the Code for Sustainable Homes, and the various BREEAM Scales (for non-domestic uses), be applied to all new developments. These ratings cover a range of sustainability design elements such as the energy efficiency/CO2 emissions of the

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 107 Adopted Core Strategy

structure (covering building insulation although this can be augmented by integrating renewables); water consumption efficiency; minimisation of surface water run-off; and other aspects. There is greater expectation that developments meet Code Levels/Standards in line with the anticipated trajectory set out in the UK’s Low Carbon “roadmap” between 2010-2019, and other Government documents including “Building a Greener Future” (2007), and “The Carbon Plan: Delivering our low carbon future” (2011) – these ‘step’ carbon reduction targets in new development upwards over time. The NPPF is clear in its support for reducing the carbon- and water- consumption impacts of new buildings, but, because this generally involves greater build-costs, this is subject to developer viability considerations. In particular the NPPF directs planning authorities not to overburden developer viability or prejudice development delivery, with Planning Policy requirements. It should be noted these rating systems operate independently of the Building Regulations – which set minimum thermal insulation and water consumption requirements as a matter of law - it is expected that future Building Regulations will ‘match’ the low carbon roadmap trajectory in carbon reduction terms, but this is not guaranteed.

8.2.10 For these reasons, Policy SD3 promotes a number of measures which can improve the sustainability of new or existing development in advance of the Building Regulations (assuming the development itself, where it needs planning permission, is acceptable against wider Core Strategy Policies). In addition to assessing the viability of various forms of renewable energy across the District, the CAMCO study also examines the viabilities associated with setting carbon reduction targets especially within new residential development, and consequently makes recommendations. However Policy SD3 does not set on-site carbon reduction requirements (or specify Code for Sustainable Homes/BREEAM Levels) in new development, because this could impact negatively upon developer viability, against the advice in the NPPF; and more generally in anticipation of the ‘tightening’ of future Building Regulations with regards thermal insulation and water conservation, in line with the low carbon ‘roadmap’ as explained above.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National Policy Guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG; Strategy for Sustainable Construction; Code for Sustainable Homes Evidence - WMRA Sustainability Checklist; Staffordshire County-wide Renewable / Low Carbon Energy Study (CAMCO)

SD4 - Pollution and Flood Risk

The Council will ensure that the effects of pollution (air, land, noise, water, light) are avoided or mitigated by refusing schemes which are deemed to be (individually or cumulatively) environmentally unacceptable and by avoiding unacceptable amenity impacts by refusing schemes which are pollution-sensitive adjacent to polluting developments, or polluting schemes adjacent to pollution sensitive areas, in accordance with national guidance.

Development proposed within the floodplain will be guided to first make use of areas at no or low risk of flooding before areas at higher risk, where this is viable or possible and compatible with other polices aimed at achieving a sustainable pattern of development. Development deemed acceptable within areas at risk of flooding due to national or other policies or other material considerations, must be subject to a flood risk assessment. Additionally, approved schemes must be designed and controlled to mitigate the effects of flooding on the site and the

108 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

potential impact of the development on flooding elsewhere in the floodplain. In all cases, schemes will be determined after having considered both individual and cumulative impacts.

When considering planning applications and future allocations in the Site Allocations DPD, the Council will also have regard to all relevant Catchment Flood Management Plans affecting the District.

8.2.11 This Policy deals specifically with issues of pollution and flood risk. Pollution not only can negatively impact on the quality of life of people, but can also contribute to climate change (impact on ozone etc) and adversely impact on biodiversity assets (which can also affect ‘wealth creation’). The NPPF directs Councils to proactively provide needed economic development - however decisions should ensure that new development is “appropriate for its location” in pollution/contamination terms; and more generally development should contribute to securing good standards of amenity and reducing pollution. On the other hand the NPPF recognises that industrial expansions resulting in ‘some’ additional noise should not be unfairly restricted. The Council will apply these principles to any development where pollution or contamination considerations may arise. The Moorlands has a wet climate and within it there are significant corridors along rivers identified as being within flood risk zones. The questionnaire responses indicate acute public concerns to flooding generally. Development patterns can have distorting effects on the water cycle and drainage systems (for example, artificial features such as hardstanding, new roads and pavements can create channels of surface run-off).

8.2.12 The District Council will continue to keep abreast of relevant evidence affecting pollution and flood risk in its District, such as the requirements of the 2003 Water Framework Directive and any relevant Catchment Flood Management Plans (such as the Humber River Basin Management Plan), as per former RSS Policy QE9. A level 1 Strategic Flood Risk Assessment has been undertaken for the District. In accordance with the NPPF, areas of ‘low’, ‘medium’ and ‘high’ risk have been mapped using data collected from the Environment Agency, Staffordshire Moorlands District Council, Severn Trent Water, United Utilities, the Highways Agency and British Waterways. This has included information on flooding from rivers, surface water (land drainage), groundwater, artificial water bodies and sewers. This provides the basis for the Sequential Test to be applied. The Council will apply the Sequential Test to all sites within the ‘high’ and ‘medium’ risk flood zones to demonstrate that there are no reasonably available sites in areas with less risk of flooding that would be appropriate to the type of development or land use proposed. If there is an area of overlap between the site boundary and area at risk of flooding, this should be utilised as an opportunity to reduce flood risk within the site, by using waterside areas for recreation, amenity and environmental purposes. Where the need to apply the Exception Test is identified, if the Council considers that there are an insufficient number of suitable sites for development, the scope of the SFRA could be widened to a Level 2 assessment.

8.2.13 Notwithstanding any requirements for site-specific flood risk assessments, new legislation (2010 Flood and Water Management Act) may require separate Sustainable Drainage approval from the County Council (in all locations) for most new structures.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National Policy Guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG; Strategy for Sustainable Construction Evidence - Strategic Flood Risk Assessment

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 109 Adopted Core Strategy

8.3 Economy and Employment Policies

Spatial Objectives

SO3. To develop and diversify in a sustainable manner the District’s economy and meet local employment needs in the towns and villages.

SO7. To support and enhance the tourism, cultural, recreation and leisure opportunities for the District’s residents and visitors.

Background

8.3.1 The provision of employment land of the right type and in the right place is a key issue for the Core Strategy. The Employment Land Study has highlighted the need for the local economy to rely less on the manufacturing industry and to stimulate the private sector by making more sites available. The Study particularly indicated the need for starter units and the potential for offices. Tourism and cultural development is also seen in the Employment Land Study as being potentially significant for the District’s economy in terms of generating income and providing employment.

8.3.2 This section therefore contains 3 policies to help develop the District’s economy and maintain existing valuable employment land and premises. Policy E1 identifies the general locations for different types of employment development. It reflects the recommendations of the Employment Land Study and seeks to set out local guidance for employment development in accordance with the proposed development approach. Policy E2 reflects concern regarding the loss of established employment sites and premises to other uses and seeks to establish stronger, but flexible measures to safeguard those areas which are most likely to be capable of supporting the local economy. Policy E3 seeks to positively support the important role that tourism and culture plays in the economy of the Staffordshire Moorlands.

E1 - New Employment Development

New employment development will be assessed according to the extent to which it supports and improves the local economy in terms of providing for the needs and skills of the existing and future local resident workforce and meeting identified business needs, having regard to the Area Strategies in SS5 and SS6.

In addition:

All proposals should help maintain or enhance an appropriate range of employment premises and sites across the District in terms of their scale, location and type.

Within or on the edge of the town centres and on existing employment sites where redevelopment for other uses is proposed, mixed use schemes will be promoted. Mixed use schemes should accommodate employment generating uses of a scale and nature appropriate to their location.

New business developments (use classes B1 (a, b and c)) should be located in existing or proposed employment areas or in or on the edge of town centres. Preference will be given to town centre locations for all office

110 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

developments, unless ancillary to another use or specifically allocated. Elsewhere business developments will only be permitted for the expansion of existing businesses or for small-scale developments provided they would not have an unacceptable impact on the amenities, character or appearance of the area.

New industrial developments (use class B2), should be located in existing or proposed employment areas. Elsewhere industrial developments will only be permitted for the expansion of existing businesses provided they would not have an unacceptable impact on the amenities, character or appearance of the area.

New warehouse and distribution uses (use class B8) should be located in existing or proposed employment areas on sites where there is ready access to roads which are higher in the road hierarchy and where sensitive areas are less likely to be affected by heavy goods vehicles.

Large scale office (Class B1a) developments (of 5000m2 gross or more) will only be permitted where a clear need for the proposal has been demonstrated and there would be no adverse impacts on planned and committed office development schemes within other centres.

The sustainable redevelopment, intensification or improvement of existing employment sites for new business and industrial developments will be supported provided it would not have an unacceptable impact on the amenities, character or appearance of the area and is in compliance with other policies in the Core Strategy.

To ensure that the District’s workforce is suitably skilled, the Council will, where appropriate, seek to enter into agreements with developers to contribute towards training programmes and employment support and employment access schemes.

8.3.3 This Policy will ensure that there is a choice of sustainably located employment sites, attractive to developers and operators and appropriate to market needs. The Employment Land Study identified a need to follow successful examples such as the Victoria Business Park, and opportunities to encourage more start-up businesses and embrace new technologies in order to diversify the District’s economic base away from industrial to office markets.

8.3.4 This policy also supports local businesses many of which are located outside main settlements or designated industrial estates, are within rural locations or are tightly hemmed in by housing or other development. For those businesses wishing to expand and remain on their current sites, there needs to be a careful balance between protecting the countryside or surrounding land uses, maintaining the openness of the green belt and allowing these firms to provide the additional floorspace that they require.

8.3.5 Expansion and consolidation land and premises also need to be provided for larger occupiers. This will be particularly important for established businesses in the area that are planning to expand locally or respond to changing market circumstances. In meeting these needs, it will be necessary for this policy to be complemented by on-going dialogue and consultation, in particular with major employers in the area to identify not only land-use requirements but transportation and economic development strategies that may be required.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 111 Adopted Core Strategy

8.3.6 Large-scale office developments (5,000m2 gross or more), not otherwise allocated, will need to ensure that they are clearly justified in terms of need and are not at the expense of development in other centres within their catchment area.

8.3.7 In order to ensure that the local workforce and businesses benefit from new development, the policy also proposes local labour or business agreements in appropriate cases to provide job opportunities and training for local people and businesses in the construction and running of the schemes. More detail on agreements with developers to contribute towards training programmes and employment support and employment access schemes and on off-site contributions for employment training and support will be provided in an SPD on Developer Contributions or any subsequently adopted Community Infrastructure Levy. This will contain additional information on when agreements may be needed, what they will seek to cover, levels of contribution and how they will operate.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Employment Land Study

E2 - Existing Employment Areas

Employment areas and premises (falling within Use Classes B1, B2 or B8) that:

are well located to the main road and public transport network; and provide, or are physically and viably capable of providing through redevelopment, good quality modern accommodation attractive to the market without harm to the amenity of nearby residents; and are capable of meeting a range of employment uses to support the local economy;

will be safeguarded for such purposes.

Redevelopment of such areas for housing, retail or other non-employment uses will not be permitted unless:

the site is identified in the Site Allocations DPD for redevelopment; or, it can be demonstrated that the site would not be suitable or viable for continued employment use having regard to the above criteria and evidence can be provided that no suitable and viable alternative employment use can be found, or is likely to be found in the foreseeable future; or substantial planning benefits would be achieved through redevelopment which would outweigh the loss of the site for employment use.

Where redevelopment is proposed preference will be given to a mixed use redevelopment scheme which retains an element of employment provision on the site. Where this would not be viable the Council will negotiate for funding to support off-site employment provision.

8.3.8 Government policy guidance for development to take place on previously-developed land has meant that many of the existing employment sites have become under considerable pressure from the threat of residential development. Applicants often argue that there is no demand for an existing employment site or that its retention or its redevelopment for new

112 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

employment uses is not a viable option. It is accepted that in some cases this is true. However, it needs to be recognised that employment land is a finite resource and once it is lost, it is effectively lost for good. Although the retention or redevelopment of a site for employment use may not be viable at a particular time, the economics of development may change over time and its redevelopment for employment uses may become a viable proposition in the future.

8.3.9 The Council will continue to resist proposals involving the loss of employment land by proposing a sequential approach towards planning applications. This would initially involve retaining appropriate and viable employment sites. Where a lack of demand can be demonstrated by an appropriate marketing exercise and where the retention of a site in employment use can clearly be shown to be unviable, the potential for mixed-use development should be explored incorporating an element of employment uses within the development.

8.3.10 The Employment Land Study highlights some opportunities on underused sites, derelict buildings and for mixed use developments. Mixed-use development is considered to be beneficial in contributing to sustainable development and provides the opportunity to build business units which might otherwise not be viable. Permitting some residential development on employment sites for example can help to raise land value and generate additional revenue to bring forward sites with known problems that are costly to resolve. Locating housing and employment developments close to each other also has added benefits of potentially helping to reduce the amount of traffic, congestion and pollution from work to home travel. This is particularly so with ‘live-work’ units – purpose built units where the occupier of a studio, office or workshop lives in a flat attached to the place of work.

8.3.11 Where mixed use development is not viable then the Council will seek a financial contribution in appropriate cases towards securing employment development elsewhere in the area. Further details will be set out in the Developer Contributions SPD or any subsequently adopted Community Infrastructure Levy.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Employment Land Study

E3 - Tourism and Cultural Development

New tourism and cultural development will be assessed according to the extent to which it supports the local economy and promotes the distinctive character and quality of the District and enhances the role of Staffordshire Moorlands as a tourism and leisure destination having regard to the Area Strategies in Policies SS5, SS6 and SS7.

In addition:

New tourist and visitor accommodation, attractions and facilities should be developed in locations that offer, or are capable of offering, good connectivity with other tourist destinations and amenities, particularly by public transport, walking and cycling. They should normally be located in or close to settlements where local services, facilities and public transport are available

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 113 Adopted Core Strategy

or in areas specifically allocated for tourism development. Outside of these locations, including within the Green Belt, new accommodation, attractions and facilities should:

be of a scale and design which can be easily assimilated into the local area in a sustainable manner; normally be limited to the conversion of existing buildings; or exceptionally, may be new build where it is required to support or complement existing accommodation, facilities or attractions and there is an identified need which cannot be met in other ways. Preference will be given to buildings which are non-permanent in nature.

Outside the Green Belt permission will be granted for sites for camping and touring caravans provided they are well screened, sited and designed and have good access. Small camping sites may be appropriate in the Green Belt provided they do not prejudice the ‘openness’, there is appropriate screening and any necessary facilities can be accommodated within existing buildings.

Support will be given to the provision of new cultural facilities in town centres and villages to meet the needs of local communities and visitors.

All development shall be of an appropriate quality, scale and character compatible with the local area, protect the residential amenity of the area, enhance the heritage, landscape and biodiversity of the area and shall not harm interests of acknowledged importance.

This policy positively supports the important role that tourism and culture plays in the economy of the Staffordshire Moorlands and the contribution it makes to increasing physical activity and improving health and well-being. It is essential however that all new tourism, visitor and cultural proposals that are located outside settlement boundaries should be in sustainable locations and carefully assessed so that they do not have a detrimental impact on the local area. The policy also accords with the Spatial Strategy and policy SS7 which seek to promote the Churnet Valley as a sustainable tourism and recreational resource.

Existing tourist accommodation in the Staffordshire Moorlands is generally small scale family-run businesses, usually rurally located, often in converted buildings. The area has a relatively high proportion of self-catering types of accommodation and very few hotels and serviced accommodation. At present a very low proportion of visitors to the Moorlands stay overnight and supply is particularly low in the three towns. Within the Churnet Valley the provision of further short and long stay visitor accommodation is particularly supported – the Churnet Valley Masterplan will provide further guidance on suitable sites and scale. Particular attention should be paid to the quality of new tourist accommodation. A Staffordshire Moorlands Tourism Study undertaken in 2011 has identified a number of projects that would enhance the tourism offer of the District. These include developing and improving attractions and attractors, and enhancing the accommodation stock, notably further small serviced and self catering accommodation, particularly in the Churnet Valley, and providing budget hotel accommodation in the market towns.

Within town centres new tourism and cultural facilities and accommodation should accord with Policy TCR1. Outside settlement boundaries new tourist accommodation will be limited to the conversion of existing buildings and in exceptional circumstances non-permanent

114 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

buildings meaning that the landscape can be returned to its previous state. Sites for touring caravans and camping sites will be granted providing they meet the criteria set out in the policy. Stronger controls will however apply across the Green Belt, including those parts of the Churnet Valley which are within it, in order to preserve their openness.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Employment Land Study; West Midlands Visitor Economy Strategy; Staffordshire Moorlands Tourism Study

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 115 Adopted Core Strategy

8.4 Housing Policies

Spatial Objectives

SO4. To provide new housing that is affordable, desirable, well-designed and meets the needs of residents of the Moorlands

Background

8.4.1 The provision of sustainable, decent and affordable housing for all sectors of the community remains one of the priorities of the Council, the Sustainable Community Strategy and of the LDF. This section therefore contains 3 policies aimed at achieving this.

8.4.2 Policy H1 seeks to ensure that an appropriate range and type of housing is provided which meets identified needs arising from changes in population structure, including special needs for the elderly, and promotes higher quality, more sustainable housing design and layout. It is proposed to address this through a range of measures and requirements. In tackling these issues the proposed policy approach will be contributing towards the delivery of not only local priorities but also the national and regional housing agendas.

8.4.3 Policy H2 sets out the requirements for providing affordable and local needs housing, including the provision of rural exceptions housing and tackling areas of low demand whilst policy H3 reflects guidance requiring local authorities to meet identified needs for gypsies and travellers.

H1 New Housing Development

New housing development should provide for a mix of housing sizes, types and tenure including a proportion of affordable housing as set out in policy H2, and where appropriate housing for special groups, to meet the needs and aspirations of the current and future population having regard to the Area Strategies in SS5 and SS6.

All development will be assessed according to the extent to which it provides for high quality, sustainable housing and to which it meets identified local housing market needs and the strategy for the area having regard to the location of the development, the characteristics of the site and the economics of provision.

In addition:

Housing for special groups, particularly for older people, should meet a genuine and proven local need and demand and be of a scale and in a location which is appropriate to its needs.

Housing proposals of 10 dwellings or more will be required to provide a mix of housing in terms of size, type and tenure on the site. The final mix will be negotiated with the developer based on local housing needs as informed by the Strategic Housing Market Assessment and other relevant factors such as available supply and market demand.

All housing development should be at the most appropriate density compatible with the site and its location, and with the character of the surrounding area. This will generally be within the range of 40 dwellings per

116 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

hectare or more in or on the edge of town centres , 30 – 40 dwellings per hectare in other urban areas and villages and 20 – 30 dwellings per hectare in remoter rural areas.

Residential development and redevelopment on unidentified (windfall) sites will be permitted up to an indicative maximum scheme size of 9 dwellings within the Development Boundaries of the towns and larger villages, and up to an indicative maximum scheme size of 5 dwellings within the Infill Development Boundaries of the smaller villages. Exceptionally, larger windfall schemes may be permitted where it would provide over-riding affordable housing, regeneration, conservation or infrastructure benefits and it would not undermine delivery of the spatial strategy.

All new dwellings should aim to be built to “Lifetime Homes” standard in accordance with the current national advice and targets.

All new dwellings must be of sufficient size to provide satisfactory levels of amenity for future occupiers whilst respecting the privacy and amenity of existing occupiers.

All new dwellings must meet the sustainable design and construction requirements set out in policy SD1.

8.4.4 This policy is primarily to ensure that an appropriate range and mix of housing – including affordable housing – is provided to meet the needs of the existing and future population. It reflects the guidance in the NPPF to create sustainable, inclusive and mixed communities and to make efficient use of land. Collaborative working between Local Planning Authorities, local communities, stakeholders, developers and house builders is also a key principle underlying the NPPF.

8.4.5 The range, type and mix of affordable accommodation required on development sites will be determined by a combination of the results of housing needs studies, housing market assessment, information from the waiting lists, consideration of existing housing stock, local housing market information as well as any other available information including the constraints of sites.

8.4.6 Housing for special groups will also be needed to meet the future increase in elderly persons across the District and the needs of those with a learning or physical disability – this may be in the form of sheltered housing, extra care homes or flexicare or supported housing. Further guidance on these types of housing will be set out in an accompanying Housing Delivery SPD.

8.4.7 In order to address the needs of a changing population, Lifetime Homes must be a component of all future larger schemes. The cost of implementing the Lifetime Homes standard is not high and it will benefit all future occupiers as well as making homes more adaptable and future-proof. The requirement for all new dwellings to be built to Lifetime Homes standard reflects the government’s aspirations to see all homes built to this standard by 2013 as set out in its strategy ‘Delivering Lifetime Homes, Lifetime Neighbourhoods’. Developers should therefore seek to achieve this unless there are justifiable circumstances where this may not be practicable or appropriate.

8.4.8 In 2012 the HBF and CABE updated and streamlined their earlier (largely voluntary) “Buildings for Life” Code into a list of twelve main questions which are used to assess the attractiveness, functionality and sustainability of new developments. The BfL Code is intended

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 117 Adopted Core Strategy

to operate alongside, but not duplicate Code for Sustainable Homes expectations. The BfL Code can be used to assess applications at the design stage, having a “diamond” standard which can be achieved with a pass mark for all twelve questions. The BfL Code also cross-relates to other Core Strategy Policies because for example, it promotes locally inspired design; the creation/enhancement of local wildlife habitats etc. The BfL Code is seen by the Council as being a beneficial tool in ensuring attractiveness, functionality and sustainability of schemes are addressed holistically at the design stage by developers, especially across larger sites and will expect a demonstration from applicants - especially across larger residential proposals - how the scheme has been informed (and where appropriate, improved) by the application of BfL assessment.

8.4.9 Density requirements will vary across the District to reflect the character and sustainability of different areas. Higher densities are considered appropriate near to town centres where densities are generally much higher and there is greater accessibility to services and facilities whilst in the remoter rural areas lower densities are considered more appropriate to reflect their character and poorer supporting infrastructure. All development including higher density development will be required to incorporate a high standard of design of buildings, streets and spaces.

8.4.10 Details of the Council's requirements for sustainable design and construction are set out in Policy SD1 and the accompanying supporting text.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Housing Market Assessment; Development Capacity Study; Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment; ‘Delivering Lifetime Homes, Lifetime Neighbourhoods’ DCLG; CABE ‘Building for Life’ criteria

H2 - Affordable and Local Needs Housing

The provision of affordable housing will be delivered through the following measures:

1. In the towns, residential developments of 15 dwellings (0.5 hectares) or more shall provide a target of 33% affordable housing on-site from all sources. The actual level of provision will be determined through negotiation taking into account development viability and other contributions

2. Elsewhere, residential developments of 5 dwellings (0.16 hectares) or more shall provide a target of 33% affordable housing on-site from all sources, unless there are exceptional circumstances which dictate otherwise. Exceptionally this may be provided through a commuted sum payment in lieu. The actual level of provision will be determined through negotiation taking into account development viability and other contributions.

The above targets and thresholds will be reviewed for the period after 2016.

118 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

3. In or on the edge of villages, small schemes for 100% affordable housing will be allocated in the Site Allocations DPD or will be permitted on suitable rural exceptions sites which are well related to services and facilities and where a demonstrable need exists within the local area which cannot otherwise be met by means of provision in the plan.

4. Schemes proposing 100% affordable housing will be targeted to those areas in greatest demonstrable need.

5. In areas of low demand or where the stock does not meet and is not capable of meeting local housing market needs consideration will be given, in consultation with local communities, to options for renovation/improvement or redevelopment schemes to create more sustainable and balanced housing.

6. Unless circumstances dictate otherwise and in agreement with the Council, 70% of all affordable dwellings provided on each site should be social rented housing with the remainder being intermediate housing.

8.4.11 The limited supply of, and high demand for, housing in Staffordshire Moorlands has led to high prices and rents. It is now extremely difficult for local people on low incomes and increasingly those on middle incomes to afford a home of their own. This is particularly so in the rural areas. The 2008 Matthew Taylor Report considered the implications of housing provision in rural areas and found that the high cost of homes coupled with low wages of rural workers are creating affordability pressures that threaten the future of rural communities. Unless more affordable housing is provided, there is a danger that those on lower and middle incomes, particularly the young, will be forced to leave the district in increasing numbers. As a result, our communities will be damaged and the district’s age and social structure will become even more biased towards the elderly and the wealthy.

8.4.12 The Strategic Housing Market Assessment (HMA) demonstrates a significant need for affordable housing in the District which exceeds the District’s average annual development rate requirements. This policy therefore seeks to support the provision of affordable housing across the District through a range of measures. The HMA findings would suggest a 100% affordable housing target, however this is considered unrealisitic as it would not allow a sustainable housing market to be maintained. The NPPF requires that the sites and scale of development should not be subject to such a scale of obligations and policy burdens, including affordable housing, that their ability to be developed is threatened. Whilst it is the Council’s aspiration to increase the affordable housing targets in the long term, current evidence places doubt on any increase in affordable housing targets beyond the current 33% in the present economic climate. It is therefore proposed to maintain this target for the plan period to 2016 and undertake a review of the targets as part of the review of the Core Strategy to establish a suitable viable target for beyond 2016.

8.4.13 The threshold and minimum target for affordable housing provision are intended to ensure that adequate provision is made both in urban and smaller rural settlements to help address this need and ensure that a sustainable and deliverable housing market is maintained which will deliver the range of housing needed to help meet market demand as well affordable housing needs. All development involving the provision of housing which meet the thresholds will be required to make provision for affordable housing.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 119 Adopted Core Strategy

8.4.14 The majority of any affordable housing that is likely to be provided will mostly be on allocated sites in or on the edges of the main market towns. Affordable Housing provision will also be contributed to by windfall schemes, net gains from conversions, new provision of non self contained household spaces, and long term vacant properties brought back into use.

8.4.15 In the rural areas it is anticipated that the bulk of the provision of affordable houses will be in the larger villages, either on allocated sites or on windfall sites. Because of the smaller scale of development in the rural areas a lower threshold is considered justifiable unless there are exceptional circumstances why this would not be possible, such as enabling development.

8.4.16 Schemes which offer 100% affordable housing will need to be targeted to those areas in greatest need as identified by the Council in order to ensure that those areas are not disadvantaged by lower levels of affordable housing development. The proportion of social housing reflects the recommendation in the Strategic Housing Market Assessment but this will be kept under review through the Strategic Housing Market Assessment and may be varied in the light of changing housing needs and market conditions.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Housing Market Assessment; Development Capacity Study;Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment

H3 - Gypsy and Traveller Sites

Provision for gypsies and travellers will be made through the allocation of a site or sites in the Site Allocations DPD if required to meet a proven need.

The following considerations will be taken into account in the allocation of a site or the determination of applications for gypsy and traveller sites:

Safe and convenient vehicular and pedestrian access to the site should be provided;

The site must be large enough to provide for adequate on site facilities for parking, storage, play and residential amenity;

The site is reasonably accessible to shops, schools and other community facilities on foot, by cycle or public transport;

The site should not be detrimental to amenities of adjacent occupiers;

Adequate levels of privacy and residential amenity for occupiers should be provided;

Sites or features of natural, historic or archaeological value should not be harmed by the proposal.

There will be a presumption against the development of gypsy and traveller accommodation in the Green Belt unless there are very special circumstances.

120 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.4.17 Recent legislation and guidance from the government has indicated a commitment to taking steps to resolve some of the long standing accommodation issues for members of the Gypsy and Traveller communities. This legislation and guidance has an overarching aim of ensuring that members of the Gypsy and Traveller communities have equal access to decent and appropriate accommodation options, health, education and employment opportunities in sustainable locations akin to each and every other member of society.

8.4.18 This policy is based on the 2012 'Planning Policy for Traveller Sites' Guidance and wider NPPF, which seek to address this through criteria aimed at ensuring such provision is made in appropriate locations which will apply both to the allocation of sites and the determination of planning applications. This policy also relates to travelling showpeople. Although their work is of a mobile nature, showpeople nevertheless require secure, permanent bases for the storage of their equipment and more particularly for residential purposes.

8.4.19 The need for sites for gypsies and travellers within Staffordshire Moorlands has been identified through the North Staffordshire Gypsy and Traveller Accommodation Needs Assessment. The 2007 Assessment identifies a requirement for 2 residential and 2 transit pitches for the District over the period 2007 – 2012. This Assessment also covers the separate provision for travelling showpeople (although this GTAA did not identify any additional plot requirements for travelling showpeople across the Staffordshire Moorlands). The subsequent RSS Interim Policy on the Provision of New Accommodation for Gypsies, Travellers and Travelling Showpeople extended this requirement up to 2017. Proposals for the allocation or creation of sites required to meet this need will be assessed against the parameters in this policy, taking into account other relevant criteria set out in the Core Strategy. The Council will monitor the availability of gypsy and traveller accommodation and manage the provision of additional pitches within Staffordshire Moorlands against the need identified for the District and, as set out in the guidance in paragraph 22 of the ‘Planning Policy for Traveller Sites’, will take into account the existing level of local provision and need for sites when considering planning applications for gypsy and traveller sites.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG; ‘Planning Policy for Traveller Sites’ (March 2012), National Planning Policy Framework (March 2012) Evidence - North Staffordshire Gypsy & Traveller Accommodation Needs Assessment; West Midlands RSS Interim Policy Statement: Provision of New Accommodation for Gypsies, Travellers and travelling Showpeople

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 121 Adopted Core Strategy

8.5 Town Centre and Retailing Policies

Spatial Objectives

SO5. To ensure the long-term vitality and viability of the three market towns of Leek, Biddulph and Cheadle.

Background

8.5.1 It is important to maintain and improve the long term vitality and viability of the three Staffordshire Moorlands market towns as they are the main service centres for their populations and the surrounding rural hinterlands. Policies for development in Biddulph town centre are set out in the Biddulph Town Centre Area Action Plan, adopted by the Council in February 2007 and therefore are not required to be addressed in the Core Strategy. The town centre policy (TCR1) therefore relates only to Leek and Cheadle.

8.5.2 In line with the responses from the consultation, the Retail Study and the proposed spatial strategy, the policies support further retail development in Leek and Cheadle on town centre or edge of centre sites. The proposed policy approach seeks to be pro-active in the development of Leek and Cheadle town centres through a range of measures focusing retail, office, leisure and cultural development within them and actively planning for their growth and enhancement to meet the needs of all members of the community as well as maintaining local distinctiveness. The use of primary and secondary frontages as a tool for maintaining vitality in the main shopping streets is consistent with the approach used successfully in the Biddulph AAP.

8.5.3 Outside of the town centres policy TCR2 seeks to support local shopping facilities whilst bulky goods retail development outside of town centres is proposed to be controlled through sequential testing i.e. considering town centre sites first and only where this is not possible, edge of town centre locations and exceptionally out of centre sites with good transport links.

TCR1 - Development in the Town Centres

The vitality and viability of the town centres of Leek and Cheadle (defined on the Proposals Map of the Site Allocations DPD) will be protected and enhanced by positive management as follows:

1. Focusing and promoting retailing as well as other key town centre uses such as offices, leisure and cultural facilities within the town centres where they contribute to vitality and viability.

2. Supporting positive measures and proposals which enhance and regenerate the shopping and town centre environment and promote their tourism potential.

3. Enhancing local distinctiveness by supporting proposals which help retain, attract or expand the provision of independent retailers in the town centres including niche markets.

4. Ensuring new development is well related to pedestrian shopping routes.

122 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

5. Ensuring there are adequate parking facilities in suitable locations in and around the town centres and good access to the town centres by those using public transport, cycling or walking.

6. Setting out design principles to improve and enhance the distinctive heritage of the town centres including minimising the risk of crime.

7. Promoting housing on upper floors within the primary shopping areas and elsewhere in the town centres where this does not jeopardise their vitality and viability.

8. Only permitting new retail, leisure, office and other key town centre uses outside town centres where they are consistent with the approach set out in national policy in terms of need, scale, sequential approach to site selection, impact on other centres, including those beyond the district boundary, and accessibility.

9. Protecting the retail function in the heart of the town centres by designating primary and secondary shopping frontages (to be defined in the Site Allocations DPD), as set out in the Primary and Secondary Frontages Policy.

Proposals relating to Biddulph Town Centre will be assessed against policies in the BiddulphTown Centre Area Action Plan Development Plan Document (adopted February 2007). Proposals for town centre uses in Biddulph outside the AAP boundary will be assessed in accordance with the relevant parts of this policy.

Primary and Secondary Frontages Policy

Primary Frontages

In primary frontages, proposals for changes of use to A1 retail will be supported. Development falling within other use classes will only be permitted where it will not create a concentration of non-shopping uses and result in an unacceptable change in the retail character of the immediate area or have an adverse effect on the vitality or viability of the town centre.

Proposals for residential use at ground floor level in primary frontages will not be supported.

Any non-A1 use must be complementary to adjacent shopping uses in terms of its operational characteristics and retain a display frontage appropriate to a shopping area.

Secondary Frontages

In secondary frontages, development falling within other use classes will be permitted where it will contribute to the vitality and viability of the town centre.

8.5.4 The market towns of Leek, Cheadle and Biddulph are the main centres in the Staffordshire Moorlands, serving residents of the towns themselves and their large rural hinterlands. It is recognised both locally and nationally that our town centres are very important to the social, economic and environmental well being of the District. It is considered crucial to maintain and improve their long term vitality and viability so that they are attractive

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 123 Adopted Core Strategy

places to shop, work, visit and invest in. In line with national guidance set out in the NPPF and the former Preferred Options of the West Midlands RSS Review, this policy states how the Council will plan pro-actively for the town centres by focusing growth and development within them to meet the needs of all members of the community in terms of retailing and other facilities, whilst at the same time preserving their unique local identity.

8.5.5 This policy approach ties in with the vision of the Staffordshire Moorlands Sustainable Community Strategy 2007 – 2020, which states that ‘by 2020…..our vibrant market towns will be home to a range of successful retail, visitor and knowledge based businesses’.

8.5.6 Evidence from the Staffordshire Moorlands Retail Study (2006) highlights the importance of enhancing Leek and Cheadle town centres, particularly in terms of retail offer to encourage more sustainable travel patterns. Survey work undertaken as part of this study with the local population through both in centre interviews and telephone surveys has revealed that there are gaps in the provision of both convenience and comparison goods causing significant numbers of Staffordshire Moorlands residents to regularly shop outside the District.

8.5.7 The policy contains a whole range of measures to maintain the vitality and viability of our town centres. Retailing and other key town centre uses like offices, leisure uses such as hotels and cinemas and cultural facilities like those connected with performance and the arts should ideally be focused in town centres. However, as the District has a thriving tourist industry it is recognised that when special circumstances dictate, hotels in particular may need to be located outside town centres. Retailing and other key town centre uses will only be permitted outside town centres, where proposals are consistent with national guidance in the NPPF.

8.5.8 Whilst the Core Strategy provides an overarching strategy for the future development of the town centres, the subsequent Site Allocations Development Plan Document (informed by Masterplans) and the adopted Biddulph Town Centre Area Action Plan specifically will identify opportunities for major redevelopment in all three town centres.

8.5.9 Examples of measures to enhance the town centres which could be considered are improvements to traffic management, possible pedestrianisation and improvements to the public realm such as greening the town centres. It is also extremely important to ensure that our town centres, which are our key service centres for a large rural hinterland, are accessible by a choice of means of transport as well as to pedestrians. It is recognised that a proportion of town centre users travel by private transport and need convenient parking places to encourage them to use the town centres rather than go to other centres outside the District.

8.5.10 Retaining and enhancing local distinctiveness has strong local support with residents and businesses alike not wanting our historic market towns to become ‘clone towns’. Supporting independent traders and niche markets (such as antiques in Leek) is a positive way of doing this. Good design is also particularly important in our town centres in order to retain distinctiveness, attract visitors and also ensure that key areas and buildings are user friendly for the whole community. The SPD on design and Policy DC1 cover this in more detail.

8.5.11 Upper floors in our town centres are not used to their full capacity. There is a local need for housing in accessible locations as well as the other benefits residential use could bring, such as security outside normal working hours and assisting with the development of the evening economy.

8.5.12 The safeguarding of the retail function at the heart of Leek and Cheadle town centres is considered to be a crucial factor in maintaining their vitality and viability, so in line with former PPS6 guidance, primary and secondary shopping frontages will be defined in

124 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

the Site Allocations Development Plan Document. It is considered that in the designated primary frontage if a proposed change of use to a non-A1 use would result in three or more adjacent units in non-A1 use then this would create a concentration, and would be unacceptable. In some locations within the primary frontage, where two non-A1 use units are created opposite a single non-A1 unit or where there is a significant A1 frontage (i.e. larger units in prominent positions) the change of use may also be unacceptable. Where the units are near a street junction, the presence of non-retail units around the corner may also be a material factor. If significant numbers of non-A1 uses are clustered in a part of the Primary Frontage, even if they are not adjacent, this may also constitute a concentration, particularly if this occurs towards the pedestrianised part of Derby Street in Leek or central High Street (particularly the southern side) in Cheadle – the busiest part of the town centres. Additionally it is recognised that the retail character of an area can be adversely affected by concentrations of particular types of non-A1 uses. In considering applications for non-A1 uses in an A1 unit in the primary frontage, evidence of marketing to demonstrate that there are no retail uses that could occupy the unit will be required. In secondary frontages a more flexible approach will be taken as it is recognised that a diversity of uses can be accommodated in such areas.

8.5.13 This policy primarily covers the development of Leek and Cheadle town centres, as Biddulph town centre is the subject of a separate DPD, an Area Action Plan (AAP) adopted in February 2007. However, all development proposals for town centre uses in Biddulph outside the AAP boundary will be carefully considered against the policies in the Core Strategy as well as national guidance in the NPPF.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Local policy guidance - BiddulphTown Centre AAP Evidence - Retail Capacity Study; Development Capacity Study

TCR2 - Retailing Outside Town Centres

The Council will identify sites for significant retail provision in Leek and Cheadle to meet the local need identified in Policy SS5. Preference will be given to town centre and then edge of centre sites. Where there are no sequentially preferable sites available, sites outside the town centres in highly accessible locations will be identified in the Site Allocations DPD.

Other major retail proposals (of 500m2 gross or more) will not be permitted outside town centres in order to protect the vitality and viability of the town centres, unless the proposal can be demonstrated to be acceptable under national policy.

Within the towns, but outside town centres, and in the larger villages identified in Policy SS6a, new or extended convenience retail units of up to 500m2 gross floor space to serve everyday local shopping needs and improve access to retail facilities at a local level will be promoted and supported, provided that they complement but do not adversely impact upon the vitality and viability of the three town centres and are in sustainable locations.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 125 Adopted Core Strategy

8.5.14 Evidence from the Staffordshire Moorlands Retail Study (2006) demonstrates a need for further retail floorspace in Leek and Cheadle. Whilst the preference will be to locate a site within or on the edge of the town, it is recognised that there are limited sites in the town centres to accommodate the amount of floorspace identified. Consequently, where necessary, in line with the sequential test set out in the NPPF, the Council will identify highly accessible sites outside the town centres to accommodate significant retail provision.

8.5.15 It is recognised that in accordance with sustainability principles and guidance set out in the NPPF and the former West Midlands RSS, it is important for residents to have easy access to a network of local centres to meet their day to day shopping needs both in urban and rural areas in addition to town centres. This serves the needs of the less mobile and minimises the transport needs of rural residents. This also ties in with a key theme in the Staffordshire Moorlands Sustainable Community Strategy 2007 – 2020 which is to respond to the needs and aspirations of an older population by providing the opportunity for them to continue living in rural communities and access services including local shopping for day to day needs.

8.5.16 The policy also allows for small scale convenience retail development for local needs in accordance with the hierarchy of centres identified in Policies SS5 and SS6, to ensure that retail facilities outside of town centres complement rather than undermine their vitality and viability. It covers facilities in neighbourhood areas in the towns as well as village shops. Farm shops can also meet a demand for local produce in a sustainable way, contributing to the rural economy. Such establishments often do not require planning permission where they are ancillary to another use. Where permission is required, care will be taken to ensure that they do not undermine existing easily accessible convenience shopping available to the community.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Retail Capacity Study; Development Capacity Study

126 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.6 Design and Conservation Policies

Spatial Objectives

SO8. To promote local distinctiveness by means of good design and the conservation, protection and enhancement of historic, environmental and cultural assets throughout the District.

SO9. To protect and improve the character and distinctiveness of the countryside and its landscape, biodiversity and geological resources.

Background

8.6.1 The built and natural environment of the District is one of its greatest assets and is valued highly by its residents and visitors. It is vital therefore that the core policies give sufficient prominence to design and heritage considerations, not just in terms of resisting inappropriate development but also promoting creative and sensitive design solutions to future developments. The landscape and setting of its settlements is also valued and there is a need to address this through the core strategy.

8.6.2 The design and conservation policies seek to promote local distinctiveness by means of good design and the conservation, protection and enhancement of historic, environmental and cultural assets along with the District’s landscape and the setting of its settlements. Policy DC1 sets out design criteria relating to new development to reinforce local distinctiveness and positively contribute to the area. Policy DC2 covers the protection and enhancement of the historic environment. Policy DC3 sets out measures to protect and enhance the local landscape and setting of settlements.

DC1 - Design Considerations

All development shall be well designed and reinforce local distinctiveness by positively contributing to and complementing the special character and heritage of the area in line with the Council’s Design SPD. In particular, new development should:

be of a high quality and add value to the local area, incorporating creativity, detailing and materials appropriate to the character of the area;

be designed to respect the site and its surroundings and promote a positive sense of place and identity through its scale, density, layout, siting, landscaping, character and appearance;

create, where appropriate, attractive, functional, accessible and safe public and private environments which incorporate public spaces, green infrastructure including making provision for networks of multi-functional new and existing green space (both public and private) in accordance with policy C3, landscaping, public art, ‘designing out crime’ initiatives and the principles of active design;

incorporate sustainable construction techniques and design concepts for buildings and their layouts to reduce the local and global impact of the development, and to adapt to climate change, in accordance with policy SD1;

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 127 Adopted Core Strategy

protect the amenity of the area, including residential amenity, in terms of satisfactory daylight, sunlight, outlook, privacy and soft landscaping;

promote the maintenance, enhancement, restoration and re-creation of biodiversity and geological heritage, where appropriate, in accordance with policy NE1;

provide for safe and satisfactory access and make a contribution to meeting the parking requirement arising from necessary car use;

ensure that existing drainage, waste water and sewerage infrastructure capacity is available, and where necessary enhanced, to enable the development to proceed;

ensure, where appropriate, equality of access and use for all sections of the community.

8.6.3 Good design is a key element of sustainable development, so the Council will promote a high standard of design which is locally distinctive and reinforces the unique character of its individual settlements. A high quality, well designed, development can enhance the sense of place and identity of an area and can bring significant benefits to the local environment and economy. In this way, new development can have a positive impact on the lives of local people and visitors to the District.

8.6.4 Guidance on those features and characteristics which make the Moorlands so unique and how design can complement and reflect this will be provided through the Design SPD. All developers and applicants will be required to provide a Design and Access Statement to accompany suitable planning applications which addresses, as appropriate, the issues set out in Policy DC1 and the Design SPD. A Design and Access Statement will be required to accompany proposals for development with accurate illustration of the proposal and its relationship with its surroundings including crime prevention considerations.

8.6.5 Assessment of potential impacts from new developments at the earliest possible stage of the design process will assist in identifying problems to be overcome. Detailed guidance on issues of security and public safety in the public realm can be found in ‘Safer Places: The Planning System and Crime Prevention’ and in ‘Secured by Design’ (www.securedbydesign.com) produced by the police. A further useful reference point is the ‘Streets for All Manual: West Midlands’ produced by the Department of Transport and English Heritage. This contains guidance on the retention and conservation of historic street furniture, rationalisation of existing signage, minimisation of street markings, use of appropriate surfacing and associated highway improvements. The principles of active design set out by Sport England promote opportunities for sport and physical activity in the design and layout of development.

8.6.6 The ‘green infrastructure’ can be defined as a network of multi-functional open spaces, including formal parks, gardens, woodlands, green corridors, waterways, street trees and open countryside. It performs a valuable role in the District’s towns and villages. A Green Infrastructure Study will be undertaken to consider how the green spaces relate to one another in the District and where there may be opportunities to extend them.

8.6.7 In order to help identify the characteristics of a site the Council will also promote the use of ‘Concept Statements’ for allocated and large unidentified sites. Concept Statements, developed by the former Countryside Agency, are a simple, clear expression of the key characteristics of place that new development should create. They explain how the policies

128 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

and objectives of the Core Strategy will apply to a specific site in order to deliver the best possible economic, social and environmental benefits. They are less detailed then an SPD but more informative for developers and the community then a DPD. Where applicable, the statements should be closely informed and linked to a robust consideration of the historic environment of the sites and their surrounding areas.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Safer Places: The Planning System and Crime Prevention' (ODPM/Home Office); CABE Building for Life Criteria; Manual for Streets (DCLG/Department for Transport, 2007; Active Design (Sport England); 'Streets for All Manual: West Midlands - Department for Transport & English Heritage (2005)

DC2 - The Historic Environment

The Council will safeguard and, where possible, enhance the historic environment, areas of historic landscape character and interests of acknowledged importance, including in particular scheduled ancient monuments, significant buildings (both statutory listed and on a local register), the settings of designated assets, conservation areas, registered historic parks and gardens, registered battlefields and archaeological remains by:

1. Resisting development which would harm or be detrimental to the special character and historic heritage of the District’s towns and villages and those interests of acknowledged importance.

2. Promoting development which sustains, respects or enhances buildings and features which contribute to the character or heritage of an area and those interests of acknowledged importance through the use of conservation area appraisals, design statements, archaeological assessments, characterisation studies and Masterplanning.

3. Preventing the loss of buildings and features which make a positive contribution to the character or heritage of an area through appropriate reuse and sensitive development, including enabling development, unless their retention is not viable or there would be substantial planning benefits to outweigh the loss.

8.6.8 The historic environment of Staffordshire Moorlands is a resource for which the District is renowned. It includes a range of buildings, gardens and structures many of which are statutorily protected. The historic environment also extends beyond individual assets to the historic character of the wider landscape. This policy seeks to ensure that sites and areas of particular heritage value are both safeguarded for the future and, where possible, enhanced both for their own heritage merits and as part of wider heritage regeneration proposals. There are 967 Listed buildings and structures, 14 Conservation Areas and a number of Scheduled Ancient Monuments (SAMs) within the District outside the Peak District National Park and a further 371 Listed buildings and structures within the PeakDistrictNational Park. Conservation Areas and buildings that are statutorily listed are protected under national legislation guidance. Additionally the Council has adopted an SPD which outlines procedures for identifying local buildings not statutorily protected but considered appropriate for retention.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 129 Adopted Core Strategy

8.6.9 The Authority has undertaken a round of Conservation Area Appraisals to assess the particular qualities and needs of each one. These appraisals will act as tools in defining the character of the areas and as an aid in considering development proposals. Management plans are being prepared for each Conservation Area to inform and encourage good practices to conserve their character and appearance.

8.6.10 A register of parks and gardens of special historic interest is maintained by English Heritage. Although there are no specific additional statutory controls resulting from inclusion on the register, Government guidance (NPPF) indicates that local authorities must have regard to the protection of these sites in preparing plans and determining planning applications. Staffordshire County Council has undertaken a countywide Historic Landscape Characterisation project which was taken into account when producing the District Council’s Landscape & Settlement Setting Study (refer to Policy DC3).

8.6.11 This policy identifies a range of measures which the Council will use to promote sensitive development which will contribute to the character or heritage of an area and those interests of acknowledged importance. In addition proposals for sites and areas of heritage importance, including sites identified under local listing, should adhere to the design guidance to be set out through the proposed Design SPD and any relevant Conservation Area management plans.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Conservation Area Appraisals; Historic Environment Record by Staffordshire County Council; Staffordshire County Council’s Historic Landscape Characterisation Study, Staffordshire Moorlands Historic Environment Character Assessment

DC3 - Landscape and Settlement Setting

The Council will protect and, where possible, enhance local landscape and the setting of settlements in the Staffordshire Moorlands by:

1. Resisting development which would harm or be detrimental to the character of the local and wider landscape or the setting of a settlement and important views into and out of the settlement as identified in the Landscape and Settlement Character Assessment;

2. Supporting development which respects and enhances local landscape character and which reinforces and enhances the setting of the settlement as identified in the Landscape and Settlement Character Assessment;

3. Supporting opportunities to positively manage the landscape and use sustainable building techniques and materials which are sympathetic to the landscape;

4. Identifying through the Site Allocations DPD and protecting from inappropriate development, areas of visual open space where the intention will be to retain the land’s open and undeveloped appearance. Where appropriate the Council

130 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

will seek public access agreements with the land owners and seek proposals for the enhancement or improvement of these areas as part of the green infrastructure network in accordance with policy C3. In exceptional cases, limited development of areas of visual open space may be acceptable where this will bring about overriding improvements to the open space itself;

5. Recognising and conserving the special quality of the landscape in the Peak District National Park, and ensuring that development does not adversely affect the wider setting of the National Park.

8.6.12 The Staffordshire Moorland’s natural environment is one of the District’s greatest assets and the need for it to be protected is recognised within the Staffordshire Moorlands Sustainable Community Strategy 2007-2020. The European Landscape Convention, which became binding on the UK in 2007; has the aim of encouraging public authorities to adopt policies and landscape protection and management measures so as to maintain/improve landscape quality across their Districts; further to this national guidance set out in the NPPF identifies the need for Council’s to produce policies that maintain and enhance the value of the countryside. There has been a move away in national Government guidance from Fig. 15 Landscape Character Types ‘blanket’ local landscape designations in favour of locally based Landscape Character Assessments. The continued use of the current Special Landscape Area designation is therefore not considered sufficiently sensitive to local landscape characteristics and it is proposed to address local landscape impact through the use of a Landscape Character Assessment instead. The Council has undertaken a Landscape Character Assessment in order to identify character features in the District which should be used to inform planning decisions taking into account Staffordshire County Council’s Historic Landscape Characterisation Study and earlier Planning for Landscape Change: Supplementary Planning Guidance to the Staffordshire and Stoke on Trent Structure Plan, 1996 – 2011 (2000). This identifies a range of 10 different landscape character types across the District (see figure 15)

8.6.13 This Policy provides protection for local landscape character which includes features, qualities and views that can make a valuable contribution to the landscape quality. This will be achieved through resisting development that would have a detrimental impact on landscape features, qualities and views. Trees, hedgerows and dry stone walls are examples of the types of landscape features this policy seeks to protect.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 131 Adopted Core Strategy

8.6.14 The setting of settlements is also considered important to the character of the Moorlands and the special qualities of its towns and villages. This policy seeks to ensure that new development respects and reinforces these qualities. The Landscape and Settlement Character Study is seen as a positive way of identifying and highlighting the importance of an area and its setting which will form a significant piece of evidence to support both the allocation of sites in the LDF and the day-to-day control of development.

8.6.15 Visual open space are areas of land which are not essential as ‘public’ open space but which perform valuable functions within towns and villages, for example by forming a visual break between development, protecting attractive views and enhancing the setting of a public amenity. Such areas can contribute significantly to the character of settlements and should therefore be kept free from most development. The Landscape and Settlement Character Study which has reassessed these areas will inform their subsequent definition in the Site Allocations DPD.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Landscape and Settlement Character Assessment; Historic Environment Record by Staffordshire County Council; Staffordshire County Council’s Historic Landscape Characterisation Study, Planning for Landscape Change: Supplementary Planning Guidance to the Staffordshire and Stoke on Trent Structure Plan (2000), Staffordshire Moorlands Historic Environment Character Assessment

132 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.7 Sustainable Communities Policies

Spatial Objectives

SO6. To maintain and promote sustainable regenerated rural areas and communities with access to employment opportunities, housing and services for all.

SO7. To support and enhance the tourism, cultural, recreation and leisure opportunities for the District’s residents and visitors.

SO10. To deliver sustainable, inclusive, healthy and safe communities.

Background

8.7.1 Creating sustainable communities by ensuring that new development contributes to the creation of safe, livable and mixed communities with good access to jobs and key services and to sports, recreation and leisure facilities for all the population is a key principle of Government planning policy and is widely supported by local residents. It is particularly important in rural areas like the Staffordshire Moorlands where accessibility to facilities and services by transport modes other than the private car can be limited. The proposed Sustainable Communities policies therefore seek to establish measures which will support, protect and promote community facilities and services and the provision of infrastructure improvements to serve new development.

8.7.2 Policy C1 protects existing community facilities, ensures that there will be adequate infrastructure in place to serve new development, supports the relocation of uses no longer compatible with their surroundings and requires high quality design and layouts in new developments. Policy C2 promotes the provision of high quality recreational open space by implementing and supporting schemes that will protect and improve the quantity, quality and accessibility of open space and outdoor sports, leisure and children’s play facilities throughout the District.

C1 - Creating Sustainable Communities

In order to create sustainable communities at a local level the Council will:

1. Support proposals which protect, retain or enhance existing community facilities (including multi use and shared schemes) or provide new facilities. New facilities should preferably be located within defined built up areas where they are most accessible. In exceptional cases facilities may be located adjacent to these areas where it can be demonstrated that this is the only practical option and where a site is well related to the existing settlement.

2. Safeguard land required for the provision of facilities to meet existing and future community needs, as identified by service providers.

3. Resist proposals involving the loss of community facilities unless:

i. an alternative facility of the same type is available or can be provided in an accessible location in the same locality; or ii. a viability appraisal including a marketing exercise by a qualified professional demonstrates that there are no options for continued use as a community facility which are financially viable and it can be

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 133 Adopted Core Strategy

demonstrated that loss of the facility would not disadvantage local residents.

4. Only permit new development where the utility, transport and community infrastructure necessary to serve it is either available, or will be made available by the time it is needed. All development proposals must therefore either incorporate the infrastructure required as a result of the scheme, or make provision for financial contributions and/or land to secure such infrastructure or service provision at the time it is needed, by means of conditions or a planning obligation in line with the Council’s Developer Contributions SPD, or any subsequently adopted Community Infrastructure Levy.

5. Support the relocation of uses which are no longer compatible with their surroundings due to negative amenity issues such as noise or accessibility where an alternative suitable site can be secured, subject to the requirements set out in Policy E2 in order to facilitate regeneration.

6. Require development proposals to incorporate high quality locally distinctive design features and layouts that will reduce crime and the fear of crime and support inclusive communities, particularly in terms of accessibility and functionality in line with the Council’s Design SPD.

7. Require major new development to be accessible by a choice of means of transport, in accordance with policy T1.

8.7.3 The vision of the Staffordshire Moorlands Sustainable Community Strategy 2007 – 2020 focuses heavily on achieving an excellent quality of life in the District. Clearly, availability of and access to services is a major part of this as well as reducing the fear of crime. Other major strands of the Sustainable Community Strategy which relate to the creation of sustainable communities are ‘investing in our children and young people’ and ‘responding to the needs and aspirations of an ageing population’.

8.7.4 Community facilities such as village halls, village shops and post offices, schools, colleges, nurseries, places of worship, health services, convenience stores, libraries, public houses and cultural facilities such as theatres and arts centres play an important role in community life in the Staffordshire Moorlands. The loss of such facilities can have a widespread negative impact on the community, particularly the old and the young who live in rural areas and may have limited access to alternative facilities. The NPPF promotes the retention and development of local services and community facilities in rural areas. In line with this Government guidance, the policy seeks to support the retention of community facilities. Where an alternative facility of the same type already exists or the lost facility is replaced in the same locality so that it is accessible to all members of the community, this could mitigate the loss. Each proposal will be judged on its own merits. It is recognised that there are occasions where particular uses may become financially unviable. In such cases, a thorough marketing exercise must take place and all options for continued use as a community facility (such as a multi use scheme) must be thoroughly explored.

8.7.5 The policy is supportive of proposals to protect, retain and enhance facilities including their innovative delivery through the multi purpose use of buildings like schools and village halls, where the benefits of economies of scale can be realised. Where new build facilities are proposed, accessibility for all members of the community will be a key factor in judging the planning application. Suitable land identified by service providers for the provision of community facilities will be allocated in the Site Allocations DPD.

134 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.7.6 An important part of creating sustainable communities is the provision of the necessary infrastructure to serve new development (such as roads, accessibility by public transport, schools and public open space), where this is lacking. Otherwise, new development can put a strain on existing facilities and disadvantage both existing and new residents in an area. This is recognised by the Government as a development cost to be met by the landowner or developer. Full details of the Council’s requirements will be produced in an SPD. The Council will also consider the use of ‘Community Infrastructure Levy’ (CIL) to fund investment in vital infrastructure either across the District or in specific areas.

8.7.7 In relevant cases, supporting the relocation of uses no longer compatible with their surroundings can bring benefits to the local community by allowing more appropriate development to take place through regeneration. For example, a heavy industrial use could be replaced by a light industrial use or residential development. Each proposal will be judged on its merits and where employment land is involved, in conjunction with the requirements set out in Policy E2.

8.7.8 Good design is also an integral part of a successful development scheme. Development proposals must incorporate features to minimise both crime and the fear of crime (in line with the SPD) as this is an issue of concern, particularly amongst older people in the District. Inclusive design features such as those which allow access to all should also be part of new development schemes in line with the design SPD.

8.7.9 In accordance with sustainability principles, major new development must be accessible by a choice of means of transport so that all members of the community are able to access it.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Development Capacity Study; Safer Places: The Planning System and Crime Prevention (ODPM/Home Office).

C2 - Sport, Recreation and Open Space

The Council will promote the provision of high quality recreational open space by implementing and supporting schemes that will protect and improve the quantity, quality and accessibility of open space and outdoor sports, leisure and children’s play facilities throughout the district, in accordance with the adopted minimum standards set out in the Open Space, Sport and Recreation SPD.

Where there is a proven deficiency, qualifying new residential development will be expected to make provision, or a contribution towards provision of open space, sports and recreation facilities which are necessary and reasonably related in form and scale in accordance with the adopted minimum standards set out in the Open Space, Sport and Recreation SPD.

In addition:

Existing areas of open space, recreational land and buildings including school playing fields and amenity open space will be protected from development, unless:

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 135 Adopted Core Strategy

suitable alternative provision is made which is at least as accessible and at least equivalent in terms of size, usefulness, attractiveness and quality and is capable of being maintained adequately through management and maintenance agreements; or an assessment has been undertaken to demonstrate the facility is surplus to requirements.

Sites over 0.2 hectares will be identified in the Site Allocations DPD.

New sport, recreation and open space facilities should:

be located in accessible locations and supported by the local transport infrastructure; protect the residential amenity of the area; be of an appropriate quality, scale and form compatible with the local area, especially if the site is located outside the settlement boundary in the open countryside; and not harm interests of acknowledged importance; and be designed so that they are fit for purpose.

Applications to improve the use and availability of existing outdoor sports and recreation provision such as the introduction of ancillary facilities such as changing rooms, artificial surfaces or floodlighting will be permitted provided that they :

are directly related to the needs of the facility; can be satisfactorily and economically serviced; and meet the above criteria for new sport, recreation and open space facilities.

Any of the above development should be consistent with the Council’s Sports and Physical Activity Strategy and the guidance in the Open Space, Sport and Recreation SPD.

8.7.10 Open space in the Staffordshire Moorlands forming a network of green infrastructure, is important to both residents and visitors and this policy promotes and safeguards many types of open space. The Sustainable Community Strategy and the Council’s Sport and Physical Activity Strategy recognise the importance of good quality open space, sports and recreation facilities in tackling obesity and improving the quality of life and health of communities. An updated Sports and Physical Activity Strategy will identify the future needs of the District by reflecting the outcome of the PPG17 audit in terms of the quantity, quality, and accessibility of recreational open space, sports and recreation facilities provision. The glossary includes examples of the types of recreation facilities and open space included in the Audit.

8.7.11 The Council will establish local standards for all types of provision within an updated Open Space, Sport and Recreation SPD. This will also be used to set the open space, sports and recreation facilities requirement for planning applications or alternatively, the amount of contribution payable in lieu of that provision into the Council’s Open Space Sports and Recreation Facilities Fund. The allocation of new sites for sport and recreation will take place in the Site Allocations DPD.

136 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.7.12 New sport, recreation and open space facilities should be in an accessible and sustainable location and carefully assessed so that they do not have a detrimental impact on the local area, especially if they are proposed on the edge of a settlement in the open countryside. Opportunities to promote access to facilities by public transport and by alternatives to the car such as recreational routes, cycleways and bridleways etc should be maximised. The Council also supports the improvement of existing facilities in order to increase their use and availability such as changing facilities and floodlighting. Again these need to be carefully assessed so that the scale is directly related to the needs of the facility, they do not have a detrimental impact on the residential amenity of the area and do not impact on the ‘openness’ of the Green Belt.

8.7.13 The protection of existing areas of open space and recreational facilities is also considered necessary to ensure that there is no net loss of open space in terms of quantity and quality. However, the policy recognises that there may be instances where alternative provision elsewhere or improvements to neighbouring facilities may be a more appropriate option. Areas to be protected will be identified in the Site Allocations DPD.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Development Capacity Study; PPG17 Audit

C3 - Green Infrastructure

The Council will, through partnership working with local communities, organisations, landowners and developers, develop an integrated network of high quality and multi-functional green infrastructure that will:

Support and improve the provision of open space, sport and recreational facilities for local communities and enhance the settings of neighbourhoods;

Link existing and potential sites of nature conservation value and historic landscape features, create new wildlife habitats, increase biodiversity, and increase tree cover where it is appropriate to the landscape;

Enhance the natural, man-made and cultural features that are crucial to the local landscape and create opportunities for the restoration of degraded landscapes and the enhancement of the urban fringe;

Mitigate the negative effects of climate change and maximise potential climate change benefits including effective flood risk and waterways management;

Create appropriate access for a wide range of users to enjoy the countryside, including improved linkages to and provision of formal and informal recreation opportunities and accessible woodland areas, encouraging walking, cycling and horse riding;

Contribute to the diversification of the local economy and tourist development through the enhancement of existing, and provision of new facilities.

The Council will identify, protect and enhance Green Infrastructure assets through the Site Allocations DPD and the Green Infrastructure Strategy.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 137 Adopted Core Strategy

8.7.14 Green Infrastructure is the network of green spaces and natural elements that intersperse and connect our towns, villages and countryside. It is the open spaces, waterways, gardens, woodlands, green corridors, wildlife habitats, street trees, natural heritage and open countryside.

8.7.15 Green Infrastructure provides multiple benefits for the economy, the environment and people. A high quality environment has a key role in delivering the spatial strategy. It is important for the quality of life of local residents and improves the perception and attractiveness of the area for visitors and investment. Green infrastructure also has a role in our adaption to climate change and contributing to carbon neutral development.

8.7.16 Staffordshire Moorlands contains a wide range of existing and potential green infrastructure assets, which can benefit from a strategic approach to ensure adequate protection is given to key features, to identify areas where new linkages and assets need to be created and to guide and manage development which may impact on such areas. The Core Strategy recognises the cross cutting function that green infrastructure has, and the benefits of integrating green infrastructure with social and economic priorities, which will help contribute to the development of sustainable communities.

8.7.17 This policy will be supported by a ‘Green Infrastructure Strategy’ which will seek to create functional and physical connectivity between green spaces, identify opportunities to provide additional green routes, consider how land can help to alleviate flooding through providing storage areas at times of flooding, consider opportunities to adapt to climate change and importantly make recommendations for how new development should be designed where it should be located in the context of local landscape character, and how it can contribute to the wider green infrastructure network. The Green Infrastructure Strategy will inform the production of the Site Allocations Development Plan Document and will establish appropriate objectives and targets.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Development Capacity Study; PPG17 Audit; Strategic Flood Risk Assessment; Landscape & Settlement Character Assessment; Staffordshire Moorlands Biodiversity Opportunity Map, Historic Environment Character Assessment

138 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.8 Rural Policies

Spatial Objectives

SO6. To maintain and promote sustainable regenerated rural areas and communities with access to employment opportunities, housing and services for all.

Background

8.8.1 There is a particular need in the District to support the rural economy, enable farm diversification and support rural communities. Re-use of rural buildings is also a particularly important issue in the District and therefore clear policy guidance is essential. There are a number of challenges that need to be addressed in terms of ensuring that such buildings are appropriately re-used and particular local circumstances are addressed such as safeguarding buildings of particular merit and meeting local housing needs. National guidance, Planning Policy Statement 7, identifies the re-use of rural buildings for economic development purposes usually being preferable but acknowledges that conversion to residential use may be more appropriate in some locations and for certain types of buildings.

8.8.2 This section contains 2 policies which set out the type of development which will be supported in the rural areas outside of the towns and villages. They seek to sustain the rural economy and enhance the quality of the countryside. Policy R1 supports rural diversification and identifies the requirements for development. Policy R2 establishes the forms of residential development that are acceptable in rural areas. The part of the policy on conversions of rural buildings seeks to establish a balance between achieving rural diversification and enabling appropriate residential development where it enables the provision of affordable housing or helps to meet an identified local need which cannot be met elsewhere.

R1 - Rural Diversification

All development in the rural areas outside the development boundaries of the towns and villages will be assessed according to the extent to which it enhances the character, appearance and biodiversity of the countryside, promotes the sustainable diversification of the rural economy, facilitates economic activity, meets a rural community need and sustains the historic environment.

Appropriate development should not harm the rural character and environmental quality of the area or any sites designated for their nature conservation, or historical interest by virtue of the scale, nature and level of activity involved and the type and amount of traffic generated or by other effects such as noise and pollution.

Wherever possible development should be within suitably located buildings which are appropriate for conversion. Where new or replacement buildings are involved, development should have minimal impact on the countryside and be in close proximity to an existing settlement.

Within the Green Belt, inappropriate development which is otherwise acceptable within the terms of this policy, will still need to be justified by very special circumstances.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 139 Adopted Core Strategy

Priority will be given to the re-use of rural buildings for commercial enterprise, including tourism uses, where the location is sustainable and the proposed use does not harm the building’s character and/or the character of its surroundings.

8.8.3 The need for rural areas to be able to meet their economic and community needs is recognised as an important issue in both the former West Midlands Regional Spatial Strategy (RSS) and national planning guidance. The former RSS recognised strengthening the rural economy and enabling sustainable diversification as a key priority for the region. There is a particular need in the District to support the rural economy, enable farm diversification and support rural communities whilst at the same time protecting the countryside from inappropriate development. The Sustainable Community Strategy recognises that “We should make best use of the opportunities for economic development within our district without prejudice to our major employers or our environment and quality of life” with one of its five themes being to enhance conditions for business growth and sustainability.

8.8.4 In line with national guidance in the NPPF and the Staffordshire Moorlands Sustainable Community Strategy, Policy R1 sets out the criteria for economic, community and recreation development that the Council will be supportive of in rural locations and the need for such development not to have a detrimental impact on rural character or environmental quality.

8.8.5 The Sustainable Community Strategy also identifies the need to enhance conditions for business growth and sustainability. Tourism is identified as having the most obvious potential for growth of service sector business and employment in the Staffordshire Moorlands. It also recognises Staffordshire Moorlands as having high levels of self employment and a culture of entrepreneurship although current business start up rates are low. There is an opportunity to encourage indigenous business growth through the provision of suitable business/ industrial units, and also an opportunity to attract small scale knowledge based business preferring a non-urban operating platform. There also is a need to address agricultural decline through supporting appropriate rural diversification.

8.8.6 Whilst encouraging rural economic diversification is important to strengthening the rural economy, at the same time, it is important to ensure that such development is located within sustainable locations and does not have a negative impact on the countryside. This policy sets out the local context for judging such proposals.

8.8.7 Tourism also plays an important role in diversifying the rural economy. The Tourism Study identifies where there is scope for further provision and the nature of that provision which will help inform decisions on applications for tourism uses in order to ensure supply matches demand. Policy E3 sets out the considerations for tourism proposals.

8.8.8 Staffordshire County Council has completed a County-wide mapping and characterisation project of historic farmsteads, which is part of a Region-wide programme of projects. The aim of the project was to provide the evidence base to inform decisions on the sustainable management of this valuable resource – both in terms of its economic benefits as well as contribution to the essential character and identity of Staffordshire’s rural landscapes.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Landscape and Settlement Character Assessment, West Midlands Historic Farmsteads and Landscapes Project

140 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

R2 - Rural Housing

Other than sites allocated for housing development in the Site Allocations DPD, only the following forms of housing development will be permitted in the rural areas outside the settlement and infill boundaries of the town and the villages:

Affordable housing which cannot be met elsewhere, in accordance with Policy H2.

A new dwelling that meets an essential local need, such as accommodation for an agricultural, forestry or other rural enterprise worker, where the need for such accommodation has been satisfactorily demonstrated and that need cannot be met elsewhere.

Proposals for replacement dwellings, provided they do not have a significantly greater detrimental impact on the existing character of the rural area than the original dwelling or result in the loss of a building which is intrinsic to the character of the area.

Extensions to existing dwellings provided they are appropriate in scale and design and do not have a detrimental impact on the existing dwelling and the character of the rural area.

The conversion of non-residential rural buildings for residential use where:

the building is suitable and worthy in physical, architectural and character terms for conversion; and it can be demonstrated that agricultural or commercial use is not viable or suitable. In such cases there will be a requirement for a marketing exercise to be carried out by a suitably qualified professional or other evidence that the building would be unsuitable for a commercial use; or conversion to residential use would enable a building of particular merit to be safeguarded.

8.8.9 Policy R2 places particular importance on identifying and safeguarding local character. A building can, over time, become something which is associated with a locality and which makes a valuable contribution to a unique sense of place. Policy R2 recognises the importance of development control decisions in protecting such buildings and the importance of decisions being made on a case by case basis with regard to the appropriateness of residential extensions and replacement dwellings in order that buildings which are intrinsic to the unique character of a rural area are safeguarded.

8.8.10 Policy R2 recognises that the re-use of rural buildings for commercial purposes is preferable to that of residential uses and sets out the criteria for the re-use of these buildings. It takes account of local circumstances and the need to safeguard rural buildings that are judged to be of particular merit in terms of architectural, historical importance or their contribution to local character. It provides policy recognition that in certain circumstance agricultural or commercial use may no longer be financially viable for a rural building and places a requirement for this to be demonstrated through a marketing exercise. Where a marketing exercise is required this should examine the state of the building and its potential for future uses, as well as providing evidence of marketing that has been undertaken and of interest for agricultural or commercial uses. The policy also recognises that there are

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 141 Adopted Core Strategy

circumstances where a rural building may be unsuitable for commercial use, i.e. if it is incompatible with an adjacent residential use; if the form, bulk or design of building does not lend itself to a commercial use; or if it would cause unacceptable traffic or environmental problems. If it can be successfully demonstrated that an agricultural or commercial use may not be financially viable or that a commercial use would be unsuitable, then conversion for residential use will only be acceptable where it enables a the provision of affordable housing or helps to meet an identified local need in a sustainable location which cannot be met elsewhere or where conversion to residential use would enable a building of particular merit to be safeguarded. This is to ensure that, due to the large number of rural buildings, residential conversion is not permitted where it would undermine the overall development approach for the District in terms of creating an oversupply of housing outside of existing settlements.

8.8.11 It is essential that all applications for planning permission for new dwellings in the countryside are scrutinised thoroughly to avoid new isolated homes in the countryside unless there are special circumstances in accordance with paragraph 55 of the NPPF. In the case of occupational dwellings the proposal will be required to meet functional and financial tests to demonstrate the essential need for a rural worker to live permanently at or near their place of work in the countryside.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Strategic Housing Market Assessment; Development Capacity Study; Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment; English Heritage and the Countryside Agency (2006) ‘Living buildings in a living landscape: finding a future for traditional farm buildings’; English Heritage and the Countryside Agency (2006) ‘Historic Farmsteads. Preliminary Character Statement: West Midlands Region'.

142 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.9 Natural Environment Policies

Spatial Objectives

SO9. To protect and improve the character and distinctiveness of the countryside and its landscape, biodiversity and geological resources.

Background

8.9.1 The District has a wealth of biological and geological resources many of which are statutorily protected. It is essential that the core policies identify and address the protection and enhancement of such resources in line with the former RSS and Government planning guidance. The former RSS identified a large portion of the Staffordshire Moorlands as being an Area for Concentrated Biodiversity Enhancement (BEA) and this needs to be recognised and supported within the core policies. The proposed policy approach therefore seeks to balance positive management measures with strict control of development through a single broad policy which also provides policy support for projects undertaken in the District to enhance biodiversity.

NE1 - Biodiversity and Geological Resources

The biodiversity and geological resources of the District and neighbouring areas will be conserved and enhanced by positive management and strict control of development by:

1. Resisting any proposed development that could have an adverse effect on the integrity of a European site alone or in combination with other plans or projects unless it can be demonstrated that the legislative provisions to protect such sites can be fully met.

2. Conserving and enhancing any Sites of Special Scientific Interest. The Council will not permit any development proposal which would directly or indirectly (either individually or in combination with other developments) have an adverse effect on a Site of Special Scientific Interest.

3. Conserving, and enhancing regional and locally designated sites. The Council will not permit any development proposal which would directly or indirectly result in significant harm to geological and biodiversity conservation interests including ancient woodland, unless it can be demonstrated that:

there is no appropriate alternative site available; and all statutory and regulatory requirements relating to any such proposal have been satisfied; and appropriate conservation and mitigation measures are provided; or if it is demonstrated that this is not possible the need for, and benefit of, the development is demonstrated to clearly outweigh the need to safeguard the intrinsic nature conservation value of the site and compensatory measures are implemented.

4. Supporting opportunities to improve site management and increase public access to wildlife sites including supporting the objectives of the Staffordshire County Council Rights of Way Improvement Plan.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 143 Adopted Core Strategy

5. Ensuring development where appropriate produces a net gain in biodiversity, and ensuring that any unavoidable impacts are appropriately mitigated for.

6. Ensuring development promotes the appropriate maintenance, enhancement, restoration and/or re-creation of biodiversity through its proposed nature, scale, location and design. The Staffordshire Moorlands Biodiversity Opportunity Map, in conjunction with the Staffordshire Biodiversity Action Plan, will be used to guide biodiversity enhancement measures to be included in development proposals as appropriate to the nature and scale of development proposed and other environmental interest, in particular supporting opportunities to increase grassland and heathland habitats including supporting targets in the UK and Staffordshire Biodiversity Action Plan.

7. Protecting and enhancing habitats and species of principal importance for the conservation of biodiversity as identified in legislation, and recognising and implementing appropriate measures, including landscape-scale conservation management, to take account of the fact that the distribution of habitats and species will be affected by climate change.

8. Recognising the value of the natural environment for sport and leisure activities and the need to manage such activities to ensure there is no conflict.

9. Ensuring the provision and protection of green infrastructure networks in line with Policy C3.

8.9.2 The NPPF states that the planning system should contribute to and enhance the natural and local environment. The NPPF requires that local planning authorities should 'set out a strategic approach in their Local Plans, planning positively for the creation, protection, enhancement and management of networks of biodiversity and green infrastructure.' The NPPF requires that distinctions are made between the hierarchy of international, national and locally designated sites. These sites are protected under separate legislation with ODPM Circular 06/2005 outlining how statutory obligations impact within the planning system and policy NE1 will seek to reinforce their protection through the planning process. This policy will help in the achievement of the Staffordshire Moorlands Sustainable Community Strategy outcome of 'The built and natural environment will have been protected, public open spaces improved and biodiversity enhanced.'

8.9.3 A Staffordshire Moorlands Biodiversity Opportunity Map has been produced by Staffordshire Wildlife Trust in conjunction with other nature conservation bodies which highlights areas of biodiversity importance and sets out objectives and priorities. This will form the basis of the Green Infrastructure Strategy for identifying future targets for the restoration and creation of new habitats, and creating and restoring linkages between important habitat areas.

8.9.4 The Key Diagram shows the concentration of significant nature conservation sites in the District, which includes Special Protection Areas, Special Areas of Conservation and Sites of Special Scientific Interest. The Site Allocations DPD proposals map will identify the location of designated sites of international, national, regional and local biological and geological importance and ancient woodlands.

144 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

8.9.5 The provision of green infrastructure is also recognised as benefiting biological and geological resources. Defra has produced ‘Guidance for Local Authorities on Implementing Biodiversity Duty’ which states ‘The creation and improvement of Green Infrastructure in urban and rural areas and the countryside in and around towns can help to deliver multiple benefits for biodiversity, landscape, and health and recreation.' The Town and Country Planning Association (TCPA) have also produced guidance ‘Planning for a Healthy Environment – Good Practice Guidance for Green Infrastructure and Biodiversity'. Policy C3 therefore sets out the Council's policy for developing an integrated network of green infrastructure which will be informed and supported by a Green Infrastructure Strategy.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Evidence - Landscape and Character Assessment; Appropriate Assessment; DEFRA ‘Guidance for Local Authorities on Implementing the Biodiversity Duty’; Natural England and West Midlands Biodiversity Partnership (2008) ‘Enhancing Biodiversity across the West Midlands’; Natural Environment and Rural Communities Act 2006; TCPA 'Biodiversity by Design'.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 145 Adopted Core Strategy

8.10 Transport Policies

Spatial Objectives

SO11. To reduce the need to travel or make it safer and easier to travel by more sustainable forms of transport

Background

8.10.1 Reducing the need to travel, and reducing the reliance on the car is a well established planning principle stemming from concerns at combating climate change (reducing vehicular emissions) and of addressing social equity (ensuring physical accessibility to all sections of society). The Staffordshire Local Transport Plan (refer to para. 1.29 for further explanation) is the principal means of addressing transport issues in the District, and the proposed policy approach seeks to ensure that proposals in the LDF are helping deliver the objectives of this Local Transport Plan.

8.10.2 It is considered that there is potential in affecting modal shift away from the car in Staffordshire Moorlands in two respects - by targeting public transport improvements along the main ‘work corridors’ connecting the Moorlands with the conurbation; and by promoting public transport schemes within rural areas and between rural areas and towns. The Development Capacity Study has examined the accessibility of the main settlements in the District using the existing transport network including public transport and this has informed the development approach and identification of development areas. However, it is important that strategic planning decisions are not purely based on the location of existing public transport infrastructure. For this reason the proposed policies are proactive in seeking improvements to the existing network. Policy T1 identifies specific development measures which reduce reliance on the car and reduce the need to travel, whilst policy T2 identifies broader measures which promote better accessibility, create safer roads, reduce the impact of traffic, or facilitate highway improvements.

T1 - Development and Sustainable Transport

The Council will promote and support development which reduces reliance on the private car for travel journeys, reduces the need to travel generally and helps deliver the priorities of the Staffordshire Local Transport Plans, where this is consistent with other policies. This will be achieved by:

1. Ensuring that all new development is located where the highway network can satisfactorily accommodate traffic generated by the development or can be improved as part of the development.

2. Ensuring that major development is located in areas that are accessible by sustainable travel modes or can be made accessible as part of the proposal.

3. Referring to appropriate parking standards as laid out in national guidance, or any parking standards that may be produced locally.

4. Where appropriate all new development shall facilitate walking and cycling within neighbourhoods and town centres, and link with or extend identified walking or cycling routes.

146 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Development which generates significant demand for travel or is likely to have significant transport implications (as identified within a Transport Assessment) will, where appropriate:

Contribute to improved public transport provision

Provide proactive facilities and measures to support sustainable transport modes including on-site features to encourage sustainable travel methods e.g. cycle path links, cycle storage facilities, bus stops etc

Provide and actively promote travel plans

8.10.3 This policy reflects national transport planning policy in the NPPF which seeks to deliver a system that supports sustainable transport through the integration with land use planning at all levels, so that transport and planning work together to support more sustainable travel choices and reduce the need to travel. Reducing the need to travel, and reliance on the car, is linked to social equality, through making developments equally ‘accessible’ to all sections of society. The Policy aims to benefit not only work-related travel but also that for shopping, leisure and recreation etc.

8.10.4 The approach embodied in this policy will seek to manage travel demand in an effective and sustainable way, while improving the range of choice and responding to the needs of residents, workers and visitors.

8.10.5 The Council will continue to work closely with the Highway Authority to ensure the coordination of proposals within the LDF and the Local Transport Plan (as expressed within the ‘Staffordshire Moorlands District Integrated Transport Strategy 2011-2026’ which explains how the LTP is expected to be delivered in Staffordshire Moorlands and where the County Council’s transport investment, and other funding resources, are expected to be targeted). The location of development and the way that development is carried out are important factors in helping achieve the priorities of the Local Transport Plan; and in the case of proposals affecting the Strategic Road Network closely involve the Highways Agency such that it can undertake its duties as set out in DfT Circular 2/07: Planning and the Strategic Road Network. Choices about where new housing and employment uses are located for example, and patterns of travel that result, will be important factors in helping to reduce reliance on the private car. Encouraging alternative forms of travel and securing access to the most sustainable modes of travel such as public transport, walking or cycling, represent approaches which aim to help achieve a new balance between non-motorised transport, public transport and private car use.

8.10.6 This approach also reflects the aims of the Council’s Sustainable Community Strategy and the Corporate Plan priority to promote improved health and protect the environment. The Council will aim to ensure as far as possible, development minimises traffic problems and maximises the potential benefits of accessibility and new infrastructure to the wider community.

8.10.7 The Council will require new developments to meet specified parking standards, details of which will be established through subsequent work on local standards, which will have reference to DfTs Manual for Streets (2007).

8.10.8 The Council has a statutory responsibility to consult various organisations before determining planning applications (depending on the scale and impact of the proposals) as laid out in the Development Management Procedure Order. For example the Council must consult the Secretary of State for Transport, Staffordshire Highways Authority, or Network

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 147 Adopted Core Strategy

Rail for proposals which would increase traffic volumes upon trunk roads, classified roads, or railway level crossings (respectively). It is also important that major new developments help to mitigate any adverse impacts they may otherwise have on transport and travel. Transport Assessments are required to be prepared where any application would have significant transport implications (in line with DfT’s Guidance on Transport Assessment March 2007), in consultation with the Highways Authority, so as to determine necessary mitigation measures. Where appropriate, S106 planning obligations, or any adopted Community Infrastructure Levy, will be used to ensure that such developments provide for related transport improvements and fund other appropriate mitigation measures. This may also require developers to fund any qualitative improvements required in relation to existing facilities and infrastructure as a direct result of increased patronage resulting from new development. Further details regarding potential access and sustainable transport requirements for individual site allocations will be considered in the Site Allocations DPD.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Local Guidance - Staffordshire Local Transport Plan; Staffordshire Moorlands District Integrated Transport Strategy 2011-2026 Evidence - Development Capacity Study

T2 - Other Sustainable Transport Measures

In line with priorities set out in the NPPF and the Staffordshire Local Transport Plan, and through working with partner organisations, the Council will encourage and support measures which promote better accessibility, create safer roads, reduce the impact of traffic, or facilitate highway improvements. In particular, the Council will:

1. Support, subject to feasibility assessment, new road schemes within the District (where not already identified as priorities in the Local Transport Plan) where:

a. there would be evidence to suggest positive impact and need for the scheme; and b. it would be in accord with the general objectives and policies of the NPPF and the Local Transport Plan

2. Support, subject to feasibility assessment, strategic infrastructure improvements and links to major urban areas for example to road, rail, bus facilities in the District and the development of new rail or bus termini within the District

3. Continue to safeguard all existing disused railway lines within the District and support the reuse of these for public or commercial/tourism use. To this end the Council will refuse any development which would impede or truncate these routes. However proposals for recreational routes, cycleways, bridleways etc will generally be acceptable.

148 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

4. Work with its partners to promote the improvement/expansion of existing bus services and the provision of innovative sustainable transport services in the District, particularly those serving rural areas;

5. Support and promote the development of a network of safe walking, horse riding and cycling routes (including the National Cycle Network), connecting to transport interchanges, linking communities and recreational/tourist areas.

6. Seek to minimise the environmental impact of freight road transport and to work with StaffordshireCounty Council and other partner organisations to agree designated lorry routes, freight handling facilities and greater rail use.

8.10.9 Whereas the Local Transport Plan funding streams are allocated County-wide in accordance with the shared objectives, the LDF must decide broadly where future population is distributed and ensure that the transport network is able to sustain it. It is important therefore that strategic planning decisions are not purely based on the location of existing public transport infrastructure, or predicted locations of funding. For this reason Policy T2 is proactive in seeking improvements to the existing road/bus/rail networks generally. The Council will work with the highway authority to exploit opportunities for new road schemes. If they are feasible and subject to available finances, they will be included in both the Infrastructure Plan and District Integrated Transport Strategy.

8.10.10 A major issue for the District has been the inadequacy of the alternative modes of travel and in particular the public transport system. Whilst there is an extensive network of bus routes, with many settlements having daily bus links and a call-on-demand Moorlands Connect service, the Development Capacity Study found that the frequency and accessibility to these services can be limited, particularly in the rural areas.

8.10.11 The high level of out-commuting in the District would also suggest there is potential in affecting modal shift away from the car in a number of ways - by targeting public transport improvements along the main ‘work corridors’ connecting the Moorlands with the conurbation; by promoting public transport schemes within rural areas / between rural areas and towns; and by facilitating walking and cycling within settlements. This will also help to support healthy, inclusive and sustainable communities as well as reducing the impacts of travel.

Supporting Guidance and Evidence

National policy guidance - NPPF and supporting NPPG Local Guidance - Staffordshire Local Transport Plan; Staffordshire Moorlands District Integrated Transport Strategy 2011-2026 Evidence - Development Capacity Study

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 149 Adopted Core Strategy

150 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Delivering the Core Strategy

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 151 Adopted Core Strategy

9 Delivering the Core Strategy

9.1 The delivery of the Core Strategy will require a partnership approach to implementing the policies and proposals. The Council cannot deliver everything itself nor can the outcomes be achieved just through the granting or refusal of planning permission. Implementation will involve other organisations and groups who will work within the framework of their own strategies and plans as well as the spatial plan for the District. It will be very important therefore for the Council to work closely with its partners to ensure the success of the LDF and to be clear about what is required to deliver development, who will deliver it and when it will be required.

9.2 The Core Strategy must also be able to respond to changing circumstances, nationally, regionally and locally, over the plan period and demonstrate that there is flexibility and contingency measures to continue to deliver the development required. Monitoring how well the LDF is performing will be an essential element of this. By assessing how well Fig.17 Delivery Framework the policies are being achieved against clear targets, decisions can be made as to whether policies or documents need to be adjusted or replaced. In particular, monitoring will provide the context for reviewing housing delivery against the Housing Trajectory and the impact of the Strategy on a selected range of sustainability indicators. These indicators have been developed to provide a consistent basis for monitoring performance of the Strategy against the spatial objectives. However, it must be recognised that not all of the indicators will be influenced solely by the implementation of the Core Strategy - other external factors will often have an influence.

9.3 Figure 17 sets out the delivery framework for the Core Strategy which consists:

an Implementation and Monitoring Plan an Infrastructure Plan a Strategic Development Areas Plan

9.4 Related to each of these the Council has also undertaken a risk assessment and subsequent risk analysis to identify where contingency measures are needed. Progress on each of these elements of the delivery framework will be reported through an Annual Monitoring Report which will identify the need for any review of the Core Strategy of it.

152 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Implementation and Monitoring Plan

9.5 Appendix A sets out the Implementation and Monitoring Plan for the Core Strategy to achieve delivery and facilitate monitoring of each policy. For each policy it identifies the following:

Principal Outcomes – the proposals and targets which are key to the delivery of the policy. Indicators of Achievement – the measures to monitor how the proposals and targets are being achieved over the plan period. Some of these are national indicators (NI) and national core output indicators (COI) and are shown as such. Risk Assessment – identifies whether there is potentially a high, medium or low risk of non-delivery associated with the outcome. Those assessed as having a high or medium risk are considered further in the risk analysis. Principal Means of Implementation/ Delivery – the main mechanisms, strategies and documents which will be used to deliver and implement the proposals and targets. Delivery Agency – the various bodies and organisations who will be responsible for delivering the proposals. Key Actions Required – the main measures needed to ensure delivery.

Infrastructure Plan

9.6 In order to create sustainable communities, providing housing and employment opportunities alone is not sufficient. There is a need to provide the necessary supporting ‘infrastructure’ including utility services, transport, schools and health and leisure services. This requires joint working with key partners including external organisations. The Infrastructure Plan is a stand-alone document which identifies the infrastructure requirements for the area, who will provide it and when. It will be updated on a regular basis to reflect any changes arising from the monitoring done as part of the Annual Monitoring Report (see below).

Strategic Development Areas Plan

9.7 There are a number of development areas proposed in the Core Strategy which are of strategic significance and central to the achievement of the strategy in the long term. Whilst these are not specifically allocated in the Core Strategy, their broad locations are shown on the Key Diagram and the Strategic Development Areas Plan (Appendix B) gives some guidance on how they will be delivered. It is proposed that these will be subsequently allocated and more site specific guidance given through the Site Allocations DPD.

Annual Monitoring Report

9.8 The Council is required to prepare an Annual Monitoring Report in which the effectiveness of the policies will be assessed. The need for a review of any elements of the Core Strategy will be highlighted in the Annual Monitoring Report where monitoring has identified serious or sustained failure to meet the targets set out in the Implementation and Monitoring Plan or are necessary to reflect changes in national or regional policy. It will also include an update of the housing trajectory set out in Appendix G to demonstrate how policies will deliver housing provision in the area and will indicate how infrastructure providers have performed against the programmes for infrastructure set out in the Infrastructure Plan. Where there is a need to re-prioritise any previous assumptions made regarding infrastructure delivery this will be reflected in a review of the Infrastructure Plan.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 153 Adopted Core Strategy

Risk Analysis

9.9 The delivery of the Core Strategy is inevitably subject to many risks. This has been dramatically highlighted with the recent credit crunch and its impact on the commercial, housing and regeneration sector. Recognising the degree of risk to the delivery of key elements of the Core Strategy, how these can be minimised and having alternative strategies to deal with the consequences is therefore crucial to its successful delivery.

9.10 A risk assessment therefore has been incorporated into the Implementation & Monitoring Plan, the Infrastructure Plan and the Strategic Development Areas Plan. This involves firstly assessing the level of risk involved in delivering each of the outcomes. Where a high or medium risk of non-delivery is identified, a risk analysis has then been carried out which identifies the impact which non-delivery would have on the Core Strategy, the likely causes of the risk, and the measures to manage and mitigate that risk. This risk analysis will be reviewed on an annual basis through the Annual Monitoring Report to take account of changing circumstances and progress.

Regional, Sub-regional and Cross-boundary Monitoring

9.11 Monitoring of the Core Strategy also needs to be undertaken within a wider context in order to ensure that it is helping to deliver key outputs identified at a regional and sub-regional level. Many of the indicators identified in the Implementation & Monitoring Plan will therefore be used to inform and provide an input into monitoring undertaken by other organisations and agencies.

9.12 The South Cheshire Sub-regional Study also identifies the need for sub-regional monitoring of specific indicators and suggests that if future monitoring demonstrates the existence of a functioning sub-region, stakeholders may decide to proceed with the development of a cross regional strategy for the South Cheshire/North Staffordshire sub-region, necessitating the development of more formal cross-boundary working arrangements. In this situation more extensive data collection and monitoring is likely to be required to ensure that the decision making group has access to an appropriate evidence base.

154 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Appendices

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 155 156 Adopted

Staf Appendix A Implementation and Monitoring Plan fordshire Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery Core

SS1 Development THIS POLICY WILL BE MONITORED AND IMPLEMENTED THROUGH THE INDICATORS USED FOR THE OTHER CORE STRATEGY POLICIES THAT CONTRIBUTE Strategy Moorlands Principles TOWARDS SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT PRINCIPLES

SS2 Future Provision of 6000 dwellings Net total dwelling completions M Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning Provision of (NI154) Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance Development applications with policy

Core Annual development rate in Net annual dwelling completions for H Housing Delivery SPD Seek appropriate planning accordance with phasing each phase obligations and ensure funding available for Strategy 5 years of deliverable 5 year housing land supply M infrastructure housing land at all times Bring forward development sites Provision of 24 hectares Amount and type of employment land M

- employment land available (COI – BD3) March 6 hectares of deliverable Deliverable employment land supply H employment land at all times 2014 SS3 Distribution of Distribution of housing Proportion of housing completed in M Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning Development development in accordance each area Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance with policy applications with policy Bring forward development Distribution of employment Proportion of employment M sites development in accordance development completed in each area with policy

SS4 Managing the Managed release of housing Completed and planned housing M Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning Release of land provision trajectory (COI – H1 & H2) Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance HousingLand applications with policy Max. 25% windfall allowance Amount of housing development on M Housing Delivery SPD Bring forward development in urban areas and 30% in windfall sites SHLAA sites rural areas Review SHLAA annually

Restraint on housing Amount of housing development in L development nearest to N areas nearest to conurbation Staffs conurbation Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery

SS5 Towns Dwelling completions for Net dwelling completions for each M Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning each town in accordance with town Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance policy applications RSLs with policy Housing Delivery SPD Seek appropriate planning Additional employment land Net additional employment land for M BiddulphTown Centre AAP obligations and ensure for each town in accordance each town funding available for with policy infrastructure Bring forward development Additional retail provision for Net additional retail provision for each M sites each town in accordance with town Define development policy boundary

Affordable housing targets for No. of additional affordable housing M each town in accordance with units for each town Staf policy fordshire SS5a Leek Area Increasing housing provision Proportion and type of housing L Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning Strategy for first time buyers and older provision in Leek Determination of planning Town Councils applications in accordance people applications Developers with policy LeekTown Centre RSLs Seek appropriate planning Moorlands Provision of range of Deliverable housing land supply in M obligations and ensure Masterplan Market Towns deliverable housing sites Leek funding available for Site Allocations DPD Exec infrastructure Economic Development Staffs CC Increased provision of open Quantity & quality of public open L Strategy Bring forward development space and recreational space provision in Leek Health Authority sites Sports and Physical Urban Vision

Core facilities Activities Strategy Improve quality and Business Link quantity of public open SPDs Provision of new employment Employment land provision in Leek L In Staffs space

Strategy sites Local Area Agreement StaffordshireUniversity Ensure service providers Adopted Tourism Strategy Stoke-on-Trent & policies and strategies are Provision of facilities and Number of new business start-ups M Staffordshire LEP aligned sites for new start-up and service sector employment Identify sites for businesses and expanding growth (NI172) - development where Core March service sector appropriate

Expansion of town centre Quantity & quality of retail offer M Strategy 2014 Provision of new community Provision of facility H arts and cultural facility 157 158 Adopted

Staf Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery fordshire

Provision of additional visitor Number of bed spaces for visitors M Core accommodation

Regeneration proposals at Redevelopment of sites M Strategy Moorlands Cornhill

SS5b Biddulph Area Increasing housing provision Proportion and type of housing L Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning Strategy for first time buyers, families provision in Biddulph Determination of planning Town Councils applications in accordance and older people applications Developers with policy Core BiddulphTown Centre AAP RSLs Seek appropriate planning Provision of range of Deliverable housing land supply in M obligations and ensure Economic Development Market Towns deliverable housing sites Biddulph funding available for Strategy Strategy Exec infrastructure Sports and Physical Staffs CC Improve Schindler properties No. of Schindler properties improved H Activities Strategy Bring forward development as appropriate Health Authority sites SPDs Urban Vision Improve quality and

- Local Area Agreement Increased provision of open Quantity & quality of public open L Business Link quantity of public open March space and recreational space provision in Biddulph In Staffs space facilities Stoke-on-Trent & Ensure service providers Staffordshire LEP policies and strategies are 2014 Further development at Employment completions at Victoria L aligned VictoriaBusinessPark Business Park Identify sites for development where Implementation of Quantity & quality of retail offer L appropriate BiddulphTown Centre AAP

SS5a Cheadle Area Increasing housing provision Proportion and type of housing L Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning Strategy for first time buyers and provision in Cheadle Determination of planning Town Councils applications in accordance families applications Developers with policy CheadleTown Centre RSLs Seek appropriate planning Provision of range of Deliverable housing land supply in M obligations and ensure Masterplan Market Towns deliverable housing sites Cheadle funding available for Economic Development Executives infrastructure Strategy Staffs CC Increased provision of open Quantity & quality of public open L Sports and Physical Bring forward development Urban Vision space and recreational space provision in Cheadle Activities Strategy sites facilities Business Link SPDs Improve quality and In Staffs quantity of public open Local Area Agreement Provision of new employment Employment land provision in M Stoke-on-Trent & space sites Cheadle Staffordshire LEP Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery

Provision of facilities and Number of new business start-ups M Ensure service providers sites for new start-up (NI172) policies and strategies are businesses aligned Identify sites for Expansion of town centre Quantity & quality of retail offer M development where appropriate Reduced levels of traffic in Levels and nature of traffic flows H town centre

Creation of major urban Allocation of sites M expansion

SS6 Rural Areas Net dwelling completions in Net dwelling completions for each M Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning accordance with policy settlement category applications in accordance Staf Determination of planning Developers applications RSLs with policy fordshire Net additional employment Net additional employment land for M Housing Delivery SPD Seek appropriate planning land in accordance with each settlement category obligations and ensure policy funding available for infrastructure Bring forward development Moorlands sites Define development and infill boundary

SS6a Larger Villages Provision of bulk of rural Proportion and type of rural housing L Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning

Core Area Strategy areas housing provision provision in larger villages Determination of planning Parish Councils applications in accordance applications Developers with policy No decrease in range of Range of services and facilities M Housing Delivery SPD Bring forward development Strategy RSLs

services and facilities available sites Adopted Local Area Agreement Business Link Ensure service providers Provision of range of Deliverable housing land supply in L In Staffs policies and strategies are deliverable housing sites larger villages Stoke-on-Trent & aligned

- Staffordshire LEP Identify sites for Core March development where appropriate Strategy

2014 SS6b Smaller Provision of limited Proportion and type of rural housing L Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning Villages Area appropriate housing provision in smaller villages applications in accordance Strategy development with policy 159 160 Adopted

Staf Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery fordshire

Determination of planning Parish Councils Core applications Developers Local Area Agreement Strategy Moorlands SS6c Other Rural Provision of limited housing Proportion and type of rural housing L Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning Areas Area Strategy development provision in other rural areas Determination of planning Parish Councils applications in accordance applications SCC with policy Redevelopment of Bolton Site redeveloped M Economic Development Developers Adopt Masterplans Copperworks, Froghall Strategy Bring forward development Core RSLs Local Area Agreement sites Landowners Redevelopment of Anzio Site redeveloped M Masterplans Identify sites for Camp, Blackshaw Moor Tourist Board Strategy development where Staffordshire appropriate Increased provision of No. and nature of tourism schemes L Destination Work with other agencies tourism enterprises in Management to align strategies and accordance with policy Partnership plans - Visit Peak District March Limited development in green No. and nature of schemes in green L Exec Board belt belt Business Link In Staffs 2014 Staffordshire Rural Forum

SS7 ChurnetValley Increased tourism No. of visitors to attractions in L Site Allocations DPD SMDC Adopt Masterplan Area Strategy Churnet Valley ChurnetValley Masterplan Developers Determine planning Tourism Strategy Landowners applications in accordance Staffordshire with policy Increased provision of No. of tourist bed spaces within Destination Bring forward development tourism accommodation Churnet Valley L Management sites Partnership Identify sites for Tourist Board development where appropriate Work with other agencies to align strategies and plans Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery

SS8 BlytheBridge Safeguarding site for high Amount and type of employment land M Determination of planning SMDC Determine planning RIS quality employment committed and completed meeting applications Developers applications in accordance development to meet regional regional economic needs Economic Development Landowner with policy economic needs Strategy Stoke-on-Trent & Bring forward development Staffordshire LEP sites

SD1 Sustainable Housing development on No. and % of dwellings completed on M Site Specific DPD SMDC Determine planning Use of Resources PDL and greenfield sites PDL and greenfield sites (COI – H3) Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance applications SCC with policy Encouragement of No. and % of dwellings completed on M Sustainability / Energy EA Bring forward development development on PDL sites PDL sites (COI – H3) Statement sites Provide advice and Employment floorspace completions guidance Staf on PDL (COI – BD2) Consult with EA on appropriate schemes fordshire Incorporate Sustainability Promotion of remediation of Number of sites identified as having L Checklist for all PAs contaminated sites contamination problems and extent of remediation Moorlands Ensuring major schemes are No. and % of major schemes M accompanied by a accompanied by a Sustainability / Sustainability / Energy Energy Statement Statement

Core SD2 Renewable and Increased provision of No. of renewable energy generation M Site Specific DPD SMDC Determine planning Low-Carbon Energy renewable energy schemes schemes by installed capacity and Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance

Strategy type (COI- E3) applications SCC with policy Bring forward development Adopted sites Provide advice and guidance - Core March SD3 Carbon-Saving Increased provision of District No. of District Heating Networks M Site Specific DPD SMDC Determine planning Measures Heating networks Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance with policy Strategy 2014 applications SCC 161 162 Adopted

Staf Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery fordshire

Bring forward development Core sites Provide advice and

guidance Strategy Moorlands

SD4 Pollution and Avoidance or mitigation of EH records relating to DC process eg L Site Specific DPD SMDC Determine planning Flood Risk effects of pollution pollution objections Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance applications SCC with policy Bring forward development

Core EA Avoidance of unnecessary No. and type of schemes within flood sites flood risk by directing risk zones 2 and 3. Provide advice and development to no- or

Strategy guidance low-flood risk areas in most No. of planning permissions granted Consult with EA on cases contrary to EA advice on flooding and appropriate schemes water quality grounds (COI – E1) - March E1 To Develop the Improved local economy Employment / unemployment rates M Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning District’s Economy and comparative earnings Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance applications with policy

2014 Businesses Enhanced range of Employment land available by type L Economic Development Stoke-on-Trent & Bring forward development employment premises and and location (COI – BD2) Strategy Staffordshire LEP sites sites across the District Seek use of local labour Employment floorspace completions and business agreements (COI – BD1) where appropriate Support funding for businesses Provision of suitably skilled No. and nature of local labour or M workforce business agreements

E2 Existing Safeguard existing Amount of employment land lost to M Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning Employment Sites employment sites in other uses Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance accordance with policy applications Businesses with policy Economic Development Bring forward development Minimise loss of employment No. of mixed use schemes and M Strategy sites provision off-site employment provision Negotiate for mixed use schemes or off-site employment provision Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery

E3 Tourism & Increased provision of No. of tourism and cultural related L Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning Cultural Facilities tourism and cultural facilities completions, by type and location Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance in accordance with policy applications Businesses with policy Economic Development Landowners Bring forward development Increased provision of tourist No. of tourist accommodation L sites Strategy NSRP accommodation in schemes by type and location Identify sites for accordance with policy Staffordshire development where Destination appropriate Management Develop Tourist Partnership Management Visit Peak District Organaisation Executive Board

H1 Range and Type Provision of mix of housing No. and % of dwellings on sites of M Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning Staf of Housing sizes, types and tenure to 10+ by size, type, tenure and location Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance meet identified local housing with policy fordshire applications Parish Councils market needs Delivering Housing SPD Landowners Bring forward development sites Design SPD RSLs Appropriate density of Average density of schemes by L Identify sites for housing development in location Urban Vision development where

Moorlands accordance with policy appropriate Promote ‘Lifetime Homes’ Provision of housing on No. and % of dwellings on L and Building for Life unidentified sites in unidentified sites below threshold standards accordance with policy Core H2 Affordable Increased provision of No. of affordable dwellings completed M Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning Housing affordable housing in (COI – H5) (NI155) Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance

Strategy accordance with policy applications Parish Councils with policy Adopted Delivering Housing SPD Landowners Bring forward development Provision of 100% affordable No. of 100% affordable housing M sites Planning Obligations RSLs housing schemes in schemes completed by type and Work in partnership appropriate locations location Homes &

- Provide advice and

Communities Core March guidance Agency Identify sites for affordable Urban Vision housing development Strategy

2014 where appropriate Support funding for affordable housing 163 164 Adopted

Staf Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery fordshire

H3 Gypsy and Provision of gypsy and No. and type of pitches completed M Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning Core Traveller Sites traveller pitches to meet and available for use (COI – H4) Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance identified need applications Parish Councils with policy Identify site for pitches Strategy Moorlands Landowners where necessary RSLs

TCR1 Development Enhanced vitality and viability No. of people using the town centre M Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning in Town Centres of the town centres. (pedestrian footfall counts). Biddulph AAP Town Councils applications in accordance

Core Leek and Cheadle Landowners with policy Level of confidence of town centre Masterplans Businesses Bring forward development businesses (%). Determination of planning sites

Strategy Developers Undertake environmental applications Market Towns Level of satisfaction of town centre enhancement schemes Market Towns Executives users (%). Programmes Implement parking Chambers of strategy Parking Strategy Trade - March New retail development and Amount and % of completed retail M Urban Vision other key town centre uses office and leisure floorspace in the concentrated within the town town centres and District (COI –

2014 centres. BD4).

Enhancement and No. of environmental enhancement L regeneration of the shopping schemes implemented / amount and town centre spent on improvement schemes in environments to be town centres. supported including major town centre redevelopment opportunities.

Enhancement of local Net change in no. and % of M distinctiveness by supporting independent retailers in the town the attraction and retention centres. of independent retailers.

Promoting town centre No. of housing units completed in L housing. town centres. Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery

Protection of the retail Loss of A1 retail floorspace in primary M function at the heart of the shopping frontages. town centres. Percentage of vacant shop units in primary shopping areas.

TCR2 Retailing Facilitate provision for new Amount and location of completed M Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning outside Town major retail development in bulky goods retail development in Determination of planning Developers applications in accordance Centres Leek and Cheadle in Leek and Cheadle. applications Landowners with policy accordance with policy. Leek and Cheadle Businesses Bring forward development Masterplans sites Complementary convenience Amount and location of convenience L

Staf retailing in out of town centre retail development outside town and larger village locations in centres.

fordshire accordance with policy.

DC1 Design Achieving development which No. and % of housing schemes M Determination of planning SMDC Determine planning Considerations is well designed and accompanied by a Design & Access applications Developers applications in accordance reinforcing local Statement Design SPD Urban Vision with policy Moorlands distinctiveness Design and Access Provide advice and Statements guidance

DC2 The Historic Protecting and enhancing Changes in no. of buildings and L Determination of planning SMDC Determine planning Environment buildings and features of features of acknowledged importance applications Developers applications in accordance Core acknowledged importance Design SPD Urban Vision with policy Changes to no. of Conservation Local List SPD Provide advice and Areas and Conservation Area guidance Strategy Conservation Area Appraisals Appraisals Undertake Conservation Adopted Archaeological Area Appraisals Assessments Include appropriate Design and Access buildings in local list - Core March Statements Undertaking and funding environmental enhancements and

building repairs Strategy 2014 165 166 Adopted

Staf Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery fordshire

DC3 Settlement Protecting and enhancing No. and type of development L Determination of planning SMDC Determine planning Core Setting landscape character as permitted within each Landscape applications Staffs CC applications in accordance identified through the Character Zone Landscape and Settlement Developers with policy Landscape Character Character Assessment Provide advice and Strategy Moorlands Landowners Assessment guidance Undertaking and funding environmental enhancements

Core Protecting areas of Visual No. and type of development L Determination of planning SMDC Determine planning Open Space permitted within areas of Visual Open applications Developers applications in accordance Space with policy Strategy Landscape and Settlement Landowners Character Assessment Provide advice and guidance

C1 Creating Protection, retention or Changes in no. of community facilities M Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning -

March Sustainable enhancement of existing in the towns, larger villages and Determination of planning Town and Parish applications in accordance Communities community facilities. smaller villages. applications Councils with policy Development Capacity Developers Bring forward development New development only where Amount of new residential L Study sites

2014 Service providers adequate social and physical development within 30 minutes public Planning Obligations Identify sites for infrastructure is in place or transport time of: a GP; a hospital; a Community Infratructure development where can be provided primary school; a secondary school; Levy appropriate areas of employment; and a major retail centre.

Relocation of uses no longer No. and nature of uses relocated L compatible with their surroundings.

C2 Sport, Recreation Protection and improvement Net /gain loss in types of open space L Site Allocations DPD SMDC Determine planning and Open Space of quantity, quality and provision(ha) and facilities Determination of planning Staffs C C applications in accordance accessibility of open space applications Town and Parish with policy and outdoor sports facilities Amount of eligible open spaces Sport and Physical Activity Councils Bring forward development managed to green flag award Strategy Developers sites standard Play Area Strategy Service providers Identify sites for PPG17 Audit development where appropriate Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery

All qualifying new residential Quantity of open space provided L Public Open Space SPD Support funding for development to make through new residential development Green Infrastructure schemes provision towards open Strategy Manage existing assets space in line with SPD

C3 Green Protecting, enhancing and Net gain/loss in types of open space L Determination of planning SMDC Determine planning Infrastructure linking green infrastructure provision applications Staffs CC applications in accordance assets Site Allocations DPD Town and Parish with policy Change in areas of biodiversity Green Infrastructure Councils Provide guidance and importance Strategy Developers advice Staffordshire BAP Identify sites for protection, Partnership enhancement and creation of links Natural England

Staf Manage existing assets Support funding for fordshire schemes

R1 Rural Supporting development Amount and type of employment and L Determination of planning SMDC Determine planning Diversification which contributes to the wider tourist related development permitted application Parish Councils applications in accordance rural economy including in rural areas Economic Strategy with policy Moorlands Developers tourism development Businesses Provide guidance and advice Rural Partnership Priority to be given to re-use Amount and % of all development L Support funding for rural for commercial enterprise involving reuse of rural buildings Advantage West enterprises where the location is permitted for commercial enterprises Midlands

Core sustainable SCC Staffordshire Destination Strategy

Management Adopted Partnership Visit Peak District Exec Board - Core March R2 Rural Housing Allowing only appropriate Net additional new build dwellings L Determination of planning SMDC Determine planning forms of housing within rural areas outside settlement applications Parish Councils applications in accordance

development in accordance boundaries including net additional Planning Obligations with policy Strategy

2014 with policy. affordable dwellings 167 168 Adopted

Staf Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery fordshire

Number and type of rural buildings Developers Provide guidance and Core granted planning permission for RSLs advice conversion to residential re-use Support funding for rural

affordable housing Strategy Moorlands Net additional new build dwellings located in the countryside which do not constitute either ‘agricultural exceptions’ or affordable housing schemes Core

NE1 Biodiversity & Protecting and enhancing Change in areas of biodiversity L Determination of planning SMDC Determine planning Strategy Geological designated sites of importance including sites of applications. Parish Councils applications in accordance Resources international, national and international, national, regional or UK and Staffordshire Developers with policy local biodiversity and sub-regional or local significance Biodiversity Action Plan Staffordshire BAP Provide guidance and geological importance (COI – E2) Green Infrastructure Partnership advice - Strategy Support funding for March Natural England Number of nationally/locally important biodiversity schemes wildlife sites in the District reported Implement BAP as being in ‘poor condition’ Manage existing areas 2014 Proportion of local sites where possible conservation management has been or is being implemented (NI197)

Ensuring appropriate No. and type of schemes permitted L development produces a net producing a quantifiable net gain in gain in biodiversity biodiversity

Meeting the objectives and Biodiversity Action Reporting System M targets in the UK and Staffordshire Biodiversity Action Plan.

T1 Development and Reduce reliance on private % of journeys to work made by H Determination of planning SMDC Determine planning Sustainable car for travel journeys private car applications. applications in accordance Transport with policy Policy Principal Outcomes Indicators of Achievement Risk Principal Means of Delivery Agency Key Actions Required Implementation/ Delivery

Amount of new residential Staffs Local Transport Staffs CC Provide guidance and development within 30 minutes public Plan Developers advice transport time of: a GP; a hospital; a Parking Strategy Seek planning obligations primary school; a secondary school; to secure transport areas of employment; and a major measures retail centre. (NI175) Implement LTP

Promote sustainable No. and type of schemes permitted transport measures for incorporating green travel plan development generating significant demand for travel

T2 Other Supporting measures to No. and type of schemes L Determination of planning SMDC Determine planning Staf Sustainable promote better accessibility, implemented applications. Staffs CC applications in accordance fordshire Transport Measures create safer roads, reduce Staffs Local Transport Developers with policy traffic impact or facilitate Plan Seek planning obligations highway improvements Regional Transport to secure transport Strategy measures Implement LTP Moorlands Core Strategy Adopted - Core March Strategy 2014 169 Adopted Core Strategy

170 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Appendix B Strategic Development Areas Plan

Area Brief Description Justification Development Scale Known Constraints Known Infrastructure Phasing Implementation Approach Risk and Mix Requirements Ownership

LEEK - HOUSING BROAD AREAS

Urban Area, Development within Encourages 500 dwellings Varies according to Varies according to 2006 - 2026 Sites of 10+ dwellings to be M Leek the urban area development on individual sites individual sites, no allocated in Site Allocations distributed across brownfield sites Average 40dwgs/ha anticipated significant DPD. Smaller sites the town and within urban infrastructure Varies – identified in SHLAA. predominantly on areas to meet Range of small and large requirements predominantly brownfield sites but bulk of housing sites providing mix of private Implementation through some greenfield requirements dwelling types including planning permissions. sites conversions and Staf redevelopment opportunities. fordshire

Small Urban Development on Flexibility to 300 dwellings in total, Varies according to Varies according to Post 2016 Allocation in Site Allocations L Extensions, small sites on edge provide a more average 30 dwgs/ha, individual sites. individual sites, no DPD.

Moorlands Leek of the urban area, sustainable mix range of small sites anticipated significant predominantly of housing sites providing mix of dwelling infrastructure Varies - Implementation through greenfield open across the town types. requirements. predominantly planning permissions. countryside sites private

Core BIDDULPH - HOUSING BROAD AREAS

Urban Area, Development within Encourages 300 dwellings Varies according to Varies according to 2006 - 2026 Sites of 10+ dwellings to be M Strategy

Biddulph the urban area development on individual sites individual sites, no allocated in Site Allocations Adopted distributed across brownfield sites Average 40dwgs/ha anticipated significant DPD. Smaller sites the town and within urban infrastructure Varies - identified in SHLAA. predominantly on areas to meet Range of small and large requirements predominantly

- brownfield sites but bulk of housing sites providing mix of private Implementation through Core March some greenfield requirements dwelling types including planning permissions. sites. Bulk of conversions and development at redevelopment Strategy

2014 Uplands Mill. opportunities. 171 172 Adopted

Staf Area Brief Description Justification Development Scale Known Constraints Known Infrastructure Phasing Implementation Approach Risk and Mix Requirements fordshire Ownership Core Small Urban Development on Flexibility to 200 dwellings in total, Varies according to Varies according to Post 2016 Allocation in Site Allocations L Extensions, small sites on edge provide a more average 30 dwgs/ha, individual sites individual sites, no DPD.

Biddulph of the urban area, sustainable mix range of small sites anticipated significant Strategy Moorlands predominantly of housing sites providing mix of dwelling infrastructure Varies - Implementation through greenfield open across the town types. requirements. predominantly planning permissions countryside sites. private

Core West of Development on Sustainable 280 dwellings Important landscape Provision of access from 2021 - 2026 Allocation in Site Allocations L Bypass, edge of the urban location not in setting and edge to relief road. Open space DPD. Biddulph area. Greenfield Green Belt and Average 35dwgs/ha town. Designated and recreational Strategy open countryside within Local Plan Visual Open Space to provision. Private Implementation through site. settlement Large scale west of site. Requires Development Brief (to boundary close to development, careful consideration include detailed landscape town centre. predominantly family for impact on views assessment) and planning - housing including large across site. permissions. March element of affordable housing 2014 CHEADLE - HOUSING BROAD AREAS

Urban Area, Development within Encourages 400 dwellings Varies according to Varies according to 2006 - 2026 Sites of 10+ dwellings to be M Cheadle the urban area development on individual sites individual sites, no allocated in Site Allocations distributed across brownfield sites Average 40dwgs/ha anticipated significant DPD. Smaller sites the town and within urban infrastructure Varies – identified in SHLAA. predominantly on areas to meet Range of small and large requirements predominantly Implementation through brownfield sites but bulk of housing sites providing mix of private planning permissions. some greenfield requirements dwelling types including sites conversions and redevelopment opportunities. Area Brief Description Justification Development Scale Known Constraints Known Infrastructure Phasing Implementation Approach Risk and Mix Requirements Ownership

Small urban Development on Flexibility to 250 dwellings in total, Varies according to Varies according to Post 2016 Allocation in Site Allocations L Extensions, small sites on edge provide a more average 30 dwgs/ha, individual sites. individual sites, no DPD. Implementation Cheadle of the urban area, sustainable mix range of small sites anticipated significant through planning predominantly of housing sites providing mix of dwelling infrastructure Varies - permissions. greenfield open across the town. types. requirements. predominantly countryside sites. private

North of Development on Sustainable 240 dwellings Stream and potential Provision of access from 2021 - 2026 Allocation in Site Allocations L Cheadle edge of the urban location not in area of flooding existing highways. Open DPD. area. Greenfield Green Belt and 30 dwgs/ha through centre of site space and recreational open countryside partly within site. SBI and remnant provision. Possible Varies - Implementation through site. Local Plan Medium scale historic landscape to expansion of Nature predominantly Development Brief (to

Staf settlement development, mix of south. Public footpath Reserve. private include detailed landscape boundary; adjoins house types crosses site. assessment) and planning

fordshire existing housing; permissions permissions. potential for infrastructure benefits to neighbouring

Moorlands areas.

LEEK - EMPLOYMENT BROAD AREAS

Urban Area, Development Augments current Generally small scale for Varies according to Varies according to 2006 -2026 Larger sites allocated in Site L

Core Leek primarily in existing employment offices and light individual sites individual sites, no Allocations DPD. employment areas provision in industrial uses anticipated significant Implementation through and within or on sustainable infrastructure Varies planning permissions.

Strategy edge of town centre locations to meet requirements and predominantly some of the Adopted on brownfield sites. town's employment requirements - Core March Leekbrook, Development on Sustainable 8 hectares of general Watercourse and Off-site highway works 2011 - 2016 Requirement for reserved L Leek edge of the urban location adjoining industrial development potential area of comprising of signalizing matters approval and area. Greenfield existing flooding along of junction and footway compliance with conditions Strategy 2014 open countryside employment northern boundary of improvements; ecological Private and legal agreements. site. area. Has valid site. Tree cover and and landscaping 173 174 Adopted

Staf Area Brief Description Justification Development Scale Known Constraints Known Infrastructure Phasing Implementation Approach Risk and Mix Requirements fordshire Ownership Core outline planning footpath adjoining requirements. Identified permission. site. Limited access as being of high nature

Identified in through existing conservation value. Strategy Moorlands Employment industrial estate. Land Study as potential opportunity area.

Core Cornhill, Leek Vacant land Sustainable 3.7 hectares for mixed No direct highway Off-site highway works to 2006 - 2016 Allocation in Site Allocations M adjoining existing location adjoining use development access currently provide access. DPD. housing and existing including employment. available. Disused Investigation of longer Strategy employment areas employment railway line to west of term link across site to Private Implementation through within Settlement areas. Potential site. Residential Masterplan (to include Boundary of Local to provide link areas to north. Barnfield Road delivery of link road) and Plan road between Watercourse along subsequent planning

- A520 and A53. southern boundary. . Requires high quality permissions. March Identified in design. Employment Land Study as

2014 potential opportunity area.

BIDDULPH - EMPLOYMENT BROAD AREAS

Urban Area, Development Augments current Generally small scale for Varies according to Varies according to 2006 -2026 Larger sites allocated in Site L Biddulph primarily in existing employment offices and light individual sites individual sites, no Allocations DPD. employment areas provision in industrial uses anticipated significant Implementation through and within or on sustainable infrastructure Varies planning permissions. edge of town centre locations to meet requirements and predominantly some of the on brownfield sites. town's employment requirements

Victoria Development on Continuation of 6.4 hectares remaining No known constraints Serviced plots available 2006 - 2026 Requirement for reserved L Business edge of urban area existing to be developed matters approval for Park, – brownfield, former employment individual plots. Biddulph mining area development with Local Authority Area Brief Description Justification Development Scale Known Constraints Known Infrastructure Phasing Implementation Approach Risk and Mix Requirements Ownership

outline permission.

CHEADLE - EMPLOYMENT BROAD AREAS

Urban Area, Development Augments current Generally small scale for Varies according to Varies according to 2006 - 2026 Larger sites allocated in Site L Cheadle primarily in existing employment offices and light individual sites individual sites, no Allocations DPD. employment areas provision in industrial uses anticipated significant Implementation through and within or on sustainable infrastructure Varies planning permissions. edge of town centre locations to meet requirements and predominantly some of the on brownfield sites. town's employment Staf requirements fordshire New Haden / Development on Sustainable 3.8 hectares for general Narrow and restricted Off-site highways works 2016 - 2026 Allocation in Site Allocations M Brookhouses, edge of the urban location adjoining industrial development access to site. required to provide DPD. Cheadle area. Greenfield existing Watercourse and improved access from open countryside employment area trees along northern New Haden Road or Private Implementation through Moorlands site. within settlement boundary. Brookhouse Way planning permissions. boundary. Identified in . Employment Land Study as potential Core opportunity area.

Strategy Draycott Development on Sustainable 3.8 hectares for general Limited access to site Improved access required 2006 - 2016 Allocation in Site Allocations L Cross Road, edge of the urban location adjoining industrial development through existing from Draycott Cross Road DPD. Adopted Cheadle area. Brownfield, existing industrial area. Site previously opencast employment area conditions need . Private Implementation through workings. Part within settlement investigating. planning permissions. - Core March currently used for boundary. Woodland area to storage. Identified in north of site. Employment Land Study as Strategy 2014 potential opportunity area. 175 176 Adopted

Staf Area Brief Description Justification Development Scale Known Constraints Known Infrastructure Phasing Implementation Approach Risk and Mix Requirements fordshire Ownership Core MAJOR REGENERATION OPPORTUNITY AREAS

Cornhill, Leek Vacant land Opportunity for 3.7 hectares – mixed Access constraints. Provision of link road 2011 - 2016 Allocation in Site Allocations M Strategy Moorlands adjoining existing regeneration of use between Cheddleton DPD. housing and strategically Neighbouring housing Road roundabout and employment areas located area of Suitable uses include to north. Barnfield Road Local Authority Implementation through within Settlement underused land employment, tourism Development Brief and Boundary of Local to achieve mix of and leisure. . planning permissions. High

Core Plan uses and quality design required. potential to provide link road Strategy between A520 and A53.

Anzio Camp, Former army Opportunity for 17 hectares – mixed Impact on Peak Sensitive development 2011 - 2016 Allocation in Site Allocations M

- Blackshaw training base now regeneration of use. District and areas of required to minimise DPD. Implementation March Moor redundant with strategically nature conservation impact. Sustainable through Development Brief vacant buildings. located area of Suitable uses value. transport measures Private and planning permissions. poor employment, extra care required.

2014 environmental housing, tourist quality to achieve accommodation. mix of uses for this part of rural area.

Bolton Historic copper Opportunity for 15.4 hectares – mixed Impact on Churnet Sensitive development 2011 - 2026 Allocation in Site Allocations M Copperworks, factory now largely regeneration of use. Valley and areas of required to minimise DPD. Implementation Froghall closed and strategically nature conservation. impact. Sustainable through Churnet Valley derelict. Partially located area of Suitable uses Significant site transport measures Private Masterplan, Development demolished poor employment, residential, contamination. required including off-site Brief and planning environmental tourist-related retail and highway improvements. permissions. quality to achieve accommodation, leisure. mix of uses for this part of rural area. Strategic location within Churnet Valley. Appendix C Risk Analysis

The following table considers those outcomes identified as a medium and high risk in the Implementation & Monitoring Plan and considers the causes of the risk arising and the actions necessary to manage and mitigate that risk.

Potential Risk Impact of Risk on Causes of Risk Arising Actions to Manage/Mitigate Risk Core Strategy

IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING PLAN

6000 dwellings not being completed by H Changes to the housing market and the local Housing Delivery SPD will set out an Implementation Strategy to ensure 2026 economy there is flexibility to deliver the housing targets and requirements in Unforeseen constraints on allocated sites accordance with the Core Strategy. Annual housing development rate not M Unanticipated availability of large windfall Annual Monitoring Report will monitor progress and identify obstacles being in accordance with phasing in sites and constraints to housing delivery and the need for mitigating measures Staf Policy SS2 Changes in national or regional targets and to address any risks arising and the nature of those measures. developer requirements Measures to restrain development may include refusing planning fordshire 5 years of deliverable housing land not H permissions or imposing conditions to ensure concentrations of being available at all times development do not occur Measures to increase development may include bringing forward Distribution of housing development not L development on allocated sites, permitting new unidentified sites, being in accordance with policy SS3. Moorlands engaging with developers to facilitate development, identifying new sites through a review of the Site Allocations DPD or using CPO powers. Windfall development exceeding the L Review developer contributions allowances in policy SS4 Review availability of sites in SHLAA

Net dwelling completions for each town M Core and the rural areas not being achieved by 2026 Strategy

24 hectares of employment land not H Changes to the local economy Annual Monitoring Report will monitor progress and identify obstacles Adopted being provided Unforeseen constraints on allocated sites and constraints to employment land delivery and the need for mitigating Unanticipated availability of large windfall measures to address any risks arising and the nature of those 6 hectares of deliverable employment M sites measures. -

land not being available at all times Measures may include bringing forward development on allocated sites, Core March Changes in national or regional targets and developer requirements permitting new unidentified sites, engaging with developers to facilitate Distribution of employment development L development, identifying new sites through a review of the Site

not being in accordance with policy SS3. Allocations DPD or using CPO powers. Strategy 2014 Act in partnership with other agencies to identify obstacles and bring forward sites for development. 177 178 Adopted

Staf Potential Risk Impact of Risk on Causes of Risk Arising Actions to Manage/Mitigate Risk Core Strategy fordshire

Additional employment land requirements M Core for each town and the rural areas not being achieved by 2026 Strategy Moorlands Additional retail floorspace requirements M Changes in local economy and retail Annual Monitoring Report will monitor progress and identify obstacles for Leek and Cheadle not being achieved expenditure patterns and constraints to retail floorspace delivery and the need for mitigating Unforeseen infrastructure constraints on measures to address any risks arising and the nature of those allocated sites measures. Impact of other retail development Measures may include bringing forward development on allocated sites,

Core permitting new unidentified sites, engaging with developers to facilitate development, identifying new sites through a review of the Masterplans and Site Allocations DPD or using CPO powers. Strategy Review the Retail Study to identify changes in retail expenditure patterns. Monitor and respond to changes in retail provision which may impact on existing centres or undermine future provision - March Provision of facilities and sites for new L Inability to deliver sufficient appropriate new Review suitability of sites and premises identified through Site start-up businesses and the expansion sites and premises Allocations DPD of the service sector not being achieved Inability to attract new businesses/developers Facilitate further development on appropriate windfall sites 2014 in Leek Loss of existing sites and premises Identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract businesses Review priorities and measures in Economic Development Strategy Consider measures to help retain existing sites in employment use

Expansion of Leek town centre not being M Changes in local economy Review suitability of sites and premises identified through Masterplan achieved Inability to attract new retailers/developers and Site Allocations DPD Competition from other centres Facilitate further development on appropriate windfall sites Loss of existing retailers Identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract retailers Review priorities and measures in Masterplan Consider measures to help retain existing retailers

Provision of a new community arts and L Inability to fund delivery of facility Consider other sources of funding cultural facility not being delivered for Land not made available Consider use of CPO powers Leek Consider alternative means of providing facilities Potential Risk Impact of Risk on Causes of Risk Arising Actions to Manage/Mitigate Risk Core Strategy

Provision of additional visitor L Inability to deliver sufficient appropriate new Review suitability of sites and premises identified through Site accommodation in Leek not being sites and premises Allocations DPD achieved Inability to attract new operators Facilitate further development on appropriate windfall sites Identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract operators Review priorities and measures in Tourism Strategy Consider measures to help retain existing sites in employment use

Improvement of Schindler properties not L Inability to fund improvements On-going monitoring of conditions and improvements to housing stock being achieved in Biddulph East Investigate further initiatives to fund improvements

Provision of new employment sites at H Unforeseen infrastructure constraints on Review suitability of sites identified through Site Allocations DPD Cheadle not being delivered allocated sites Identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract developers

Staf Land not made available and provide infrastructure Engage with appropriate agencies and bodies to investigate measures

fordshire to overcome obstacles Consider use of CPO powers

Provision of facilities and sites for new L Inability to deliver sufficient appropriate new Review suitability of sites and premises identified through Site start-up businesses not being achieved sites and premises Allocations DPD Moorlands in Cheadle Inability to attract new businesses/developers Facilitate further development on appropriate windfall sites Loss of existing sites and premises Identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract businesses Review priorities and measures in Economic Development Strategy Consider measures to help retain existing sites in employment use Core Expansion of Cheadle town centre not H Changes in local economy Review suitability of sites and premises identified through Masterplan being achieved Inability to attract new retailers/developers and Site Allocations DPD Strategy

Competition from other centres Facilitate further development on appropriate windfall sites Adopted Loss of existing retailers Identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract retailers Review priorities and measures in Masterplan Consider measures to help retain existing retailers - Core March Reduction in levels of traffic in Cheadle M Non-delivery of southern link road Monitor traffic levels and identify causes town centre not being achieved Excessive traffic generation from Complete traffic studies development sites Strategy 2014 Investigate alternative transport strategies Increased levels of through traffic Identify additional sources of funding for road measures through Local Transport Plan and CIL 179 180 Adopted

Staf Potential Risk Impact of Risk on Causes of Risk Arising Actions to Manage/Mitigate Risk Core Strategy fordshire

No decrease in range of services and L Changes in local economy Engage with service providers to identify obstacles and investigate Core facilities provided in larger villages not Inability to attract new business and service alternative means of support being achieved operators Identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract businesses

and retain facilities Strategy

Moorlands Competition from other uses Changes in public sector funding and support Investigate alternative means of delivering services

Blythe Bridge RIS not being developed M Difficulty in attracting appropriate businesses Review range of uses and infrastructure requirements through SPD for high quality employment uses to meet Viability of development Engage with developer, landowner, appropriate agencies and bodies regional economic needs Core Lack of commitment from to identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract landowner/developer appropriate businesses

Strategy Low percentage of housing development H Unforeseen constraints on pdl sites Housing Delivery SPD will set out an Implementation Strategy to ensure on PDL sites Unanticipated availability of further greenfield there is flexibility to deliver the housing pdl targets and requirements windfall sites in accordance with the Core Strategy. Changes in national or regional targets and Annual Monitoring Report will monitor progress and identify obstacles

- developer requirements and constraints to housing delivery on pdl sites and the need for March mitigating measures to address any risks arising and the nature of those measures. Consider restraining development on greenfield sites by refusing

2014 planning permissions or imposing conditions Review housing range/density, phasing and developer contributions on pdl sites Engage with developer, landowner, appropriate agencies and bodies to investigate measures to overcome obstacles

Increase in provision of renewable energy M Viability of schemes Annual Monitoring Report will monitor progress and identify obstacles schemes not being achieved Difficulties in finding suitable sites and constraints to providing renewable energy schemes. Supply chain limitations Identify other sources of funding to assist in development and running Grid capacity limitations of schemes Investigate availability of sites and suitable alternative technologies Changes in national, regional or local legislation, policy or targets Consider promoting and safeguarding sites through SPD

New schemes not achieving high M Viability of schemes Annual Monitoring Report will monitor progress and identify obstacles sustainable design and construction Lack of awareness and constraints to meeting sustainable design and construction requirements in accordance with policies Changes in national, regional or local requirements. SD1 and SD3 legislation, policy or targets Investigate other initiatives to increase awareness of requirements Potential Risk Impact of Risk on Causes of Risk Arising Actions to Manage/Mitigate Risk Core Strategy

Consider’ best practice’ examples to raise standards Engage with developer, landowner, appropriate agencies and bodies to investigate measures to overcome obstacles

Improvement in local economy in terms M Changes in national economy Annual Monitoring Report will monitor local economic changes and of reduced unemployment rates and Failure to attract suitable businesses identify obstacles and constraints. comparatively higher earnings not being Competition from other areas Review suitability of sites and premises identified through Site achieved Lack of availability of suitable sites and Allocations DPD premises Identify available sources of funding/incentives to support and attract businesses Review priorities and measures in Economic Development Strategy Monitor and respond to changes in the wider economy and employment provision elsewhere which may impact on existing businesses in the Staf District or undermine future provision fordshire Local labour or business agreements not L Lack of support from developers and Engage with developer, business, appropriate agencies and bodies to being achieved in accordance with policy businesses increase awareness and encourage their use E1

Moorlands Existing employment sites not being M Viability of retaining sites Annual Monitoring Report will monitor progress and identify obstacles safeguarded in accordance with policy Difficulty in attracting suitable businesses and constraints to employment provision. E2 Competition from alternative uses Identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract developers and businesses Loss of employment provision not being M Engage with developer, landowner, appropriate agencies and bodies minimised to investigate measures to overcome obstacles Core Consider potential for mixed use redevelopment

Strategy Mix of housing sizes, types and tenure in H Changes to the housing market Annual Monitoring Report will monitor progress and identify obstacles Adopted new housing schemes not meeting Viability of schemes and constraints to housing delivery and the need for mitigating measures identified local needs Unforeseen constraints on allocated sites to address any risks arising and the nature of those measures. Site circumstances Review needs through SHMA or local needs surveys, taking account

- of local supply of housing from other sources and market demand Core March Engage with developers, landowners and local estate agents to investigate measures to overcome obstacles to delivering mix of housing on sites Strategy

2014 Consider delivering a mix of housing across wider area 181 182 Adopted

Staf Potential Risk Impact of Risk on Causes of Risk Arising Actions to Manage/Mitigate Risk Core Strategy fordshire

New schemes not providing dwellings M Viability of schemes Annual Monitoring Report will monitor progress and identify obstacles Core built to ‘Lifetime Homes’ standard in Lack of awareness and constraints to meeting Lifetime Homes standard. accordance with policy H1 Changes in national, regional or local Investigate other initiatives to increase awareness of requirements Strategy

Moorlands legislation, policy or targets Consider’ best practice’ examples to raise standards Engage with developer, landowner, appropriate agencies and bodies to investigate measures to overcome obstacles

New schemes not providing affordable H Changes to the housing and financial market Annual Monitoring Report will monitor progress and identify obstacles housing in accordance with policy H2 and constraints to meeting affordable housing targets.

Core Viability of schemes Unforeseen constraints on allocated sites Engage with developers and RSLs to identify obstacles and facilitate Site circumstances the provision of affordable housing.

Strategy Investigate other sources of funding or deferred contributions to increase Lack of funding for RSLs viability of schemes Consider financial contributions in lieu of on-site provision

- Provision of 100% affordable housing M Changes to the housing and financial market Annual Monitoring Report will monitor progress and identify obstacles March schemes in appropriate locations not Viability of schemes and constraints to meeting affordable housing targets. being achieved Lack of availability of sites Undertake appropriate local needs surveys to justify need Lack of funding for RSLs Engage with landowners, Parish Councils and RSLs to identify obstacles 2014 and facilitate the provision of affordable housing. Investigate other sources of funding to increase viability of schemes Consider use of CPO powers to obtain sites

Inadequate provision of gypsy and M Lack of availability of sites Engage with landowners, Parish Councils and RSLs to identify obstacles traveller pitches to meet identified need Changes in national, regional or local and facilitate the delivery of suitable sites. legislation, policy or targets Review GTAA to justify need. Consider use of CPO powers to obtain sites.

Enhanced vitality and viability of the town M Changes in local economy and retail Annual Monitoring Report will monitor progress and identify obstacles centres not being achieved expenditure patterns and constraints to achieving enhanced vitality and viability in town Inability to attract new retailers centres. New retail development and other key M Loss of existing retailers Review the Retail Study to identify changes in retail expenditure town centre uses not being concentrated Lack of investment in shopping environment, patterns. within the town centres. access and parking Review priorities and measures in Masterplan Non-delivery of new facilities Identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract retailers Potential Risk Impact of Risk on Causes of Risk Arising Actions to Manage/Mitigate Risk Core Strategy

Enhancement of local distinctiveness by L Consider measures to help retain existing retailers supporting the attraction and retention of Consider measures to market and promote town centre independent retailers not being achieved Increase public investment in town centres

Protection of the retail function at the M heart of the town centres not being achieved.

Provision of new major retail development H Changes in local economy and retail Review scale of development and infrastructure requirements through in Leek and Cheadle not being achieved expenditure patterns Masterplans/SPDs in accordance with policy S2. Viability of schemes Identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract developers Difficulty in attracting developer/businesses and provide infrastructure Unforeseen infrastructure constraints on Engage with developer, landowner, appropriate agencies and bodies

Staf allocated sites to investigate measures to overcome obstacles Impact of other retail development Review the Retail Study to identify changes in retail expenditure patterns fordshire Monitor and respond to changes in retail provision elsewhere which may impact on delivery of schemes

Not achieving development which is well M Viability of schemes Promote use of Design SPD designed and reinforcing local

Moorlands Lack of awareness Consider’ best practice’ examples to raise standards distinctiveness Site circumstances Engage with developer, landowner, appropriate agencies and bodies to investigate measures to overcome obstacles and give guidance Investigate other initiatives to increase awareness of requirements

Core Protection, retention or enhancement of M Changes in local economy Engage with facility operators, Parish Councils and local businesses existing community facilities not being Viability of facilities to identify obstacles and investigate alternative means of support achieved Inability to attract new facilities and service Identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract operators Strategy and retain facilities

operators Adopted Competition from other uses Investigate alternative or more effective means of delivering facilities Changes in public sector funding and support and services e.g. joint use - Core

March The objectives and targets in the UK and L Lack of resources to create and manage Identify sources of funding/incentives to support schemes Staffordshire Biodiversity Action Plan not schemes Engage with developer, landowner, appropriate agencies and bodies being met Lack of awareness to investigate measures to overcome obstacles and give guidance and Site circumstances advice Strategy 2014 Investigate other initiatives to increase awareness of requirements 183 184 Adopted

Staf Potential Risk Impact of Risk on Causes of Risk Arising Actions to Manage/Mitigate Risk Core Strategy fordshire

Reduced reliance on private car for travel M Changes in travel patterns Annual Monitoring Report will monitor progress and identify obstacles Core journeys not being achieved Lack of funding for public transport services and constraints to reducing reliance on private car. Viability of schemes requiring sustainable Engage with developer, appropriate agencies and bodies to investigate Sustainable transport measures not being L measures to overcome obstacles and support sustainable transport Strategy

Moorlands transport measures promoted for development generating Lack of S106 funding measures significant demand for travel Investigate initiatives to promote use of travel plans Actively engage with operators and other bodies to maximise external funding opportunities Core Strategy - March 2014 The following table considers those outcomes identified as a medium and high risk in the Strategic Development Areas Plan and considers the causes of the risk arising and the actions necessary to manage and mitigate that risk.

Potential Risk Impact of Risk on Core Strategy Causes of Risk Arising Actions to Manage/Mitigate Risk

STRATEGIC DEVELOPMENT AREAS PLAN

Housing development within urban areas in H Viability of sites Review housing range/density, phasing Leek, Biddulph and Cheadle not delivered Difficulty in attracting developers and developer contributions on allocated Sites not made available sites Unforeseen constraints on sites Engage with developers, landowners, appropriate agencies and bodies to investigate measures to overcome obstacles on allocated sites Identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract developers Staf Identify potential for other urban sites coming forward through review of SHLAA fordshire Increase permissions on unidentified sites

Regeneration proposals at Cornhill not being H Viability of schemes Review range of uses and infrastructure delivered in accordance with policy SS5a Difficulty in attracting requirements through Masterplans/SPDs Moorlands developer/businesses Identify sources of funding/incentives to Unforeseen constraints on sites support and attract developers and provide infrastructure Engage with developer, landowner, appropriate agencies and bodies to

Core investigate measures to overcome obstacles Strategy

Redevelopment of Bolton Copperworks, Froghall H Viability of schemes Review range of uses and infrastructure Adopted and Difficulty in attracting requirements through Masterplans/SPDs developer/businesses Identify sources of funding/incentives to Anzio Camp, Blackshaw Moor not delivered Unforeseen constraints on sites support and attract developers and - provide infrastructure Core March Engage with developer, landowner, appropriate agencies and bodies to

investigate measures to overcome Strategy

2014 obstacles 185 186 Adopted

Staf Employment development at New H Viability of delivering associated link road Consider alternative means of access to Haden/Brookhouses, Cheadle not delivered Difficulty in attracting site fordshire developer/businesses Review range of uses and infrastructure

Unforeseen constraints on site requirements Core Identify sources of funding/incentives to support and attract developers and

businesses Strategy Moorlands Engage with developer, landowner, appropriate agencies and bodies to investigate measures to overcome obstacles Core Strategy - March 2014 Appendix D Relationship of Key Policies

Core Strategy Policy Saved Local Plan Policies 1 Biddulph AAP Policies

Spatial Strategy

SS1

SS1a

SS2

SS3

SS4 Staf SS5 H4 fordshire SS5a E1

SS5b STRAT1, STRAT2, STRAT4, DS1, DS2, DS3,DS4, DS5,DS6, DS7, PR1, PR2, PR3, T1, T2, T3, T4 Moorlands SS5c H3, E3, T13

SS6 H4

Core SS6a

SS6b N3 Strategy Adopted SS6c N2, N7, N11, H6, H15, T13, R12, R15, R21, R22, R23, R24

SS7 R12, R15, R17, R18, R19, R20 - Core March SS8 E2

Sustainable Development Strategy 2014 SD1 STRAT6 187 188 Adopted

1 Staf Core Strategy Policy Saved Local Plan Policies Biddulph AAP Policies

fordshire SD2 Core SD3

SD4 Strategy Moorlands

Economy & Employment

E1 H19, E9, E10

Core E2 E7

E3 R12, R15, R17, R18, R19, R20 Strategy

Housing

H1 - March H2 H14, H15, H16

H3 2014

Town Centre & Retailing

TCR1 B14, B15, S7 STRAT1, STRAT2, START3

TCR2

Design & Conservation

DC1 B13

DC2 B18

DC3 N8, N9, N23, R5

Sustainable Communities

C1 A1 STRAT5 Core Strategy Policy Saved Local Plan Policies 1 Biddulph AAP Policies

C2 R1, R2

Rural

R1 B21, B22, H17, E3, E4

R2 B21, H6, H7, H8, H9, H10, H11, H12,H13

Natural Environment

NE1 N13, N14, N15, N17, N18, N22

Transport

Staf T1 T14

fordshire T2 T6,T7, T13

Notes

Moorlands 1. These policies are replaced by the adopted Core Strategy (see Appendix H). Core Strategy Adopted - Core March Strategy 2014 189 Adopted Core Strategy

190 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Appendix E Core Strategy Links

This appendix shows how the Core Strategy objectives have been derived from the challenges and vision and how they relate to the key outcomes of the Sustainable Community Strategy and the Corporate Plan.

CORE STRATEGY SUSTAINABLE COMMUNITY CORPORATE PLAN STRATEGY

Challenges Vision Spatial Objectives (SO) Key Outcomes Priority Outcomes

Accommodating and delivering growth Recognise the Moorlands as a vital 1. Make provision for overall land Economic Regeneration Improve the part of N Staffordshire use supply of quality Strengthening the District’s affordable sub-regional role housing

Staf Sustainable towns and rural fordshire communities

Tackling climate change All development will be of a high 2. Mitigate the adverse effects of Environment & Climate Sustainable

Moorlands standard and more sustainable climate change Change towns and rural Making travel more sustainable communities

Accommodating and delivering growth Recognise the Moorlands as a vital 3. Develop the economy, meet local Economic Regeneration Sustainable

Core part of N Staffordshire employment needs towns and rural Strengthening the District’s communities sub-regional role Have sustainable and balanced urban Strategy

and rural communities Adopted Fostering business growth and economic sustainability Economy will have undergone significant change - Core March Needs of all sectors will be better met Strategy 2014 191 192 Adopted

Staf Accommodating and delivering growth Have sustainable and balanced urban 4. Provide new housing Children and Young people Improve the and rural communities supply of quality fordshire Adapting to changes in population Older people and adults at affordable housing structure Needs of all sectors will be better met risk of exclusion Core

Improving the housing market Strategy Moorlands

Fostering business growth and Tourism will be a key element 5. Ensure vitality and viability of the Economic Regeneration Sustainable economic sustainability towns towns and rural Market towns will remain the focus of communities

Core Creating thriving, distinctive market the Moorlands towns Improve the supply of quality

Strategy affordable housing

- Creating healthy and sustainable Have sustainable and balanced urban 6. Sustainable rural settlements and Stronger, Safer Improved health March communities and rural communities access to services Communities and community safety Improving the housing market Needs of all sectors will be better met Economic Regeneration

2014 Sustainable Fostering business growth and towns and rural economic sustainability communities

Tackling social exclusion and economic decline in the rural areas

Strengthening the District’s Recognise the Moorlands as a vital 7. Support tourism, culture, Older people and adults at Sustainable sub-regional role part of N Staffordshire recreation and leisure risk of exclusion towns and rural opportunities communities Creating healthy and sustainable Tourism will be a key element Children and Young people communities Improved health Needs of all sectors will be better met Stronger, Safer and community Adapting to changes in population Communities safety

Fostering business growth and Economic Regeneration economic sustainability structure Strengthening the District’s Recognise the Moorlands as a vital 8. Promote local distinctiveness Environment & Climate Sustainable sub-regional role part of N Staffordshire Change towns and rural communities Creating thriving, distinctive market Tourism will be a key element Economic Regeneration towns Improve the All development will be of a high supply of quality standard and more sustainable affordable housing

Strengthening the District’s Recognise the Moorlands as a vital 9. Protect and improve the Environment & Climate Sustainable sub-regional role part of N Staffordshire countryside Change towns and rural communities Tackling social exclusion and All development will be of a high economic decline in the rural areas standard and more sustainable

Staf Protecting and enhancing the distinctive quality of the environment fordshire

Creating healthy and sustainable Have sustainable and balanced urban 10. Sustainable, inclusive, healthy and Stronger, Safer Improved health communities and rural communities safe communities Communities and community

Moorlands safety Adapting to changes in population Needs of all sectors will be better met structure

Improving the housing market Core Tackling social exclusion and economic decline in the rural areas Strategy Adopted

Creating healthy and sustainable All development will be of a high 11. To reduce the need to travel or Economic Regeneration Improved health communities standard and more sustainable make it safer and easier to travel and community - by more sustainable forms of safety Core

March Environment & Climate Tackling climate change transport Change Sustainable Making travel more sustainable towns and rural Strategy 2014 communities 193 Adopted Core Strategy

194 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Appendix F Development Requirements Summary

Sub-area Housing Employment Retail 2006 – 2026 Annualised Amount to be 2006 – 2026 Additional Convenience and Requirement development Rate Allocated on New Requirement Comparison Goods Floorspace Sites Leek 1800 90 797 7.2 hectares 3,000m2 convenience,

12,000 m2 comparison (of which 50% is for bulky goods) Biddulph 1200 60 813 4.8 hectares AAP Proposals Staf fordshire Cheadle 1320 66 1080 4.8 hectares 2,500m2 convenience,

3,000 m2 comparison (of which 50% Moorlands is for bulky goods) Rural 1680 84 928 7.2 hectares Core

DISTRICT TOTAL 6000 300 3618 Strategy Adopted - Core March Strategy 2014 195 Adopted Core Strategy

196 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Appendix G Housing Trajectory Staf fordshire Moorlands Core Strategy Adopted - Core March Strategy 2014 197 198 Adopted Staf

fordshire The Housing Trajectory tracks the

provision of housing supply over the Core 450 lifespan of the LDF (2006-2026). The Trajectory and managed delivery target, 2006/7 to 2025/26

purpose of the Housing Trajectory is to Strategy Moorlands 400 highlight the robustness and soundness

of the overall housing strategy in the Core 350 Strategy and how it is likely to perform in relation to the housing requirements. It 300 Core includes a projected contribution from current commitments and an anticipated 250 Strategy contribution from future allocations and 420 420 200 400 400 380 380 390 small sites. 350 360 330 340 340 150

- The table sets out the detailed figures for 260 261 270

March 236 each year of the plan period and the 100 185 relevant phases. The graph illustrates 50 110 2014 how many dwellings above or below the 96 71 target rate the housing supply is at any point in time. It also shows how the 0 Council will need to manage development over the course of the plan period in order 2006/07 2007/08 2008/09 2009/10 2010/11 2011/12 2012/13 2013/14 2014/15 2015/16 2016/17 2017/18 2018/19 2019/20 2020/21 2021/22 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 2025/26 to achieve the target for each phase.

Actual dwellings completed (net) Projected completions (net) Target Managed Delivery Target

Housing Trajectory March 2013 PHASE 1 (2006 – 2011) PHASE 2 (2011 – 2016) PHASE 3 (2016 – 2021) PHASE 4 (2021 – 2026) TOTAL

2006/ 2007/ 2008/ 2009/ 2010/ 2011/ 2012/ 2013/ 2014/ 2015/ 2016 2017/ 2018/ 2019/ 2020/ 2021/ 2022/ 2023/ 2024/ 2025/

2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 20/17 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 YEAR

1.Actual completions 260 261 236 185 110 71 96 1219

2. Projected completions 270 330 340 180 43 1163 on committed sites

3. Projected completions 121 277 330 350 350 370 380 380 400 400 3358 on allocated sites

4. Projected completions 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 500

Staf on small sites

fordshire 5. Slippage Allowance -11 -20 -20 -20 -20 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -241

6. Total projected 270 330 340 340 350 360 380 380 390 400 400 420 420 5999 completions

Moorlands 7. Phased cumulative 260 521 757 942 1052 71 167 437 767 1107 340 690 1050 1430 1810 390 790 1190 1610 2030 5999 completions

8. Annual average 210 210 210 210 210 221 221 221 221 221 362 362 362 362 362 406 406 406 406 406 300 completions Core 9. LDF annual average 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 360 360 360 360 360 400 400 400 400 400 300 target Strategy Adopted 10. Cumulative LDF 220 440 660 880 1100 220 440 660 880 1100 360 720 1080 1440 1800 400 800 1200 1600 2000 6000 target

- 11. Cumulative +40 +81 +97 +62 -48 -149 -273 -223 -113 +7 -20 -30 -30 -10 +10 -10 -10 -10 +10 +30 -1 Core March excess/shortfall

12. Managed annual 280 310 343 350 355 360 365 370 380 390 400 410 420 Strategy

2014 completions target 199 200 Adopted

Staf Explanatory Notes for Rows:

st st fordshire 1. All recorded net completions from 1 April to 31 March

2. Anticipated net completions from sites under construction or with planning permission as at 31st March 2013 Core 3. Anticipated net completions from future allocations (based on estimated capacity of broad locations in towns as identified in policies SS5a, SS5b Strategy

Moorlands and SS5c and anticipated completions from likely allocations in rural areas) 4. Anticipated net completions from small sites 5. Allowance for sites not delivering full potential 6. Rows 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5

Core 7. Total anticipated completions (row 6) added cumulatively over the phase 8. Total anticipated completions for the phase divided by 5 (number of years in the phase)

Strategy 9. Annual target for the phase as set out in policy SS2 10. Annual target for net completions (row 9) added cumulatively over the phase 11. Difference between the cumulative anticipated completions (row 7) and the cumulative target completions (row 10) for the phase

- 12. Net completions required in order to meet the total requirement for the phase taking into account past and projected completions March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Appendix H List of Saved policies in Adopted Local Plan to be Replaced

The table below identifies directly relevant policies which would be replaced by policies in the Core Strategy.

Local Plan Policy Name Core Strategy Saved Policy Replacement Policy Number Number

N2 The Green Belt R1/SS6c/E3

N3 Limited Village Infilling Only SS6B

N7 Green Belt (Design) DC1/DC3/R1/SS6c/SS6a

N8 The Special Landscape Area DC1/DC3/R1/SS7/SS6c/SS6a

N9 The Special Landscape Area DC1/DC3/R1/SS6c/SS7

N11 The PeakNational Park SS6C/SD1/DC3

N13 Designated Nature Conservation Sites NE1/R1

N14 Designated Nature Conservation Sites NE1/R1

N15 Designated Nature Conservation Sites NE1/R1

N17 Unimproved Grasslands NE1/R1

N18 Lowland Heaths NE1/R1

N22 Hedgerows NE1/R1

N23 Boundary Walls DC1/DC2/DC3

N25 Common Land C1/C2

N26 Common Land C2

B13 Design DC1/DC2/DC3

B14 Shop Front Design DC1/DC2/TCR1/C1

B15 Shop Front Design TCR1

B18 Advertisements DC1/DC2

B21 Conversion Of Rural Buildings R1/R2/DC2

B22 Stables And Ancillary Buildings DC3

H3 Housing - Allocations SS2/SS3/SS4/SS5/

SS5a,b,c/SS6a/SS6c

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 201 Adopted Core Strategy

Local Plan Policy Name Core Strategy Saved Policy Replacement Policy Number Number

H4 Town and Village Development Boundaries H1/R2/SS4/SS5a,b,c/SS6/

SS6a/SS6b/ SS6c/DC1

H6 Infilling in the Countryside H1/R2/ SS6b

H7 Residential Development in Open R2/SS6b Countryside

H8 New Agricultural Dwelling on Existing Farm R2/SS6c

H9 Dwelling for New Agricultural Activity R2/SS6c

H10 Permanent Dwelling for New Agricultural R2/SS6c Activity

H11 Replacement and Renovation of Existing R2/DC2 Dwellings

H12 Replacement and Renovation of Existing R2/DC1/DC2 Dwellings

H13 Extensions to Existing Dwellings DC1/R2

H14 Housing For Local Needs SS1/SS2/SS5/SS5a,b,c/SS6/

SS6a,b,c/H1/H2/R1

H15 Affordable Housing –Exceptions Sites R2/H2/H1//SS2/SS5/

SS5a,b,c/SS6/SS6a,b,c

H16 Affordable Housing – Towns and Larger SS1/SS2/SS5/SS5a,b,c/SS6/ Villages SS6a,b,c/H1/H2

H17 Residential Nursing and Care Homes in the DC1 Countryside

H19 Other Development in Residential Areas E1/E2/TCR2/C1

E1 New Employment Sites SS2/SS3/SS5/SS5a,b,c/SS6/

SS6a/SS6/ SS8/E1

E2 Premium Employment Site SS8

E3 Agriculture R1/SS6c/NE1/DC3/

SD1/E3

202 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Local Plan Policy Name Core Strategy Saved Policy Replacement Policy Number Number

E4 Agriculture DC3/DC1/SS6C/R1

E7 Development Policies E2/R2/E1/R1

E9 Development Policies E1/DC1

E10 Development Policies DC1/T1/SD1/SS7/SS8/E1

T6 Railways T2

T7 Railways T2

T13 Roads T2/SS7

T14 Roads T1/E1/DC3/R1

S7 Non-Retail Uses in Town Centres TCR1

R1 Open Space in Settlements C2/SS5a,b,c

R2 Open Space in Settlements C2/SS5a,b,c

R5 Visual Open Space DC3/C2/SS5a,b,c

R12 The CaldonCanal SS7/R1/E3

R15 ChurnetValley Railway SS7/E3/R1

R17 Tourism (Accommodation) R1 E3/SS7/SS6c

R18 Self-Catering Accommodation R1/R2/E3

R19 Holiday Caravanning and Camping R1/E3

R20 Holiday Caravanning and Camping R1/E3

R21 AltonTowersLeisurePark DC2/SS7

R22 AltonTowersLeisurePark DC1/2/3

SS7

R23 AltonTowersLeisurePark DC1/2/3

SS7

R24 AltonTowers Access Road T2/SS7

F1 Education C1

A1 Developer Contributions T1/SD1/C1/C2/H2

Table H.1

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 203 Adopted Core Strategy

204 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Appendix I Glossary

Affordable Housing – defined in NPPF as including ‘social rented, affordable rented and intermediate housing, provided to specified eligible households whose needs are not met by the market.’ The ‘Housing Delivery’ SPD will define this more precisely.

Amenity - the pleasant or normally satisfactory aspects of a location which contribute to its overall character and enjoyment. It includes all forms of amenity (e.g. visual, noise or smell).

Annual Monitoring Report (AMR) – annual report monitoring the implementation of the Local Development Scheme and the extent to which policies in the Local Development Plan Documents are being achieved.

Appropriate Assessment - an assessment of plans that could affect the most seriously threatened habitats and species across Europe (Special Protection Areas or Special Areas of Conservation) as required by Article 6(3) of the European Habitats Directive with the aim of protecting these from harm.

Area Action Plan (AAP) – introduced in the 2004 Planning & Compulsory Purchase Act and designed to facilitate the regeneration of a small defined area. An AAP includes planning policies against which all proposals within it will be assessed, and a vision or strategy with which to coordinate the work of other partner organizations.

Biodiversity Action Plan (BAP) – a document that details action to be undertaken to conserve any number of species or habitats in a given area. In response to European legislation there is a UK-wide BAP. Consequently Staffordshire County Council has produced a Biodiversity Action Plan for Staffordshire, sometimes called the ‘Local’ BAP.

Biodiversity Enhancement Areas or Areas for Concentrated Biodiversity Enhancement (BEAs) – these are wider geographic areas containing important nature conservation areas (not necessarily designated). The rationale behind BEAs is to protect wider areas over and above the boundaries of individual sites, as a strategic, holistic approach to biodiversity protection. There are 14 identified BEAs within the West Midlands, including one covering the majority of the Staffordshire Moorlands. Policy approaches typically involve extending existing habitats into one another; and the ‘buffering’ of the exteriors of vulnerable sites from development.

Brownfield – see ‘Previously Developed Land’.

Bulky Goods Retail - Large stores specialising in the sale of household goods (such as carpets, furniture and electrical goods), DIY items and other ranges of goods, catering mainly for car-borne customers

Code for Sustainable Homes - an environmental assessment method for rating and certifying the performance of new homes. It is a national standard for use in the design and construction of new homes with a view to encouraging continuous improvement in sustainable home building.

Commuted Sum– a financial obligation upon a developer to address some shortfall that the development would create, where the scheme would otherwise still be acceptable. For example this might arise where some physical element should be accommodated on-site, but for some reason cannot, e.g. highway improvements, affordable housing provision, play space; or in other circumstances e.g. contributions to the local educational authority for additional schooling capacity.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 205 Adopted Core Strategy

Community Facilities – facilities which are open to and provided for the health, welfare, social, educational, leisure and cultural needs of the community. Includes village/community halls, local convenience stores, post offices, schools, colleges, nurseries, places of worship, health services, libraries, public houses, theatres, arts centres.

Conservation Area – area of special architectural or historic interest, the character and appearance of which should be protected. Local Planning Authorities have a duty to designate such areas where appropriate.

Corporate Plan – sets out how the authority intends to improve services. It does this by outlining a vision, and cascading aims and objectives; followed by proposed ‘actions’ to achieve targets (with an elaboration as to how this will be measured).

Cultural Facilities – Any building or structure used for programs or activities involving the arts. Includes theatres, museums, art galleries as well as tourism related facilities such as heritage and interpretive centres.

DerelictLand – land so damaged by industrial or other development that it is incapable of beneficial use without treatment. This includes disused spoil heaps, worked out mineral excavations, abandoned industrial installations and land damaged by mining subsidence. It excludes land derelict from natural causes, land still in use and land with a planning permission containing conditions requiring after-treatment.

Developer Contributions – contributions required as a condition of issuing planning consent, where the scheme would otherwise not be acceptable on planning grounds. These are usually required to fund compensatory works off-site, where necessary improvements can not be made on-site.

Development Plan Documents (DPD) – statutory planning documents comprising of the Core Strategy, Generic Development Control Policies, Site Specific Allocations and Area Action Plans.

Dwelling – a house, flat, bungalow or other permanent structure used (legitimately) as a residence as defined by Class C3 of the Town and Country Planning (Use Classes) Order.

Dwelling or Housing Density (dph)– net density is an expression of the intensity of use, and relates to the number of dwellings per hectare on a site (including roads, pavements, incidental open space and other such features usual in a housing development, but excluding strategic landscaping or highways outside the site).

Employment Land – In the context of the Core Strategy employment land is land that is identified for business, general industrial, and storage and distribution development as defined by Classes B1, B2 and B8 of the Town and Country Planning (Use Classes) Order.

Extra Care/Flexi Care - accommodation (owned, leasehold or tenanted) with care and support available ‘round the clock’ and some provision of communal facilities. The majority of people who live within such a housing scheme will be over the age of 55, but it may also include some younger people with learning disabilities. It relates to the complete package of accommodation, care and support from a range of providers, including the NHS.

European Sites – an umbrella term for two Europe-level nature conservation designations for threatened species applying to areas in the UK : Special Areas of Conservation and Special Protection Areas. These stem from European legislation (the 1992 “Habitats Directive”). It is possible that some national- or local-level designations, such as SSSIs can at the same time be designated SPAs or SACs.

206 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Evening Economy – activity in town centres after normal opening hours, centred on leisure, culture and tourism and generally supported by the NPPF.

Flood Risk Assessment - see 'Strategic Flood Risk Assessment'

Greenfield– a previously undeveloped area of land. Such land is normally, but not exclusively, outside the built up area of an existing settlement in agricultural use. This category can also include land which was once in use (‘brownfield’ or ‘previously developed’) but through the process of time has ‘reverted’ to a natural state (e.g. former-quarry areas) and land within built-up areas which have never been previously developed. It also includes garden land.

Green Belt – an area of principally open countryside surrounding existing built-up areas, the purpose of which is to check the unrestricted sprawl of the built-up area and to safeguard the surrounding countryside against further encroachment.

Green Infrastructure - The network of green spaces and natural elements that intersperse and connect the towns and villages. It is the open spaces, waterways, gardens, woodlands, green corridors, wildlife habitats, street trees, natural heritage and open countryside.

Gross/Net Floorspace (Retail)– Gross floorspace is the total floor area of a building including storage and offices, whilst net floorspace is the area actually used for retail sales.

Heritage Asset - a building, monument, site, place or area of landscape identified as having a degree of significance meriting consideration in planning decisions because of its heritage interest. Includes designated heritage assets and assets identified by the Council (including any local listing).

Household– ‘one person living alone, or a group of people (not necessarily related) living at the same address with common housekeeping – that is, sharing either a living room or sitting room or at least one meal a day’ – as defined in the Census.

Household Size – the average number of people in an area to be found in private households within an area derived by dividing the total population by the total dwelling stock within the area,

HousingLand – in the context of the Core Strategy housing land is land that is identified for dwellings and includes both market and affordable housing irrespective of tenure and ownership.

Housing Trajectory – a projection of future housing provision and requirements. The Housing Trajectory tracks the provision of housing supply over the lifespan of the Core Strategy (2006-2026). The purpose of the Housing Trajectory is to highlight the robustness and soundness of the overall housing strategy in the Core Strategy and how it is likely to perform in relation to the housing requirements.

ICT & E-technology – the use of information and communications technology to provide access to services and businesses, particularly from remote locations.

Infrastructure – generally refers to highway capacity, presence of utilities, etc at accommodating further growth in a given location. In its widest sense it can also refer to services or facilities in a settlement for the same reason.

Interests of Acknowledged Importance – a generic term encompassing any sites or designations which under national planning policy, or national/international legal obligations, would normally be protected from development e.g. nature conservation sites, TPOs, listed buildings/conservation areas etc.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 207 Adopted Core Strategy

Landscape Character Assessment - assesses the whole of the Staffordshire landscape and sub-divides the landscape into areas of similar character, called Landscape Character Types. Subdivisions are also employed dividing up individual character types into those of varying degrees of risk/sensitivity to change.

Landscape-scale Conservation Management - measures, such as buffering and expanding habitats, which can help make biodiversity more robust in the face of climate change by reducing habitat fragmentation and inappropriate adjacent land management.

Leisure - comprises of formal and informal sport and recreational activities, both outdoor and indoor. It also includes passive as well as active pursuits including entertainment venues such as cinemas and town centre uses such as restaurants and nightclubs.

Lifetime Homes standard - A Lifetime Home is one which incorporates 16 design features that together create more accessible and adaptable housing developments intended to increase longevity of usage to, for example the elderly or disabled. To be awarded the standard the development must conform with all of Part M of the Building Regulations and the Housing Corporation Scheme Development Standards.

Listed Building – a building included in a list compiled by the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sport as being of special architectural or historic interest as defined in Section 1 of the Planning (ListedBuildings and Conservation Areas) Act 1990. Buildings are classified in grades to show their relative importance (Grade I, II* and II). The effect of listing on a building, in planning terms, is to safeguard it from demolition or insensitive alteration.

Live-work Units - units of living accommodation which are specifically designed to accommodate work facilities for those residing therein. They may arise from conversion or from new-build, and can occur in both urban and rural areas. As residential use is justified by an element of employment use; planning conditions are normally attached that specify maximum/minimum percentages of residential/employment floorspace.

Local Development Document (LDD) – the collective term for Development Plan Documents, Supplementary Planning Documents and Statement of Community Involvement.

Local Development Framework (LDF) – a portfolio of Local Development Documents. It consists of Development Plan Documents (Local Plan), Supplementary Planning Documents, a Statement of Community Involvement, the Local Development Scheme and Annual Monitoring Reports. Together these documents will provide the framework for delivering the spatial planning strategy for a local authority area.

Local Development Scheme (LDS) – a public statement of the Council’s programme for the production of Local Development Documents.

Local Needs Housing – housing whose occupation is restricted by a condition or legal obligation to persons (and their dependents) currently resident or working in the local area. The ‘Delivering Housing for Local Needs’ SPD will define this more precisely.

Local Plan - a generic term for a plan for the future development of the local area which comprises of development plan documents adopted under the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004. This Core Strategy forms part of the Local Plan for Staffordshire Moorlands.

Local Transport Plan – these are drawn up by [County] transport authorities under the Transport 2000 Act. These are similar to Local Plans in that they are adopted statements of intent, with aims, objectives and targets but in relation to transport improvements. They

208 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

set out priority projects for any funds allocated by central Government. For this reason they should be considered in conjunction with not only planning decisions but also preparation of LDDs.

Low/Zero-Carbon Development – development which incorporates energy efficiency features e.g. sustainable building materials, greater insulation, on-site energy generation; such that over the lifetime of the development, traditional energy usage requirements are reduced/removed.

Mixed Use Development – developments comprising more than one type of use e.g. housing plus commercial, housing plus retail. ‘Live-work’ units are an example.

MUAs (Major Urban Areas) – these are the larger-scale settlements in the West Midlands (including Birmingham and Stoke-on-Trent/Newcastle-under-Lyme) where recent growth has been concentrated. There are none in the Staffordshire Moorlands.

Net Dwellings– total number of dwelling completions minus losses through conversion or changes of use.

North Staffordshire Conurbation – Stoke on Trent and Newcastle-under-Lyme (see also ‘MUAs’).

NPPF - the National Planning Policy Framework which sets out the government's planning policies and how these are expected to be applied.

NPPG - National Planning Practice Guidance which provides guidance to support the policies in the NPPF.

Open Space, Sports and Recreation Facilities - Open Space includes parks and gardens, natural and semi-natural open space (e.g. woodlands, nature reserves), amenity green space (e.g. green spaces in and around housing), allotments, cemeteries and churchyards, civic spaces and provision for children and young people (e.g. play areas, skate parks, informal kickabout areas). Sports and recreation facilities include outdoor sports facilities (e.g. playing pitches, bowling greens, tennis courts) and indoor facilities (e.g. swimming pools, sports halls).

Phasing – Used to describe the action of controlling growth e.g. housing development, so as not to prematurely allow too much growth early on in the Plan process.

Physical Infrastructure– electricity supply, gas supply, water supply and sewerage required to serve development.

PPG/PPS – ‘Planning Policy Guidance’ or ‘Statement’. These are short documents issued by Central Government to Planning Authorities on an irregular basis, providing guidance on a wide variety of Planning matters. These have largely been replaced by the NPPF.

PPG17 Audit – An assessment of open space, sport and recreation facilities across the District undertaken in accordance with PPG17 requirements.

Previously Developed Land (PDL)– as defined in the NPPF this comprises of land which is or was occupied by a permanent structure, including the curtilage of the developed land and any associated fixed surface infrastructure. The definition excludes land that is or has been occupied by agricultural or forestry buildings; land that has been developed for minerals extraction or waste disposal by landfill purposes where provision for restoration has been made through development control procedures; land in built-up areas such as private residential gardens, parks, recreation grounds and allotments; and land that was previously-developed but where the remains of the permanent structure or fixed surface

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 209 Adopted Core Strategy

structure have blended into the landscape in the process of time. There is no presumption that land that is previously-developed is necessarily suitable for housing development nor that the whole of the curtilage should be developed.

Regeneration Sites - The rejuvenation of a run-down or underused area, bringing important wider social and economic benefits.

Regional Spatial Strategy (RSS)– sets out the region’s policies in relation to the development and use of land, and currently forms part of the Development Plan for local authorities. The RSS for the West Midlands was produced by the West Midlands Regional Assembly. The West Midlands RSS was formally revoked under the Localism Act in May 2013.

Rural Diversification - in its simplest terms rural diversification means the establishment of new enterprises in rural locations. This can mean existing businesses entering into new areas of activity or the creation of entirely new enterprises. These enterprises may be an extension of the existing farm business but equally the new activity can be unrelated to agriculture but should be relevant to the rural area and support the rural economy.

Saved Policies or Plans – existing adopted development plans saved for 3 years from the date of commencement of the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act in September 2004. At the end of this 3 year period any Policies which an authority intended to continue using had to be submitted to, and approved for this purpose, by a planning inspector representing the Secretary of State.

Sequential Test – a test conducted by a developer to demonstrate that they have previously assessed all available and viable sites in more central locations, where a less central location is proposed. This approach is particularly pertinent regarding housing and retail developments as per advice in the NPPF.

Schindler Properties - a non-traditional construction of dwellings using pre-reinforced concrete. In the early 1980s it was discovered that a long-term process known as ‘carbonisation’ could over time reduce the structural life of certain types of pre-reinforced concrete homes.

Site Allocations DPD – a DPD which will contain all future allocations of land for housing, employment, retail etc. The lifetime of the SA DPD is shorter than the Core Strategy therefore it should be prepared more regularly.

Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) – sites of national importance designated by English Nature and given statutory protection as areas of special interest by reason of flora, fauna, geological or physiological features. There are 22 SSSI sites within the District.

Social Infrastructure – education, healthcare, community/social facilities, leisure facilities and emergency services required to serve development.

SportsVillage – a nucleus of sports, recreation and leisure facilities to serve a local community.

Statement of Community Involvement (SCI) – sets out the standards which authorities will achieve with regard to involving local communities in the preparation of Local Development Documents and development control decisions. It is not a Development Plan Document and is not subject to independent examination but local authorities' have a statutory duty to produce one and comply with it when producing planning policy documents.

210 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) / Sustainability Assessment (SA) – SEA is a generic term used to describe formal environmental assessment of policies, plans and programmes, as required by the European ‘SEA Directive’ (2001/42/EC). SA is a government requirement for all DPDs to predict the environmental and socio-economic effects of policies and proposals of a plan and are used to inform decisions on plan preparation.

Strategic Flood Risk Assessment (SFRA)– a higher level assessment than traditional FRA. It has two levels:

Level1 - This is a strategic flood risk study (undertaken by a Local Planning Authority), to provide baseline information to support the LDF process, on flood risk across their District. This study is sufficiently detailed to allow application of the Sequential Test for plans and allocations, and to identify whether the application of the Exception Test is likely to be necessary. Level2 - This is a follow-on strategic flood risk study to facilitate the application of the Exception Test. This will be required if inappropriate development is required within a Flood Zone. This will allow the sequential approach to site allocation to be adopted within a flood zone.

Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment (or SHLAA) – a periodic study of potential future housing sites (both market and affordable) across the District, required under the NPPF to be prepared by the District to demonstrate that it can provide adequate future housing supply to meet assessed requirements. It is continually updated on a ‘rolling’ basis.

Strategic Housing Market Assessment (or SHMA) - provides a detailed sub-regional market analysis of housing demand and housing need, identifying the key drivers in the housing market area. In addition it provides a robust evidence base for current and future requirements in terms of market and affordable housing to inform local policies and strategies.

Structure Plan– a strategic planning document produced by the County Council to guide development across the County. The Staffordshire Structure Plan was formally revoked at the same time as the RSS was revoked.

Supplementary Planning Document (SPD) – provides supplementary information in respect of the policies in the Development Plan Documents. Therefore any SPD must ‘link’ to at least one Policy in a DPD. SPDs are different to DPDs inasmuch as whilst their content must be the subject of public consultation, they do not require approval by the Secretary of State.

Sustainability Appraisal (SA)– Tool for appraising policies to ensure that they reflect sustainable development objectives (i.e. social, environmental and economic factors), and are required to be undertaken for all Local Development Documents.

Sustainable Community Strategy– A document which contains a number of crosscutting ‘ambitions’ for the District, stemming from community consultation. The Strategy’s ambitions must be adhered to by all departments in the Authority when producing their plans, etc.

Sustainable Construction - The Strategy for Sustainable Construction represents a commitment from the industry to work towards reducing its carbon footprint and its consumption of natural resources, while creating a safer and stronger industry by training and retaining a skilled and committed workforce. It lays out specific actions by industry and by Government which will contribute to the achievement of overarching targets within each of the main areas covered by the sustainability agenda.

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 211 Adopted Core Strategy

Sustainable Development, Sustainability– generally defined as “development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs”. It means recognising that our economy, the environment and social well-being are interdependent. It requires that we have strong local economies to create the wealth we need to provide for our social infrastructure but in ways that protect and improve the environment. In planning terms this means considering the effects of development in terms of any resource depletions, vehicular/pollution emissions etc, as to whether this can be sustained. Since development location is a factor in car/vehicle use (and vehicle emissions contribute to climate change) sometimes remote locations can be considered ‘unsustainable’, especially when there are no public transport options available.

Sustainable Tourism – tourism development which attempts to make a low impact on the environment and local culture, while helping to support local communities, generate income and employment, and conserve local ecosystems. It is responsible tourism that is both ecologically and locally sensitive.

Travel Plans or Green Travel Plans – A travel plan is a package of practical measures to reduce the cost and environmental impact of travel (particularly climate change) to a premises by offering realistic and cost effective alternatives to cars – for example car sharing, walking, cycling and use of public transport . They are implemented by business premises e.g. offices or factories, usually (but not necessarily) as a requirement of the planning process - for example where such a development might otherwise be refused.

Urban Area – the continuously built up area of a town or village. The Site Allocations DPD will define the urban area by a development boundary.

Use Class Order (UCO)– Classification of land use as defined by the Town and Country Planning (Use Classes) Order 1987 and amended by the Town and Country Planning (Use Classes) (Amendment) (England) Order 2005.

Windfall – a development which counts against an LDF/Local Plan requirement such as housing/employment/retail, which is ‘unexpected’ because it arises from a planning application on a non-allocated site.

212 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Appendix J Village Assessment

ASSESSMENT OF VILLAGE HIERARCHY

POPULATION FACILITIES AND SERVICES

Village % of Total Primary Secondary GP Dentist Opticians Village Post Church Play Library General Public Population Larger and School School Hall Office Facilities (incl Store House [Updated Smaller Surgery mobile) May 2013] Villages population

LARGER VILLAGES Staf

Alton 934 2.7% X X X X X X X X X fordshire

Biddulph Moor 1263 3.7% X X X X X X X X

Blythe Bridge 4658 13.5% X X X X X X X X X X X

Moorlands & Forsbrook

Brown Edge 1943 5.6% X X X X X X X X

Cheddleton 3589 10.4% X X X X X X X X X Core Endon 2605 7.6% X X X X X X X X X X

Strategy Ipstones 822 2.4% X X X X X X X X X Adopted

Kingsley 884 2.6% X X X X X X X

- Upper Tean 3204 9.3% X X X X X X X X X Core March Waterhouses 742 2.2% X X X X X X X X X Strategy

2014 Wetley Rocks 369 1.1% X X X X X X X X 213 214 Adopted

Staf Werrington & 5753 16.7% X X X X X X X X X X X Cellarhead fordshire

SMALLER Core VILLAGES

Bagnall 273 0.8% X X X X X Strategy Moorlands

Blackshaw 320 0.9% X X X Moor

Boundary 137 0.4% X X X Core Bradnop 81 0.2% X X X Strategy Caverswall & 643 1.9% X X X X X X X X Cookshill

Checkley 304 0.9% X X X X X X - March Consall 76 0.2% X X

Cotton 345 1.0% X X X X 2014 Dilhorne 326 0.9% X X X X X X

Draycott 624 1.8% X X X X

Foxt 158 0.5% X X X X X

Froghall 108 0.3% X X

Heaton 52 0.2% X

Hollington 260 0.8% X X X

Hulme 57 0.2%

Kingsley Holt 698 2.0% X X X X

Leekbrook 287 0.8% X X Longsdon 485 1.4% X X X X

Lower Tean 686 2.0% X X

Meerbrook 52 0.2% X X X

Oakamoor 345 1.0% X X X X X X

Rudyard 301 0.9% X X X X X

Rushton 111 0.3% X X X X Spencer

Stanley 145 0.4% X X X

Stockton Brook 360 1.0% X X X X X Staf Swinscoe 136 0.4% X X fordshire Whiston 209 0.6% X X X X X

Winkhill 90 0.3% X

Moorlands POPULATION 34435 100% OF ALL LARGER AND SMALLER VILLAGES Core Table J.1 Strategy Adopted - Core March Strategy 2014 215 Adopted Core Strategy

216 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Key Diagram and Inset Maps

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 217 Adopted Core Strategy

Key Diagram and Inset Maps

218 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 219 Adopted Core Strategy

220 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 Adopted Core Strategy

Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014 221 Adopted Core Strategy

222 Staffordshire Moorlands Core Strategy - March 2014

Adopted Core Strategy